Home

HP Switch E42 User's Manual

Contents

1. 8 15 TIME BASE CIRCUIT a lt lt MOTHER BOARD ASSEMBLY 08328 60028 SERIES 1004 YO TT 0 07 Se T a M EN 2 DISPLAY CONTROL Fox _ 3 fo BT 1 1800 Se aps A A 1 E 1 2 A W H od 1 18 3 Sd e32 1 cs L 4 cas z 3 30 Tow Tow Tow ATEA um 2 3 D pe 24 De 2 P Fe de D d y 52v 5 Ni i 27001 oy RISE A GRIF POM VE 4 7 2700 P O MOTHER 10K 10K x 10K 2100 5 i A A o Lu o s oH
2. Model 5328 qien o 3000 6200 18 3 T8SA Schematic Diagrams re Po eco crs al a Tan mm 3 gay 3 1 0 B 1 mu o 9 295 9 m a 5 pus REMOTE LOCAL FF STORAGE DEVIS 3000 6200 IN m o Ja E of pt ot LOT LST 5 2 M8 9 l atm 20107 wel 13 DATA T EM DIO STORAGE i S IH 5j 2 3300 Sov ag 2 5 s P7 E E 52 Dow CON 3 89 00 ie 5 TE ze x 58 ly 6 i 10K E 3 1 5 DATA _ we IR 10 Dos cya gt eN Hi J Ap a Ai Kae a A um I E pn E E 1 ere 4 TEES r LAM ig gy C LTO
3. Schematic Diagrams gt 52 NOTES xis R23 gr 9 a TE To Maala at INR SD REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS WITHIN THIS 1 m ue m Rie SD A101 VIN pu 2 ASSEMBLY ARE ABBREVIATED ADD FROM AAA 4 VIA BUS LINE 14 T Ep so ASSEMBLY NUMBER TO ABBREVIATION 5 5 A z FOR COMPLETE DESCRIPTION FROM BUS LINE 16 9 CL A49 15 TO VIA BUS LINE 20 RI4E 500 2 UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED RESISTANCE IN OHMS 13 14 TO 4 8 VIA BUS LINE 21 CAPACITANCE IN FARADS I _ INDUCTANCE IN HENRIES D TO A4A 9 VIA BUS LINE 22 UNI LOGIC TABLE R220 1 FROM AI9J1 8 510 I TO VIA BUS LINE 23 FROM A191 C TO A4ACIO VIA BUS LINE 23 Ri lt RBC 500 52V AID REVERENCI INAT IONS DESIGNA 4 M ci c8 R22B CR 500 A ae Q FROM 19 1 5 5 El 5N RI R29 RES FPI TP4 ut FROM AISUI 6 6 108 ui 6 6 10 usc 1 1 RIS 32v I 910 T 3P ES i REN 5 2 500 50 p VIA BUS LINE 25 AI ACT VE ELEMENTS L CHECK 1902 3036 FROM S TII mp m U13C 5 cose TD 18 TO A4ACII VIA BUS LINE 24 FROM BUS LINE 16 9 ca 500 12 1 gt 1 2
4. PART NUMBER 100 1738 100 2522 100 2632 TABLE 6 3 PART NUMBER NATIONAL STOCK NUMBER CROSS REFERENCE INDEX FSCM 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 8C 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 NATIONAL STOCK NUMBER 5905 00 256 8993 5905 00 476 5797 5905 00 476 5718 5905 00 476 5796 5999 00 333 9620 5310 00 450 3324 5310 00 454 1335 5930 00 406 8746 5999 00 230 8833 5999 00 230 8834 5999 00 230 8832 6150 00 008 5075 6625 01 014 3446 5950 01 013 7377 5950 00 138 1381 23905 00 919 5713 5950 00 984 3433 5950 00 199 7652 PART NUMBER REPLACEMENT NATIONAL STOCK FSCM NUMBER 6 27 SMR COD aun A AN NOA RAN AA AMAN DAD ODA OOO Model 5328A Manual Changes SECTION VII MANUAL CHANGES 7 1 INTRODUCTION 7 2 This section contains information for adapting this manual to instruments for which the content does not apply directly This manual applies directly to instruments having serial prefix 18084 Refer td_Section 1 for additional important information about serial number coverage 7 3 MANUAL CHANGES SHEET 7 4 Instruments having serial prefixes higher than 1808A are covered with a Manual Changes sheet following eee TA MANUAL CHANGES
5. P E Soe ox Sa 25 GND 236 5 4 98 GND 2 ID 13Y 1 ES Aha Le e r 88 CERT 8 8 4 NC s H ts LI E 10M i IU VOL TAGE R2 MG REGULATOR 56 20 2 Pate O lt 35 ascrawe 335 paa cl zx AND i 10 MHZ OMHZ OVEN m 190 T 11 ose gut 1 lt OUTPUT OSCILLATOR CONTROLLER JUMPER i R ag 2 AMPL IF IER e u PI 43 GND VOLTAGE t lt em 55 I 2211 36 REGULATOR lt 5810 68 EFC 8 lt d l l 57 E ET A 1518 COMMON 18 15 lt I iu T laid 25y HEATER 1 ES 10K l NC 11 lt 4 T ve l 1 14 T E IU NCTC N AES NC OVEN METAL CAN E nen 7j nc in 0 NC 10 10 L 5 he d 2 12 i ee S ee 13 13 2 P 4 1 7 I 00 6 2V E 1 rid 03 B OR IOMHZ T i EXTERNAL tie t4 STANDARD e CRI FREQUENCY j IF USED EXTERNAL t I SIGNAL DETECTOR V i i Qi 1 OMHZ 16 NOTES J2 1 REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS WITHIN THIS 16 5 14
6. DA 12 2028 2 ns FORME RECOMMENDED CHANGES TO EQUIPMENT TECHNICAL MANUALS SOMETHING WRONG mm rusas FROM YOUR UNIT S COMPLETE ADDRESS Commander Stateside A Depot ATTN AMSTA US Stateside N J 07703 THEN JOT DOWN THE DOPE ABOUT IT ON THIS FORM TEAR 1T OUT FOLD IT AND DROP IT IN THE MAIL PUBLICATION NUMBER T TM 11 5840 340 14 amp P 23 Jan Th Radar PLC 76 BE EXACT PIN POINT WHERE IT 15 IN THIS SPACE TELL WHAT 15 WRONG lt z AND WHAT SHOULD BE DOME ABOUT IT PAGE PARA FIGURE TABLE GRAPH 2 25 2 28 Recommend that the installation antenna alignment procedure be changed thro specify 2 IFF antenna lag rather than 1 REASON Experience has shown that w1th only a 19 lag the antenna servo system is too sensitive to wind gusting in excess of knots and has a tendency to rapidly accelerate celerate as it hunts causing strain to the drive Hunting is minimized by adjusting the lag to 2 without degradation of operation 3 10 3 3 3 1 Item 5 Func colum Change 2 db to 3db REASON ustment procedure for the TRANS POWER FAULT indica calls for a 3 db 500 watts adjustment to light the TRANS POWER FAULT indicator 5 6 5 8 Ad w step f l to read Replace cover plate removed i 1 above REASON To replace the cover plate E 5 For item 2 change the NSN to read 5835
7. FROM Bus ae FREQUENCY C ASSEMBLY 60032 SERIES Lies Bun E m 33 rate gt 0 gt CHANNEL CONTROL 18 PIATI 4 19 HE TF he 4 BUS LINE PA gt Ss gt Ww LITT k WIRE JUMPER i Ea TO 1 SVERLDAD 45 SEE 15 ed th 0 25 6 LT ABDSI l OFFSET tig Lis eis eee ay 15 ADJUST 120 R35 kaa 180 5 m 5 gt Sy 5 si 0 25 p 220 CH VOL v DECADE as V 52v RESET RTT 2 12 10 o Rae 66 oy 50 ers 969 una NOTE 4 5 1000 R60 1 V 1500 519 16 c 3 I RT 5 8 i ELI 52 ibis ar 3 Plats Ae 13 y 4 aaa K 06 2 a 1 PA Li A R3o CAE 4972 sid S10 2 27 1000 20 1 i as y RTI 2p 52 5 i 1100 B Ren X 1000 RTAF ke 3 1000 X B20 Sy 6 aer map 5 2v CRI2 1000U 15 3 5 2v 14 T rs ISY TO RA 2N By neg y Hu Li 2 PRA E AS 13 PIACI 5 Ui
8. Scope of 1 4 Description Instrument Identification Applications 1 16 Equipment Supplied and Accessories Available 1 2 Specifications m INSTALLATION PT Introduction Unpacking and Inspection Preparation for Use Power Requirements Fuse Replacement and Installation Power Cables Operating Environment 2 15 Bench Operation 2 17 Rack Mounting 2 19 Packaging for Shipment Original Packaging Other Packaging Methods 2 3 229 Strago 5 INSTRUCTIONS 3 1 Introduction Frequency Measurements Period Measuremen
9. Oscillator Support 1 Oscillator HP 10544 Decade Counting Assembly DCA 4 79 TimeBase A2 Power Supply 4 11 5V Supply 4 11 4 Function Selector 4 12 4 91 High Speed Multiplexer Main Gate and 1st Decade 4 94 Arming Multiplexer and Arming 4 96 Time Base Multiplexer and Main Gate An Example of Operation A16 Display Assembly 4 13 4 107 Remote Controllable Programmable Input Block Diagram Remote Controllable Programmable Input Schematic 4 16 4 117 19 Switch Control A12 Amplifier Board 4127 10 Synchronizer Board 11 DAC 4 156 A8 Channel C Input 4 162 HP interface Bus Theory 4 173 HP IB A15 Interface Operation 4 178 Overall
10. 4 22 4 18T Bus Command 4 22 Listen Mode 185 4 187 A15 Circuit Operation Model 5328A Table of Contents TABLE OF CONTENTS Continued Section MAINTENANCE sooo uui ER EG Assembly Designations Test Assembly Connection Identification Preventive 5 11 5 13 mm 5 15 Performance ED UOS CES butuh hap end Printed Circuit Component 5 20 Replacing Integrated Circuits iis a curar de adea dd ded e Ro Sensitivity Adjustments Adjustment of Oscillator 5 24 Troubleshooting as s 5 24 Troubleshooting Aids 5 24 5 31 Extender Board 05328 62016 5 24 5 33 IC Troubl
11. RECOMMENDED CHANGES EQUIPMENT TECHNICAL MANUALS SOMETHING WRONG mm FROM YOUR 5 COMPL ADDRESS THEN JOT DOWN THE DOPE ABOUT IT ON THIS FORM TEAR IT OUT FOLD IT AND DROP IT IN THE MAIL DATE 28 79 PUBLICATION NUMBER TITLE TM 11 6625 29 1 1Lh amp P EXACT PIN POINT WHERE IT IS IN THIS SPACE TELL WHAT 15 WRONG WAGE riduacl TABLE AND WHAT SHOULD DONE ABOUT IT NO TEAR ALONG DOTTED LINE TYPEO NAME GRADE OR TITLE ANO TELEPHONE NUMBER SIGN HERE F FORM 5 YOUR OUTFIT WANTS TO KNOW ABOUT YOUR MANUAL 22 2028 2 C vine 4 FILL IN YOUR UNIT S ADDRESS s DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY OFFICIAL BUSINESS PENALTY FOR PRIVATE USE 309 FOLD BACK X E POSTAGE AND FERS PAID DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY 000 314 Commander US Army Communications and Electronics Mater el Readiness Command ATTN DRSEL ME MQ Fort Monmouth New Jersey 07703 rr s s s s s q e s Cup CENA cum AA P v FOLO GALLOG ONOTV YUVAL RECOMMENDED CHANGES TO EQUIPMENT TECHNICAL MANUALS SOMETHING WRONG rm rs unen FROM YOUR UNIT S COMPLETE ADDRESS T
12. gt 323 204 1 5 Ba 1 205 1 o 1 206 100 15 A FROM 152 HIC 210 T 128 5H Figure 5 10 Assembly Flowchart Sheet 2 of 3 Model 5328A Maintenance 5 51 FROM 126 SH AN To 3 TO IT FN SSH 1 SH 330 881 2 A 333 336 334 TO 34 SH i ES gt lt LMA 340 LMS 41 342 574 1 To 75 SH D 375 HRST A FROM T 515 Si ESA LINH TO 124 SH Figure 5 10 Assembly Flowchart Sheet 3 of 3 Model 5328A Maintenance LOCAL ASM STATE TABLE SET 53284 FUNCTION TO FREQ TRIGGER WORD 003 DELAY SET ADDRESS 0 SET 53284 FUNCTION CHECK FREQ RES N 10 SAMPLE RATE Cow DOES 53284 CHECK PROPERLY DISCONNECT HP IB CABLE FROM A15 TURN 53284 POWER SWITCH TO STBY THEN TO OPER 22 gt 900050000000 JPEN ODUNDA bw NY SON OOM d Qo Qn G Oah 00 RO Ae ca c c 2a S DOES 532BA CHECK PROPERLY 2 DISCONNECT ONE END OF 28 CONDUCTOR CABLE DOES 5328A CHECK PROBLEM 15 NOT PROPERLY ON 15 BOARD RECONNECT THE 28 CONDUCTOR CABLE REFER TO LOCAL ASM STATE TABLE 5 52 Figure 5 11 Local Troubleshooting Flowchar
13. Y RU BIL 16 5 16 AA G jh DERE EPA 2 ao ERE ll e E e s Rma A Al SAA s 31 n 0350 RLST MEIST D E wp o p 0 uiae es es ee ee Se SA rere mE m cca uem EUM S g RL5 T10 4 uo A 28 osc 10 7 TTL s 20 u31 10 PA 9 T3 BV COMMON A E lA gt pe ee Lover 5 13109 sS LARM 1 9 27 eel 7 ur L uer IEE 2 EE RETO En AAA O pp F F 27 RL2 JUMPERED TO A2 SW 21 T ied d poe a TEN E AA s PONER SUPPLY gt 21 XAMA usd 1 ux x 25 jr gt 1 uec p mer NE E 1 Ete poor o gp 4 2 S mo M NM a eee FDA X 5 A AA E 24 GND Al UIT 7 EN cx j asa 227497572 2 44 3 1 Ke LA ten me m Seo E 2 5225 eS CANA 23 XAIO FROM Alu 834 ME 23 TI
14. lt gt gt A P al 0 Jm w s s AE 2 m mwa LL 1 kHz 103 ov S gt s mr P O Figure 8 7 A1 Motherboard Assembly Model 5328A Schematic Diagrams OSCILLOSCOPE 180A 1801A 1821A WITH 10 1 PROBE COUPLING DC SLOPE SYNCH INT ACF U9 PIN 2 FDC OV UPN 6 U9 PIN 6 ov M U9 PIN 11 77 011 PIN 7 FDA OV U9 PIN 8 5 DIV 1 ms DIV rap U13 PIN 3 U21 PIN 3 Son 1us DIV ov A U13 PIN 6 U21 PIN 1 O be 2 U13 PIN 8 U21 PIN 11 T m mm sis ss U13 PIN 11 Uig PiN9 1 Snc so Ve U15 U6 PIN 3 UA PING SV DIV 1V DIV 1 ms DIV pono mom oe P A ae us DIV m 4 ov PIN 11 v SRA AV A Vl V m 017 5V DIV PINS 1 us DIV Model 5328A Schematic Diagrams 5328A FUNCTION CHECK FREQ RESOLUTION 1 kHz 103 5V DIV 1 ms DIV 5V DIV 1 ms DIV OSCILLOSCOPE HP 180A 1801A 1802A WITH 10 1 PROBE COUPLING DC SLOPE SYNCH INT ACF DIGIT BUS ADDRESS LINE NO A 45 45 BUS LINE NO 43 43 42 P O Figure 8 7 A1 Motherboard Assembly 8 14 Model 5328 Schematic Diagrams A4 FUNCTION SELECTOR BOARD SAME NUMBERED PINS
15. 1810 0041 0683 1025 0683 1035 1810 0055 0683 2015 0757 0928 1810 0055 0757 0952 0683 1035 0683 1035 0683 1035 0683 2715 0683 5115 0683 1035 0683 2715 0683 1035 0683 1035 0683 1035 0683 1035 1810 0055 0683 1025 0683 1035 0683 1035 0683 1545 0683 1035 0683 5635 0683 1025 0683 4725 0683 6815 0683 1025 0683 5605 0683 5605 0683 5605 0683 5605 0683 5605 0683 5605 0683 5605 0683 5605 0683 5605 0683 1035 0757 0938 0757 0950 0757 0279 0757 0931 0683 1035 0683 1035 0683 1035 0683 4315 0683 1035 3101 1977 1820 0055 1820 1056 1820 0175 1820 0632 1820 0513 1820 0282 1820 0511 1820 0174 1820 0661 1820 1143 1820 0301 1820 0634 1820 0269 1820 0513 1820 0537 1820 0068 1820 0174 1820 0077 1820 0055 1820 0633 1820 0269 1820 0328 1820 0282 1820 0301 CONTINUED ONORE Pean orr PROBO KELLEL FEAUD 0 P QTY N N Near m DESCRIPTION NETWORK RES 9 PIN SIP 15 PIN SPCG RESISTOR 1K 5 25W FC TC 400 600 RESISTOR 10K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 NETWORK RES 9 PIN SIP 15 PIN SPCG RESISTOR 200 5 25W FC TC 400 600 RESISTOR 1 5K 2 125W F TC 0 100 NETWORK RES 9 ON SIP 15 PIN SPCG RESISTOR 15K 2 125W F TC 0 100 RESISTOR 10K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 10K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISOTOR 10K
16. POINT 14 PRESS CONTIJUE stp if L 1 gto 8 o t CHECK POINT 15 wrt 701 F3434513A7987R dsp STEPS 5 6 55 CONTINUE wrt 721 rr454512A3735b37R ort COUPLING beeosspc 2 dsp CHECK POINT 15 PRESS MD Sy a POINT 15 wet 701 2r4365126A379 000 B37 000 R asp STEPS 7 3 PRUSS CONTINUE sto wrt 7191 e r4363126A379 040 B37 0340 R ort IRISSER LEVELS dep LvLS 2R135 CONIINUE stp 5 34 151 132 133 134 135 136 137 135 133 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 den wrt prt asp wrt prt 16 vrt prt wrt prt zo Model 5328 Maintenance Table 5 7 Program Listing Continued SIfCrS 9 19 11 12 PRESS CONTINUE 791 6137 379 049 8374950 5 CHNL 5 SLOPE CHANNEL 3 SGGP0 ePFESS CONTINUE stp 701 497 51237 379 040 05275 50 E CtinL 8 73 gd 3L3PC PPESS CONTINUE etr 791 Pe 1513743 794 050 2275409 G E A Sbork CHNL A 5LuPE PRESS 741 0 513743795 050 2375 0402 1 5 2 A 3LoFL PR6GESS CONTINUE etg CHECK PILNY 15 55 sto if L l 3to lo CHECK POINT 17 ert rci llo ort wrt sIr asp 4rt asc clr wr l cz LUS COL 701 26 REMOTE PREIS CONVE eto 7 LOCAL LUCKSUT 2 2P
17. TO BUS LINE 10 I lors 142 LBX O K z i E FROM AIQJI 10 10 2 TO BUS LINE 8 I f R27 5V es 15 ee E iai T ral FROM BUS LINE T 6 4 TO 19 104 E R24 m lt 10 TO ALIJI CIO I I 1 HRPR r 2 680 FROM 4154418 8 w 1 I 5 2V E NN 1 B CHANNEL m ESOPE 43 5 5 ii i FROM BUS LINE 13 6 T gt 2 TO B T2 589 SIDE v 5 pee esu I 152 COUP y D SOLDER SIDE FROM AI5u4 1 EN 4 61 o Z rs FROM 8US LINE GND 67 10419 16 7 de 2 a 5 4 13 s 5 82 FROM AISJA 6 6 116 212 213 pA 8 TO A1218 I 5 Gm FROM BUS LINE 14 7 9 TO Al9J1 9 2 0 Ji FROM 1544 12 12 ws DL E 41 16 S S l w tt i a 211 Fr T e 14 FROM BUS LINE 12 8 G 192 TO 0 L lt 13 TO AUI JI CI 8 1 5 8 3 2 i ois 1 R268 R26A Pro P 0 500 500 Ji L L FROM 3 s TO UITA AV UI78 T6 LEXT DAC A GRN ERR En 2014 y Al2J1 1 2 x Sis Sa 1 Figure 8 l 6 A10 Synchronizer Schematic and Components 8 29 05 8 SERIAL
18. ASSEMBLY ARE ADO ASSEMBLY NUMBER TO ABBREVIATION AMPLIFIER MULTIPLIER 1 OUTPUT 8 R3 TO REAR FOR COMPLETE DESCRIPTION SELECTION i ul 12 1000 PANEL 2 UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATEO 22P CRZ 15 10 DIVIDER RESISTANCE IN OHMS u CAPACITANCE IN FARADS V INDUCTANCE IN HENRIES a RIS out p 2 15 e 7 io 1000 a2 our pl FI i 3 IMHZ OUT I R2 1900 I 5 2 1 L gt 13 13 TO I0MHZ 9 21 Figure 8 10 A3 A3A1 Oscillator Support Schematic and Components Model 5328A Schematic Diagrams 8 23 TO A10 SYNCHAONIZEA gt ARMING ARMING CHANNEL y MULTIPLEXER ERESET FF SE us BASE TIME BASE CHANNEL MULTIPLEXER INPUT osc RAM ARM R A1 1 HIGH SPEED CHANNELA B C MULTIPLEXER GOSC OSC AND DVM MAIN GATE us 19 RLIIC RL HOPN MAIN GATE MULTIPLEXER UB RL LTOT R LST RL4A LTIF RLICMGF R HTBA RIHTBO RLIHTBB TO A1 MOTHERE FIAST DECADE UTA US U4B ECL TTL PULSE LMG STRETCHER U2C Figure 8 11 A4 Function Selector Block Diagram Model 53284 Schematic Diagrams PINS PINS 1 DVM 1 L ARM RLBIHCI 2 15 2 5 2 ALA 3 5 a 153 3 RLAILTIF 4 HDS 4 GND 4 RIHTB
19. FROM 17 Piate FROM LARM 430 CONNECTOR A s PIMIA TO BUS LIME alot ARM SWITCH FROM AFU3814 FROM EA FROM 4 FROM 41155 21 lt RENTED Previa Ta T Pinter cia ag 189 5 5 1728 WULTIPLEXER c5 FROM 33 Pap ee bor L FROM 25112 IA I FROM piai EE 085 HIGH SPEED MULTIPLEXER FROM 104 AND MAIN GATE Rae FROM 16 sy FROM 16 PIALIS TO OCA FROM 410113 20 lt S Hn R20 192 adila 20 4 82 130 u I _ PDA 3 TO DEA FROM AIDT 27 1600 252 y Pratido TO FROM AIDC IG 22 E s e gt PIACIED TD DCA FIRST DECADE 2 FROM 24 FROM 41018 25 lt 9098 FROM AlUgT BLA FROM AlU25 9 LIO FROM ALUZ61 10 Place BL UE 2700 2100 RL
20. RIS FR LI 4215 Ray at 1000 al toon oo RI Ra pon E R34 R37 ui us 4 SEE NOTE 4 mE MOT ASSIGNED T ANG 20 VIA CRS CR6 AL RT 12 Ris ela LEE cs iu AZ ACTIVE ELEMENTS SEE MOTE 4 REFERENCE Par DESISHATIONS NUMBE CRI 1902 Di ae CRE CRB NOT ASSI CRA 1902 0 12w cra CRIO 150 1 0 1 1000 rele FROM AIG UE YIA 1902 0 Al MOTHERBOAMO H ur 1895 as tw 4 RB aa Qi 4 3 21 SEE NOTE 4 a 1000 Y RIS R25 1853 0 E 1000 3 al IDA T n 2 4 05 0 1854 0 RI 1000 33 2k 5 Q 1065 n TSE RIA ze ul V Ry 120004 AE igzo c us 20 0 12 J 474 i 1 L3 TN 5 nn B s O pe rg S 055281 46 Figure 8 9 2 Power Supply Schematic and Components Model 5328A Schematic Diagrams 8 19 P O Figure 8 10 1 Oscillator Support Schematic and Components Model 5328 Schematic Diagrams AS OSCILLATOR SUPPORT ASSEMBLY OSCILLATOR SUPPORT ASSEMBLY 05328 60027 SERIES 1744 OSCILLATOR 1105444 5 jil
21. CHANNEL INPUT CIRCUIT CARD ASSEMBLY A15 HP 18 INTERFACE CIRCUIT CARD ASSEMBLY 16 DISPLAY CIRCUIT CARD ASSEMBLY A19 ATTENUATOR COVER P N 7101 0470 EXTENDER BOARD P N 05328 62016 POWER CORD P N 8120 1348 4 3 MAINTENANCE CATEGORY MAINTENANCE Inspect Test Adjust Repair Overhaul Repair Overhaul Inspect Repair Inspect Repair Inspect Repair Inapect Inspect Repair Inspect Repair Inspect Repair Inspect Repair Inspect Repair Inspect Repair Inspect Repair Inspect Repair Inspect Repair Inspect Repair Inspect Repair 1 2 thru 9 6 REMARKS TOOL OR TEST FQUIPMENT REF CODE 1 2 10 11 12 SECTION III FOR TOOL AND TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS ELECTRONIC COUNTER UN USM 459 MAINTENANCE CATEGORY NOMENCLATURE TOOL KIT ELECTRONIC COUNTER TK 101 G TOOL KIT ELECTRONIC COUNTER TK 100 G OSCILLATOR H P 652A VOLTMETER SAMPLING ME 426 U SIGNAL GENERATOR 56 1112 V 1 U OSCILLOSCOPE SYSTEM MAINFRAME WITH AMPLIFIER PLUG IN HP 1402 AND HP 1411 PULSE GENERATOR SG 1105 SIGNAL GENERATOR HP 608 CR POWER SUPPLY PP 7547 U HP 6113A VOLTMETER HP 3490 REPAIR KIT PRINTED WIRING BOARD MK 772 U TRANSISTOR TEST SET TS 1836C U THE FOLLOWING EQUIPMENTS WILL BE USED WHEN THE PROGRAMING FUNCTION OF THE AN USM 459 REQUIRES CHECK FOR USE WITH ATE THIS CHECK WILL BE PREFORMED AT THE CONTRACTORS FACILITY GENERATOR SWEEPER HP 8601
22. an aa ORI III awa A n D oad A10 11 12 19 Figure 8 4 5328 View Model 5328A Schematic Diagrams pn ME 5 4 gt EH E D M ZI bos D 2 Fd BR SS Pol il i ee os l gies pre 54 lt gt M k E IT 2 25 5 lt t uP i x 42 3 r ig o 7 27 E 2 LOL Mg tue 227 EB 3 E ae az o Ce 4 m Can ow v Figure 8 5 5328A Bottom View 8 9 Model 5328A Schematic Diagrams 6 11 SRT FROM DISPLAY PAM DISPLAY CONTROL ____ STATE CONTROL BLILTOT 4 BIT FUNCTION CODE LINH TTO A4 SBELECTOA DISPLAY DISPLAY 3 BIT TIME SAMPLE RATE FROM 44 ASSEMBLY ROM OUTPUT INHIBIT FUNCTION CODE S DIGITAL GATE From Bus canes SELECTOR A comparators 22 ANNUNCIATOR FROM DISPLA v r Hs AAA SUFFIX ANN LTR FROM HP IB LODIS CONNECTOR ape DIGIT ADDRESS DIGIT ADDRESS CLOCK ENCODER 2 ul LTR LATCHES U25 LATCHED ROM BITS 027
23. 7 ZI x E a 150 STORAGL n 10 b QU D T 26 DB XA4 B18 BUS 43 41 1 9 4 ly EN H TE SEE 27 GND V cbe ii i tt L DTe 28 5V vi zs id xe Ephes pope n 18 0 00 8 z DA Q s gt 2 Te Yo an Pt 1 Toy 1 E E n R3 an M E 3 7 li nx gt 1 5y E 22 dU 10K IM W du e i 4 Wr _ 5 LEA y 4 _ a eet ERI l za qo UR 1 p an o5 eu WP 14 ols ki Es a Les 55 DD 17 C RS DAT o ai 1 n 4 i s IREN m i a B NOTES AR 41 3 gael L 5 e qa 1 REFERENCE DESANATIOSS IN EA 10 n a a oe _ JE BI q MAIN ASSEMBLY ARE ma 3 y y r DA 2 DATA 1 be gt po ui EAE mer Ha O e ASSEMBLY NUMBER AB3 t a afo PE gle e NIE NES st QUALIFIER FF 1 FOR COMPLETE DESCRIP gg KETE 44 m DEUM 7 2 MUS NOIA yaw gt PP as AA AJ eee oo ap qe p H EUMD Ren Ug 5 fe 4 1 16 8 la B 4 2 LAPALITANLE N FARADS EA iy 5 Ll s 82 INOLCTANCE
24. eee 3 5 5328A Rear Panel Controls and Connectors Programmable Input Switch Configuration for A 3 10 3 9 Slope Switch Settings Level Control Settings 0 cio eo red ra rare mena varese vix OR 3 11 3 11 Hysteresis Band 3 12 3 13 5328A Measurement 3 18 EEN e lee YAY NI al NJ rollo KN KN KH KA KA KR KN i m mi sz P a i gt e Model 5328A List of Figures LIST OF FIGURES Basic Elements of the Frequency Counter Measuring Period 4 2 Basic Elements of a Time interval 4 3 Clock PUISES culata eid reed ERR da Ei ea dt dale Synchronizer Operation with Time Interval Averaging 1 Count Ambiguity Trigger canada Se be altiro UE Re Block Diagram c luo urere Pu tee Bee bee eed on uon Cuba Remote Controllable Programmable Input Block Diagram 4 14 ASM Oscillator Timing Diagram 4 24 10 MHz Oscilla
25. CHECK VALUES SYMPTOM SENSITIVITY TOO HIGH AT oF R3D LON FREQ IBEL N 40042 Edi RBA AND SEE SCHEMATIC SPEC 4 tey RAMS GOMHZ CHECK YALUES SYMPTOM DOUBLE COUNTS AT HIGH INCREASE VALUE OF R28 R30 LEVELS USUALLY Of TO BIG AND R84 580 OR 620 REPLACE IF AT LOW FREQUENCIES INCORRECT PROBLEM CORRECTED PROBLEM CORRECTED ECTEG CHECK ES ul SYMPTOM SENSITIVITY TOD Lom cam IN i5 8 16 OF R23 RJO BELOW SHOPTED R83 AND RB4 SEE SCHEMATIC ON AB SCHEMATIC SET SAMPLE RATE MAX RESOLUTION 10 SEC sq La WAVE YES Ua PIN 3 MOST OF THE TIME SUSPECT MAIN GATE SUSPECT MECL 34 WAVE 54 WAVE 10 US PIN 2 SUSPECT FUNCTION SELECTOR SUSPECT uil OR Q ge TRANSISTORS SUSPECT STABLE WAVEFORM BUT AMPLITUDE TOQ SMALL WAVEFORMS CHANGE uz Figure 5 11 Address Switch Troubleshooting Flowchart 76 6 15 SETS 5328A REMOTE 272 LIGHT ON LISTEN MODE PRESS 5328A TROUBLESHOOTING LIGHT ON FLOWCHART RESET BUTTON 2 5 REFER REM
26. E Ee d uices il xA MULTIPLEXER m PE AM 5v ae _ LAPRU21D 5 sab j tein ede ES LET ADDRESS iem 414 3 4 3 15 FA BUS 37 XA16 6 S pr oja TT aes ibo pp de T E 16 LMG XA4 A17 BUS 38 CO HE may n 2949 Ln 1 H up a HS 10K T 1 V LPXT BUS 38 CER Lacie Ht 0 y y V m 15 18 LANN BUS 41 pr 7 1 9 ba sa uL E 2 19 SRT A1 U4 16 24 Jm i D Tix T 4 OSCILLATOR A _ ME o 20 HDS XA4A 4 BUS 14 R3IF h uy 1 lb H np dus 4 LISTEN AA d 1V t J l i n Specs RS 7 i p 7 294 E mu 23 asl 5 20 J8 2 L ENS 2 5 Fi 1 0 35 82 I El L aa JUE STORAGE LOS 3 Y 0 22 DC XA4 B15 BUS 42 t qH Hen e i a 10K 16 i iV RESET 23 DD XA4 B16 BUS 42 ET T i n Se 1 is z AN NS f aue dus 24 s m s M dl Weeds dL H 25 DA X 4817 BUS 43 gt TD MM E U
27. 8 27 Model 5328 Schematic Dragrams 8 28 PROGRAMMING INTERFACE SYNCHRONIZER PRUMIER ART DATA TO DACS PROGRAM DATA GH BC ADDAESSABLE STATE CHANEL INTE APACE LAFCH BUFFER PHOURAM OAT A MDO MDA VE m TO AIF DECIMAL POINT ENTER DAC CONTROL Gate Vir EXT DAC MODE CONTROL lear HESET BELT AY TRI STATE BLFFFER CHANNEL A uP PROC DAEA INPUT DATA at MB TR TO DAE TO A1 TCL ORs LIME RECEIVER ONE SHOT MULTI HE PLEXER Wee STOP ALS ITD CHK NORM CHANNEL CONTROL CONTROL LIME RECEIVER ONE SHOT PLEXER us uti RLE IHCI wala 510P S4 NCH RONIZEAR us 12 6 SYNCHRONIZER RESET CONTROL S13 14 Figure 8 15 10 Synchronizer Block Diagram Model 5328 AIO SYNCHRONIZER ASSEMBLY 05328 60020 SERIES 1708_ _
28. eo T are p 22 sp U6 12 2 AA t asp uo meer 22 8 05 ui FROM Uni 8 ous xui FROM E A ASA AA 21 ro eA Er E OA PA 0u5 xut 7 20 KAIO 3 m FROM A166 Fu IA T S i mz una POR j A CENT 19 W008 FROM ius 1 aa E umm 18 045 09 1 OMHZ a SS J SESI SENI Pu lA v a Ei ME 17 GND 1 3 p 16 C XA5 XAB i E E Ho oc jas op dada i LJ opem Eee i HOS 10 0202 SND A el AE PA 5 LAR TO dm UM id A AA c 2 i HOR wn Por etc ee gt Rr PAW e rs 5 i i cams uu eet EYE lt LE pepe E s S S er A Lr BTE Exe i m 9 IL LL a TILL SEP ws 44 r corn pep
29. 30V 50MA 2NS 30V 50MA 2NS D D 750PS 750PS 750PS 750PS 750PS 750PS 750PS 750PS 750PS 750PS 750PS 750PS 7 PD 25W 7 PD 25W DO 35 TRANSISTOR J FET N CHAN D MODE TRANSISTOR J FET P CHAN D MODE TRANSISTOR J FET P CHAN D MODE TRANSISTOR J FET N CHAN D MODE TRANSISTOR PNP TRANSISTOR NPN TRANSISTOR NPN TRANSISTOR NPN RESISTOR 620 5 RESISTOR 5 11K RESISTOR 200 5 RESISTOR 430 5 RESISTOR 3 83K RESISTOR 620 5 RESISTOR 17 8K RESISTOR 14 7K RESISTOR 19 6K RESISTOR 21 5K RESISTOR 16 2K FACTORY SELECT RESISTOR 200 5 RESISTOR 3 48K RESISTOR 430 5 RESISTOR 17 8K1 RESISTOR 14 7K RESISTOR 19 6K RESISTOR 21 5K RESISTOR 16 2K RESISTOR 3 48K RESISTOR 100 5 RESISTOR 3 83K RESISTOR 1K 55 RESISTOR 1M 5 RESISTOR RRMR 1K 10 RESISTOR TRMR 1K 10 RESISTOR 10K 5 RESISTOR TRMR 20K 10 RESISTOR TRMR 20K 10 RESISTOR 1K 5 RESISTOR 1M 5 RESISTOR TRMR 1K 10 C SIDE ADJ 17 TRN 25W FC TC 400 500 C SIDE ADJ 17 TRN RESISTOR 100 5 RESISTOR TRMR 1K 10 RESISTOR 3 48K RESISTOR 17 8K RESISTOR 14 7K RESISTOR 19 6K RESISTOR 21 5K RESISTOR 16 2K FACTORY SELECT RESISTOR 3 83K RESISTOR 3 48K RESISTOR 430 5 RESISTOR 5 11K RESISTOR 17 8K RESISTOR 14 7K RESISTOR 19 6K RESISTOR 21 5K RESISTOR 16 2K FACTORY SELECT SEE INTRODUCTION TO THIS SECTION FOR ORDERING INFORMATION SI PD 300MW FT 150MHZ SI PD 300MW FT 200MHZ SI PD 300MW FT 200MHZ SI PD 300MW FT 200MHZ 25W
30. FROM A FROM B Figure 3 4 Multiple STOP Pukes 3 3 Model 5328A Operation 3 4 3 18 To set up time interval measurement the marker outputs may be monitored oscilloscope sde Figure 3 5 to indicate where the channels are triggering with relation to the time interval of interest The GATE MARKER OUT is high during the time interval being measured OUTPUT INPUT INPUT MARKER A B OSCILLOSCOPE Figure 3 5 Monitoring Marker Outputs 3 19 In T I and T I AVG A B with the rear panel ARM switch OFF the counter is armed by the run down of the SAMPLE RATE control With the rear panel ARM switch and AVG are armed by an event at the C input For T I AVG only one arming signal is required per average measurement i e the counter doesn t need to be armed prior to each individual time interval in the time interval measurement 3 20 RATIO MEASUREMENTS 3 21 For ratio measurements the 5328A has wide bandwidth good sensitivity and complete signal conditioning of the Channel A B and C input amplifiers 3 22 Two ratio functions are available B A and C A The ratio of the frequency at B or C to the frequency at A is measured for N counts of A where N is selected by the RESOLUTION switch The resolution of the measurement improves with increasing N and is given by 1 part in x N or x N Since the range of is 0 10 MHz while B is 0 100 MHz the lower fre
31. FS oa y Je 3 1 3 ALL BLS L NES ARE NEG Saf al THRU LINES COU TER 15 Yo e 1 ENEN E os TALK A 2 peters GE e Seay We _ ass zd cue 2 8 37 Figure 8 22 15 HP IB Interface Schemaatic and Components Model 5328A Schematic Diagrams LHS ANNUNCIATORS DS17 DS18 DS19 CATHODE DRIVER TRANSISTORS 010 012 1 MCTHER BOARD INPUTS FROM A1U39 DIGIT DECODER ANODE DRIVER TRANSISTORS Q1 09 RHS ANNUNCIATORS DS12 DS16 DISPLAY DIGITS DS1 DS8 DS9 OPT 30 ANNUNCIATOR INPUTS CATHODE FROM ATUM TRANSISTOR BCD TO SEVEN SEGMENT DECODER CATHODE DRIVER TRANSISTORS Q13 Q20 SWITCH FREQ TIME ENABLE DISABLE RESOLUTION N BASE CODE FROM A108 SWITCH 54 FUNCTION 1 FUNCTION CODE MOTHERBOARD TO SWITCH POWER SUPPLY Al MOTHERBOARD SAMPLE TT CONTROL R6 Figure 8 23 A16 Display Block Diagram 8 39 Model 5328A Schematic Diagrams 1 RMLIGHT 2 Bi 7 3 82 3 4 LSWL 2 5 5 6 FA 8 7 NC 7 8 GND 8 9 83 5 19 NC 32 e 3 4 b 15 NC 106 9 177 88 18 NC 18 5V
32. I POVN 3oo g 19J39AuoO 1 8 3910314 CLKA TO CURRENT VREF PARALLEL SOURCE 03 CONVERTER DATA CURRENT TO VOLTAGE os DIODE SWITCH PULSE TRAIN NETWORK CONVERTER PULSE TRAIN 01 CRS 6 8 10 ud LEVEL TRANSLATOR 831 3 36 CURRENT R37 38 39 PULSE TRAIN 0 SYNCHRONIZER PULSE TRAIN 0 564 CLK POLARITY VOLTAGE LINES a SOURCE BESET PULSE TRAIN 0 _ CRI3 CRM PS PULSE TRAIN 10 CURRENT SOURCE U3 1 LEVEL TRANSLATOR R134 R6 8 10 SIGN SERIAL x TO PARALLEL PULSE TRAIN 0 DIODE SWITCH NETWORK CR 234 CURRENT TO VOLTAGE PULSE TRAIN Q CONVERTER U CONVERTER TAL TO CLK CMOS CLK CONVERTER 06 CURRENT US SOURCE U3 Model 5328A Schematic Diagrams All DAC ASSEMBLY 05328 60023 SERIES 616 _ _ 1 1 1 1 55 410 i I 1 PD RG om Jh rua L 200 1 m NOTES
33. 1480 0116 4040 0752 MODEL 5328A REPLACEABLE PARTS REFERENCE DESIGNATION A8 A8C1 A8C2 A8C3 A8C4 A8C5 A8C6 A8C7 A8C8 A8C9 A8C11 A8C12 A8C13 A8C14 A8C15 A8C16 A8C17 A8C18 A8C20 A8C21 A8C22 A8C23 A8C24 A8C25 A8C26 A8C27 A8C28 A8C29 A8C30 A8C31 A8C32 A8C33 A8C34 A8CR1 A8CR2 A8CR3 A8CR4 A8CR5 A8CR6 A8CR7 A8CR8 A8CR9 A8CR10 A8CR11 A8CR12 A8CR13 A8CR14 A8F1 A8L1 A8L2 A8L3 814 815 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 A8R1 A8R2 A8R3 A8R4 A8R5 HP PART NUMBER 05328 60032 0160 4084 0180 0428 0180 0428 0180 0155 0160 4084 0180 1701 0160 2599 0160 1084 0160 3879 0160 3878 0160 3879 0160 4084 0180 0474 0180 0474 0160 4084 0160 3879 0160 3878 0160 3878 0160 3879 0160 3879 0160 3879 0160 3878 0160 4084 0160 3879 0180 0428 0160 2055 0160 2055 0160 2055 0160 3878 0180 0428 0160 3878 0160 4182 1901 0050 1901 0518 1901 0518 1901 0518 1901 0518 1901 0535 1901 0535 1901 0050 1901 0050 1901 0535 1901 0050 1901 0050 1901 0050 1901 0535 2110 0301 05305 20104 05305 20105 05305 60205 05305 60206 9100 1788 9100 1788 9140 0137 9100 1788 05303 80001 1854 0071 1854 0071 1854 0092 1854 0092 1854 0092 1854 0092 1854 0071 1853 0036 0683 1035 0683 1035 0683 2715 0683 1055 0683 1035 WWW 0909 DIA AIJDAI CO CO CO CO
34. A1581 A15U1 A15U2 A15U3 A15U4 1505 1506 1507 1508 1509 15010 A15U11 A15U12 A15U13 A15U14 A15U15 A15U16 A15U17 A15U18 A15U19 A15U20 HP PART NUMBER 0170 0024 0180 0229 0180 0229 0180 1746 1910 0016 1910 0016 1910 0016 1910 0016 1910 0016 1910 0016 1251 3283 1854 0215 1854 0215 1854 0215 1854 0215 1853 0036 0683 3035 0683 1035 0683 1035 0683 2715 0683 3325 0683 4725 0683 1035 0683 1035 0683 1035 0683 1035 0683 1235 0683 1035 0683 2715 0683 2715 0683 1035 0683 1035 0683 1535 0683 4725 0683 4725 0683 1035 0683 1035 0683 4725 0683 4725 0683 1035 0683 2725 0683 2025 0683 3025 0683 3025 1810 0136 1810 0136 1810 0055 1810 0055 1810 0055 1810 0055 0683 1035 3101 1973 1820 0261 1820 0904 1820 0658 1820 0174 1820 0621 1820 0658 1820 0099 1820 0658 1820 0174 1820 0621 1820 0077 1820 0658 1820 0627 1820 1057 1820 0656 1820 0621 1820 0054 1820 1056 1820 1358 1820 0269 CONTINUED Oi ooooo wwwwe PNNOP PRrRrern PRANUA WOON NOUSUA NOG EO Q o QTY ne DESCRIPTION CAPACITOR FXD 022UF 20 200VDC POLYE CAPACITOR FXD 33UF 10 10VDC TA CAPACITOR FXD 33UF 10 10VDC TA CAPACITOR FXD 15UF 10 20VDC DIODE GE 60V 60MA 1 5 DO 7 DIODE GE 60V 60MA 1 5 DO 7 DIODE GE 60V 60MA 1 5 DO 7 DIODE GE 60V 60MA 1 5
35. Hertz integrated circuit inside diameter intermediate frequency impregnated inch incandescent include s input insulation internal kilogram kilohertz kilohm kilovolt pound inductance capacitance light emitting diode low frequency iong left nand limit linear taper used in parts list linear lockwasher low local oscillator logarithmic taper used in parts list logarithm ic iow pass filter low voltage meter distance milliampere maximum megohm meg 10 used in parts list metal film metal oxide medium frequency microfared used in parts list manufacturer milligram megahertz mH mho MIN min MINAT mm MOD MOM MOS ms MTG MTR mVp p mVrms mw MUX MY MA uF HH Mmho us MVac uVp p 4Vrms nA NC N C NE NEG nF NI PL N O NOM NORM NPN NPO NRFR NSR ns nw OBD OH OP AMPL OPT osc Ox oz P PAM BRZ PHL ABBREVIATIONS CONTINUED millinenry mno minimum minute time minute plane angle miniature millimeter modulator momentary metai oxide semi conductor millisecond mounting meter indicating device millivolt millivolt ac millivolt dc millivolt peak millivolt peak to peak millivolt rms milliwatt multiplex mylar microampere microfar
36. Model 5328A Schematic Diagrams 8 33 i 2 A Pro 4 9 8 2 FROM BUS LINE 14 T q S 0 FROM BUS LINE 12 S 4 i FROM Bus Lines rl ITE 24 14 17 Pro 1207 267 ES ERES EN 820 FROM T I eu i pin 12 220 y Q 1 dl pata 10000 10 FROM 41023645 4 gt mt t Ayo d i 2 Li cs ret 11 2 16000 Y FROM M aen pio Lever Y a 5 FROM 2 cx Sij 20 3 wa y m Pro PI 5V s av FROM 3 Cour Z FROM AI9 304 4 A SLOPE FROM 419346 6 A ATTEN KIO Li SLOPE R26 10K R48 106 eli ca 2000 iu Y REG R 2000 FROM 9 FROM 4191319 E _ nl FROM 16 A COUP Ll XIOCI TTEN FROM 4193112 12 B ATTEN m m FROM 3 FROM TO K18J3 9 FROM 113 FROM AIOJSIT FROM 410315 FROM A 1043187 FROM A 104302 FROM AIGJS 12 gt FROM Al0J3014 FROM A10 3013 FROM AIDJSIB 8 FROM AJ003110 10 gt T R22
37. 0683 4315 0683 2715 0683 3315 0683 1825 0683 1825 0683 2725 0683 2725 0683 2725 0683 1825 0683 1815 0683 8205 0683 1315 0683 5115 0683 2715 0683 2715 0683 6815 0683 1825 1810 0041 1810 0080 0698 5103 0683 1825 1820 1225 1820 1052 1820 0629 1820 0629 1820 0622 1820 0829 1820 0809 1820 0802 1820 0328 1820 0074 1480 0116 4040 0752 CONTINUED XO OY O ANDE YI 0QO 0 0 woous QTY 11 DESCRIPTION CAPACITOR FXD 800PF 1 300VDC MICA CAPACITOR FXD 60PF 5 300VDC MICA CAPACITOR FXD 01UF 80 20 100VDC CER CAPACITOR FXD 01UF 80 20 100VDC CER CAPACITOR FXD 01UF 80 20 100VDC CER CAPACITOR FXD 15PF 5 500VDC MICA CAPACITOR FXD 1000PF 10 200VDC POLYE TRANSISTOR NPN SI PD 350MW FT 300MHZ TRANSISTOR NPN SI PD 350MW FT 300MHZ TRANSISTOR NPN SI PD 350MW FT 300MHZ RESISTOR 510 5 25W FC TC 400 600 RESISTOR 130 5 25W FC TC 400 600 RESISTOR 82 5 25W FC TC 400 500 RESISTOR 510 5 25W FC TC 400 600 RESISTOR 510 5 25W FC TC 400 600 RESISTOR 2K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 180 5 25W TC 400 600 RESOSTPR 2K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 180 5 25W FC TC 400 300 RESISTOR 2K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 180 5 25W FC TC 400 600 RESISTOR 2K 5 25W TC 400 700 RESISTOR 180 5 25W FC TC 400 600 RESISTOR 1 8K
38. 2 5 E nur eut Q6 QT I854 DDT 9 FROM BUS LINE 13 r 5 2 w Li 2N3391 l 14 bg m i au BBU pa vi ua 0059 ROM BUS LINE 24 IT GND us re Mik nye PORT RUM gt FROM BUS LINE 13 E lt a tre 5 cll 1820 9693 ca 20 aiy 33P SNT4ST4N Tg p EME 1 us us 1826 01851 R36 y cre R25 1 I 1 100 e L 8 A 299 12 UB 1820 1425 i SNTAL S 32N UT wis FROM AiDJILIDE 10 Vie 1820 0976 5 2 L e UB UID 1820 265 uiz UI3 Uia MC 14527CP i w 1 Figure 8 18 A11 Digital to Analog Converter 8 31 Schematic and Components 61 8 211814 LOGIC CONTROL E DATA iU un REMOTE CONTROL DATA RELAY DRIVERS ut 3 IMPEDANCE BUFFER ATTENUA TOR X1 X10 X100 R42 46 K3 82 TL SELECT RELAY K1 SELECT 92 FL Th TL TL REM LOC fe e TO SYNCH REM REMOTE LOC LOCAL A y TL TRIG LEVEL TO MARKER 8 REL AY CONTROL TO MARKER IMPEDANCE BUFFER RC RC uU SE P COMA ATTENUA RELAY TOR X1 X10 RELAY 47 K6 112 SYNCH wa n
39. 80PF 10 200VDC CER 1UF 20 50VDC CER 01UF 20 100VDC CER OOPF 20 100VDC CER 01UF 20 100VDC CER UF 20 50VDC CER 5UF 10 20VDC 5U 10 20VEDC TA 1UF 20 50VDC CER 010 20 100VDC CER OOPF 20 100VDC CER 000 20 100VDC CER 01UF 20 100VDC CER 01UF 20 100VDC CER x 01UF 20 100VDC CER 000 20 100VDC CER 1UF 20 50VDC CER 01UF 20 100VDC CER 8UF 20 6VDC TA 010 80 20 100VDC CER 010 80 20 100VDC CER 010 80 20 100VDC CER 000PF 20 100VDC CER 8UF 20 6VDC TA 000PF 20 100VDC CER 01UF 20 200VDC CER 80V 200MA 2NS DO 35 80V 200MA 2NS DO 35 80V 200MA 2NS DO 35 80V 200MA 2NS DO 35 80V 200MA 2NS DO 35 80V 200MA 2NS DO 35 FAST BLO 281X 093 BLY BNC BLY SMC ZMAX 680 OHM 180 MHZ ZMAX 680 OHM 180 MHZ Q 60 19DX 44LG NOM ZMAX 680 OHM 180 MHZ SI PD 300MW FT 200MHZ SI PD 300MW FT 200MHZ I PD 200MW FT 600MHZ SI PF 200MW FT 600MHZ SI PD 200MW FT 600MHZ SI PS 200MW FT 600MHZ SI P 300MW FT 200MHZ SI PD 310MW FT 250MHZ 25 FC TC 400 700 25 TC 400 700 25 TC 400 600 25 FC TC 800 900 25 TC 400 700 CODE 28480 28480 28480 28480 56289 28480 56289 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 51642 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480
40. RATIO B A RATIO C A Counter will measure the ratio of the frequency at B 0 to 100 MHz or C 30 to 500 MHz to the frequency at A 0 to 10 MHz for N counts of A Description The 1 MHz time base output from the rear panel of the 5328A drives the A B or C input channels of the counter 5 8 Model 5328A Maintenance Table 5 4 Performance Test Continued Setup HP 5328A INPUT INPUT INPUT A B C Set the 5328A Function switch to RATIO B A Freq Resolution N switch to 1 kHz 103 Level A and B to PRESET AC coupling on both channels X10 ATTEN on both channels COM A Verify that the counter displays 1 000 Mark results on performance test record Set the 5328A Function switch to RATIO C A SEP Disconnect the channel B input and reconnect it to channel C Verify that the counter displays 1 000 6 TIME INTERVAL AND TIME INTERVAL AVERAGE Specification T I A B counter measures time intervals 100 ns to 108 see between a start signal at the channel A input and a stop signal at the channel B input AVG A B counter measures time intervals 0 1 ns to 10 see between a start signal at the channel A input and a stop signal at the channel B input The number of time intervals over which the time interval average measurement is made can be selected by the FREQ RESOLUTION N switch Description A 1 MHz signal drives the A and B channel inputs of the 5328A counter Setup HP 651 B HP 5328A TEST O
41. T i 20 cia i SEE T fara 80 DISPLAY STROBE CIRCUITS a i 15 NOTE 6 HiZ Rin gt Ria 560 550 5 R26 5 T 42 Rid R 4 R55 ix _ SUS LINE BATA 5 B 17 IB 19 2r x En 2 22 5v ALL EXCEPT UZ QI PITIO 10 14 DATA B s 43 An LR 15 18 L4 TSU 13 erpe 5 ssi DATA C pl 680 120 42 y En 15 12 PHAISG 15 m RTE c29 T 154 270 100 Y 1 p gt 8 51 42 i 5 V 21814 m 1 sv 3 2000 i AIUZTUHSI p 4126 j 1 44 Pig 17 036 LODCA 1 REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS WITHIN THIS 4 JUMPER BETWEEN 2 15 AND 124181 ASSEMBLY ARE ABBREVIATED ADO NORMALLY OMITTED ADDED FOR LOWIER ASSEMBLY NUMBER TO ABBREVIATION SENSITIVITY FOR COMPLETE DESCRIPTION 5 IF NO INPUT COUNTED THE VOLTAGE gnat ne ga n 2 UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED USIS 16 LOWER THAN 06 Stage RESISTANCE IN OHMS 6 NORMALLY OMITTED ADDED CAPACITANCE IN FARADS NECESSARY TO BOOST HIGH FREQUENCY INDUCTANCE HENRIES GAIN 3 ASTERISK INDICATES SELECTED COMPONENT AVERAGE VALUES SHOWN For Optimum AC Signal Fo Gpumum AC Ssgrvat For Optimum Ea 1 2 For Opt mom U 1 Figure 8 14 A8 Channel C Schematic and Components
42. YN 0160 3879 0160 3879 0160 3879 0160 3879 0160 0128 wuy CONTINUED QTY m DESCRIPTION RESISTOR 200 5 25W FC TC 400 600 RESISTOR 3 83K 1 125W F TC 0 100 RESISTOR 620 5 25W FC TC 400 600 RESISTOR 430 5 25W FC TC 400 600 RESISTOR 200 5 25W FC TC 400 600 RESISTOR 620 RESISTOR 10K RESISTOR 1 5K 1 RESISTOR 1 5K 5 RESISTOR 1 5K 5 25 TC 400 600 25 FC TC 400 700 125W F 0 100 25W FC TC 400 700 25W FC TC 400 700 de RESISTOR 825 1 125W F TC 0 100 RESISTOR 100K 5 25W FC TC 400 800 RESISTOR 1K 55 25W FC TC 400 600 RESISTOR 825 1 125W F TC 0 100 RESISTOR 1K 55 25W FC TC 400 600 je NETWORK RES 9 PIN SIP 15 PIN SPCG RESISTOR 2M 5 25W FC TC 900 100 RESISTOR 2M 5 25W FC TC 900 1100 CONNCECTOR SGL CONT PIN 04 5 82 RND CONNECTOR SGL CONT PIN 04 5 82 RND CONNECTOR SGL CONT PIN 04 IN BSC 8Z RNS CONNECTOR SGL CONT PIN 04 5 82 RND CONNECTOR SGL CONT PIN 04 IN BSC 8Z RND CONNECTOR SGL CONT PIN 04 5 82 RND IC 201A OP AMP TO 99 IC FF TTL S D TYPE POS EDGE TRIG IC 324 OP AMP 14 DIP P IC 201A OP TO 99 IC SCHMITT TRIG TTL LS NAND QUAD 2 INP IC 324 OP AMP 14 DIP P IC SHF RQTR CMOS D TYPE SERIAL IN IC MULTR CMOS IC MULTR CMOS IC MULTR CMOS IC SHF RGTR CMOS D TYPE SERIAL IN IC MULTR CMOS IC MULTR CMOS IC MULTR CMOS IC SHF RGTR CMOS D TYPE S
43. l FROM A1U3I 10 VIA BUS LINE 19 AND 29 12 CT RL5 110 52V RI6D 820 1320 52V 1820 FROM AIU3I 9 VIA BUS LINE 15 8 500 1 R8 R6 3 6IV 4 5 21 U2 ug 1820 1049 I 4700 SI 10 2 2000 s jo DM8097N 5 y 5 2Y 1 Ua 05 1820 0802 RIO 3000 100 MHZ olu R7 5 2V Ut0 MC 10102 05 sio ne v S 1820 0817 FROM A14 VIA BUS LINE 10 oe ol lo 510 RII m 1616 0821 3 E clle 180 FROM AI4 T VIA BUS LINE 18 TI ose pae E a FROM 8 20 is un 1820 1359 I u MDA 14 TO AllJ1 5 Ul 3 4 5 6 I0 u13 1820 0803 Lo H 2 14 zm r lt 2 TO AllJI 2 1 1820 1245 I 5 m PROGRAMMING INTERFACE s lt FENES L S i cur sik 4 ii 3 R26C R26E R26F R266 28260 ASLOPE i 32 500 500 500 2500 500 CHANNEL 2 0 2 1 E on FROM 15 550 5 Y 9 34 ATTEN a 6 7 8 5 5v 35V T 22 0 A12J1 012 mn FROM AISJ4 2 2 5 Loc ib CE e i Tli mt 1 1 o 5 1 i I FROM AI5J4 3 sr 7 an 15 lg Ez lt 13 TO E I u 7 107 Is s ij he FROM A15J4 4 4 YT A EM or pS TO 10 Be p 804 1 4 10 4 3 3 5 PO 5 05 s HINY TO FROM 1108
44. shifted into U11 causes U6 pins 2 and 6 to go high The highs on pins 2 and 6 cause pins 1 and 7 to go low The low at U6 1 causes CR11 to be forward biased Forward bias ing CR11 causes U6A to sink all of the current from the positive current source This disables the positive current source and With U6 7 low CR12 is reverse biased enabling the negative current source U3B and Q4 4 154 The signal at the anode of CR8 is the inverted output from the rate multipliers When the anode of CR8 is low CR8 is reverse biased and current flows through CR10 into U4 2 When the anode of 8 is high CR8 is forward biased and current flows from Q4 through CR8 4 19 Model 5328A Theory of Operation 4 20 4 155 Averager U4 converts the current pulses supplied via CR10 into a dc output voltage The averager generates the output voltage proportional to the duty cycle of the input current pulses 4 156 A8 Channel C Input 4 157 The A8 board contains circuitry to amplify and detect input signals up to 500 MHz a divide by 10 counting chain high speed gate and circuitry to drive the least significant digit in the display 4 158 The input signal enters J1 and continues through a fuse F1 into a limiter circuit com posed of diodes CR2 5 and a 50 ohm termination Diodes CR2 5 have 70V reverse breakdown voltage and limit the signals below that value to approximately 600 mV to protect amplifier U1 Fuse F1 is rated at 12
45. 0140 0221 0160 3875 0121 0180 0160 3456 0160 2055 0160 2055 0160 0576 1902 0579 1901 0040 1901 0040 m 9140 0131 9100 1788 9140 0096 9140 0096 eoU 1854 0215 1854 0215 1853 0036 m 0683 1025 0683 1025 0683 1225 0683 1035 0683 0475 0757 0200 0757 0439 0683 4715 0683 1015 NOB YH 0683 1005 0811 1856 2100 3103 0683 1025 0683 1035 FOO NUM 0683 1035 0683 1025 0698 3136 aor 1820 1490 1820 1428 1820 0439 1820 1052 1826 0276 anoon 05328 60115 8120 0229 0890 0029 1250 0824 1250 0870 1250 0952 1250 0957 1250 0960 1250 0964 ZW O0 BODO 0380 0310 1250 0835 1251 2035 8159 0005 05328 60005 0160 3879 0160 4084 0140 0215 0140 0215 0160 2055 0180 0210 0160 2055 0180 0210 0160 2055 CONTINUED QTY rerne BR m PERRERA DESCRIPTION CAPACITOR FXD 1UF 20 50VDC CER CAPACITOR FXD 47PF 20 200VDC CER CAPACITOR FXD 01UF 80 20 100VDC CER CAPACITOR FXD 01UF 80 20 100VDC CER CAPACITOR FXD 220PF 1 300VDC MICA CAPACITOR V TRMR CER 15 60PF 200V PC MTG CAPACITOR FXD 220PF 1 300VDC MICA CAPACITOR FXD 22PF 5 200VDC CER 0 30 CAPACITOR V TRMR CER 15 60PF 200V PC MTG CAPACITOR FXD 1000PF 10 1KVDC CER CAPACITOR FXD 01UF 80 20 100VDC CER CAPACITOR FXD 01UF 80 20 100VDC CER CAPACITOR FXD 1UF 20 50VDC CER DIODE ZNR 5 11V 5 DO 15
46. 1 1 1 1 1 1 2200000000332 22 200000000 322200002223 2 gt 000030000 H00 OS 0m SC S 04 CGA 0 gt 323 123200000000 5 43 Model 5328A Maintenance Table 5 14 A11 DAC Logic Levels Least Significant Most Significant Digit U10 14 Digit U8 12 Output 14 15 2 14 15 5 6 Reset Pulse U11 Pin 14 0 000 050 VDC 1 Pulse J1 Pin 14 13 0 0 020 050 VDC 2 Pulses J1 Pin 14113 0 220 070 VDC 3 Pulses J1 Pin 14113 2 220 070 VDC 4 Pulses J1 Pin 14 13 2 22 070 VDC This procedure does not exercise every bit If DAC symptoms are that some voltages are not programmable exercise each bit high by leaving that bit not shorted to ground Table 5 15 A 11 DAC Signals 1102 Anode CR5 Cathode CR amp TP3 4 Pin 8 6 Pin 95 CR6 2 4 CR10 1 3 TP5 6 Reset Pulse U11 Pin 14 No Pulses No Pulses No Pulses No Pulses 0 00 0 05 VDC 1 Pulse 1 Pin 1413 10msect4m
47. 125W F TC 0 100 125W F TC 0 100 125W F TC 0 100 125W F TC 0 100 K 10 TOP ADJ 1 TRN 125W TC 0 100 25W FC TC 400 700 25W FC TC 400 800 25W FC TC 400 600 5W PW TC 0 150 RESISTOR 1 5 PW 0 50 RESISTOR 1 5 PW 0 50 RESISTOR 1K 5 25W FC TC 400 600 RESISTOR 1K 5 25W FC TC 400 600 IC 311 COMPARATO IC 311 COMPARATO IC 8 DIP IC O AMP 8DIP P IC V RGLTR 14 DI FUSEHOLDER CLIP FUSEHOLDER CLIP CONNECTOR 3 PIN CONNECTOR 3 PIN CONNECTOR 3 PIN CONNECTOR 3 PIN CONNECTOR 3 PIN OSCILLATOR SUPPO CRYSTAL OSCILLAT CAPACITOR FXD 15 CAPACITOR FXD 1 CAPACITOR FXD 10 CAPACITOR FXD 1 CAPACITOR FXD 6 SEE INTRODUCTION TO THIS SECTION FOR ORDERING INFORMATION R 8 DIP P R 8 DIP P P EE TYPE 250 FUSE TYPE 25D FUSE 33 RT SERIES 1744 OR ASSEMBLY UF 10 20VDC TA UF 20 50VDC CER OPF 20 200VDC CER UF 20 50VDC CER 8UF 10 35VDC TA MFR CODE 75915 75915 28480 28480 28480 03508 03508 28480 04713 28480 28480 03508 03508 28480 28480 03508 28480 28480 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 28480 28480 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 24546 24546 24546 01121 01121 01121 01121 24546 24546 24546 24546 73138 24546 01121 01121 01121 75042 28480 28480 01121 01121 01295 01295 207014 27014 07263 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 56289 2
48. 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 02114 02114 28480 02114 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 MFR PART NUMBER 05328 60032 0160 4084 0180 0428 0180 0428 150D225X0020A2 0160 4084 150D685X0006A2 0160 2599 0160 4084 0160 3879 0160 3878 0160 3879 0160 4084 0180 0474 0180 0474 0160 4084 0160 3879 0160 3878 0160 3878 0160 3879 0160 3879 0160 3879 0160 3878 0160 4084 0160 3879 0180 0428 0160 2055 0160 2055 0160 2055 0160 3878 0180 0428 0160 3878 200 200 X7R 103M 1901 0050 1901 0518 1901 0518 1901 0518 1901 0518 1901 0535 1901 0535 1901 0050 1901 0050 1901 0535 1901 0050 1901 0050 1901 0050 1901 0535 2110 0301 05305 20104 05305 20105 05305 60205 05305 60206 VK200 20 48 VK200 20 48 9140 0137 VK200 20 48 05303 80001 1854 0071 1854 0071 1854 0092 1854 0092 1854 0092 1854 0092 1854 0071 1853 0036 CB1035 CB1035 CB2715 CB1055 CB1035 MODEL 5328A REPLACEABLE PARTS TABLE 6 1 REPLACEABLE PARTS REFERENCE DESIGNATION A8R6 A8R7 A8R8 A8R9 A8R10 A8R11 A8R12 A8R12 A8R13 A8R14 A8R15 A8R16 A8R17 A8R18 A8R19 A8R20 A8R21 A8R22 A8R23 A8R24 A8R25 A8R26 A8R27 A8R28 A8R29 A8R30 A8R31 A8R32 A8R33 A8R34 A8R35 A8R36 A8R37 A8R38 A8R39 A8R40 A8R41 A8R42 A8R43 A8R44 A8R45 A8R46 A8R47 A8R48 A8R49 A8
49. 330 R3T 20 R34 19 R32 R26 100 OFFSET TW SENSITIVITY 1000 ADJ 3 TO V A BUB LINE l5 4 T6 VIA BUS LINE Pin TO TO Albe 218 TD AICP2IT EL TO CRT I Bu 2 61 A4 938 zo 1 pus C26 use FROM 410 15117 FROM UIIE WHF 4TOP CRI 4 CRIT 5 5 ED e SEE RIG R28 100 OFFSET cl6 cen ca 14 cis 6BU 12 TO AIOR B 2 R54 SENSITIVITY 1000 CH B BY y 1 14 5 2v V 1009 o Figure 8 20 10 TO 0 NOTES REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS WITHIN THIS ASSEMBLY ARE ABSREYIATEO ADO ASSEMBLY NUMBER TO ABBREVIATION FOR COMPLETE DESCRIPTION UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED RESISTANCE IN OHMS CAPACITANCE IN FA ADS IMDUCTAMCE IM HEWRIES ASTERISCO INDICATES SELECTED VALUE AVERAGE VALUE SHOWN WHERE ND CAPACITANCE VALUE 13 SHOWN STRAY CAPACITANCE 15 USED ALL RELAYS SHOWN IN DE FMERGIZED STATE 12 Channel Schematic and Components Model 5328A Schematic Diagrams 8 35 POWER UP HP ip FC AND 1FC
50. A1C33 A1C34 A1C35 A1C36 A1C37 A1C39 A1C40 A1C41 A1C42 A1C43 A1C44 A1C45 A1C46 A1C47 A1C48 A1C49 A1C50 A1C51 A1C52 A1C53 A1CR1 A1CR3 A1CR4 A1CR5 A1CR6 A1CR7 A1CR8 A1CR9 A1CR10 A1CR11 A1CR12 A1CR13 A1CR14 A1CR15 A1CR16 A1Q1 A104 A105 106 107 108 1 1 A1R2 A1R3 A1R4 1 5 A1R6 A1R7 A1R8 A1R9 A1R10 1 11 A1R12 A1R13 A1R14 HP PART NUMBER 05328 60028 0180 1735 0160 0161 0180 0106 0140 0177 0170 0024 0180 0230 0160 0314 0180 0230 0160 0153 0180 0230 0180 0106 0160 2055 0180 0210 0160 2055 0180 0210 0160 2055 0160 2055 0180 0155 0160 2055 0180 0155 0160 2055 0160 2055 0180 0210 0180 0210 0180 0155 0180 0155 0180 0155 0180 0155 1901 0040 1910 0016 1902 0031 1901 0050 1901 0050 1901 0040 1902 3082 1901 0040 1901 0040 1901 0040 1901 0040 1901 0040 1901 0040 1910 0016 1901 0040 1854 0071 1854 0071 1854 0071 1854 0092 1854 0071 1854 0071 0683 2715 1810 0055 0683 2725 0683 3355 1810 0055 0683 3315 0683 1035 0683 4725 0683 1525 0683 1025 0683 1025 0683 1025 0683 1035 0683 4725 BNP JM J J ALLORA N QTY NB NENE puso DESCRIPTION MOTHER MAIN BOARD SERIES 1804 NOT ASSIGNED NOT ASSIGNED CAPACITOR FXD 22UF 10 35VDC TA CA
51. BLINKING when channel is triggering The trigger lights are operative over the full frequency range of dc to 100 MHz 3 67 The trigger lights can be used with a 10 1 oscilloscope probe to provide a logic probe function By adjusting the trigger level to one tenth since using 10 1 divider probes of the threshold voltage for the logic family under investigation e g 14 volts for TTL the light in dicates the logic state of circuit points which are contacted with the probe When the trigger level light is ON the circuit node is a high i e above the threshold voltage If the light is OFF the node is a logical low If the light blinks then pulses up to 100 MHz rep rate are present at the node The trigger lights can also detect the polarity of low rep rate pulses down to 5 ns pulse width Positive pulses cause the light to blink on while negative pulses cause the light to blink off 3 68 PROGRAMMING OPERATION 3 69 The 5328AF 096 H42 Universal Counter is fully compatible with the Hewlett Packard Interface Bus HP 1B IEEE Standard 488 1975 Appendix C 3 70 Procedures for verification of proper operation of the 5328 096 42 in the remote mode are contained i through 5 42 3 71 SETTING ADDRESS SWITCHES 3 72 To use the 5328A in an HP IB based system the first step is to set the rear panel address switches shown in Table 3 4 The left most switch sets the counter to ADDRESSABLE TALK ONLY mode ADDRESSABLE mode is used whenev
52. Codes shown in bold face are start up conditions These conditions are set by the code P Remote Program Initialize or by the bus commands Device Clear or Selected Device Clear 1 Initialization P Remote Program Initialize 2 Function F4 Freq F6 Period A F7 Avg A F8 F9 B A Avg F Check F C A F gt Freq C 3 Time Base 4 Single Multiple Measurement 8 Single Measurement 51 Multiple Measurement Measurement Cycle 52 Wait to output Service Request at end of measurement 3 Continue cycle no Service Request Output Mode 4 Output at end of measurement 5 Output when addressed on the fly Sample Rate 6 Maximum 57 Manual control fron front panel Armin S Display Storage Sc On normal S Off 10 Decade Reset S gt Normal St Disabled for cumulative measurements 11 Display Blankin U Normal display Q Blank display digits and decimal point 12 Channel A Signal Conditioning a Coupling A2 AC A3 AC b Slope 4 AS slope Attenuator 1 X100 A6 X10 13 Separate Common 8 Separate 9 Common 14 Trigger level volts tenths of volts hundredths of volts 9 4 Permissiable trigger level range 2 50V to 2 50 The program sequence to set trigger level starts with the channel designation letter followed by a or sign Next three digits set the voltage level An
53. DISABLE 0 7V ENABLE 20 5 21 2 POWER SWITCH 23 24 SRT GND TEST GLIGHT OF LIGHT FD NC F8 NC B4 NC P O Figure 8 24 A16 Display Schematic and Components EU Qoo CR10 CRS 5 m 2 9 2 51 8 8 RO CR6 CR R8 0510 Model 5328A Schematic Diagrams 8 41 16 DISPLAY ASSEMBLY 05328 60026 SERIES l636A P O PI 5 3 2 1 3 B2 8 83 FROM Y _ 1039 9 10 85 15 86 17 87 20 89 FROM 7 OF LIGHT 10 i Os I FROM y L RM LIGHT 4113610 1 s I FROM G LIGHT AIU36 4 wt I VIA AIXAI6 SAME CRE I 1 NUMBER 54 FREQ RESOLUTION N PINS i I FROM AlU4l FROM AIU3B 11 16 oP FROM AIU36 6 6 I FROM 1033 6 19 um 5 3 SV R3 R2 SRI RAD 1 roda 39 39 39 10 RAC 10 R4H 10 R4G 10 2000 3 5V COMMON 8 I 2t SS FROM AlQ8 19 5 5V DISABLE 0 TV ENABLE 1 FROM AIPSW 2 LPS i Sw FROM AISW 22 l 23 1L P O DASHED LINES INDICATE CIRCUITRY ON BACK 1 L
54. Following the format the next data byte on MDA MDD will be a number The MDA MDD lines supplied to U7 are also connected to the 11 DAC board shift registers Since the interface is in the DAC mode neither U8 or U15 are clocked and thus disregard data on MDA MDD The number is clocked into the A channel DAC shift registers The condition of the MA and MB lines determines which DAC is clocked and accepts the number Following the first number a decimal appears at the input to ROM U7 When U7 decodes the decimal it sends U7 5 high This high applied to U2 15 causes U2 to block the clock pulse associated with the decimal data byte in this manner the DAC disregards the decimal 4 146 Following the format two more numbers are input serially and each clocked into the A channel DAC shift registers The final character in the string an asterisk appears on the input data lines to U7 When U7 decodes the asterisk U7 5 goes high again blocking the positive clock pulse transition to the A channel DAC This causes the A channel DAC to disre gard the Simultaneously U7 6 goes low allowing the negative transition of the clock pulse to latch the low at U8 13 into U8 12 The low at U8 12 causes U17 8 to go low returning the interface to the non DAC control mode 4 147 A11 DAC Board 4 148 Since the DAC board contains two identical DACs only the Channel A DAC will be discussed For the following description assume the Channel A DAC
55. Jno of intervals averaged 219 PS Accuracy 1 100 trigger error 2ns time base error intervals averaged Minimum Dead Time 150 ns from one STOP to next START Maximum Repetition Rate 10 MHz Display us ns Ratio Measurement Ratio B A or C A Range A 0 10 MHz Range B 0 100 MHz Range C 30 500 MHz Resolution 1 part in N Accuracy 1 count of B or C trigger error of A times frequency of B or add 12 times frequency o or C Trigger error is lt 0 3 of one period for sine waves of 40 dB S N or better and amplitude equal to sensitivity of counter For any wave shape trigger error is than then 2 x peak noise voltage signal slope 0025 us signal slope in for 40 dB S N or 1 3 Model 5328A General Information 1 4 Table 7 3 5328A Counter Specifications Continued CHANNEL C Input Characteristics Range 30 MHz to 500 MHz direct count Sensitivity 15 mV rms 30 MHz 500 MHz Trigger level 0 volts Impedance 500 nominal Maximum Input 5 volts rms Input protection Input BNC fused accessible from front panel protected to 200 volts peak overload Indicator flashing indicator warns of potential overload conditions Resolution 1 MHz to 0 1 Hz in decade steps Accuracy 1 count time base error Display Hz kHz MHz TIME BASE Outputs 1 MHz and 10 MHz available at rear panel BNC in standby and operate modes Output level
56. MANUAL DESCRIPTION CHANGE DATE July 7 1978 INSTRUMENT 5328A H42 Frequency Counter This change supersedes all earlier dated changes Operating and Service Manual SERIAL PREFIX 1808A e Make all changes listed as ERRATA DATE PRINTED JUNE 1978 Check the following table for your instrument s HP PART NO 05328 90055 serial prefix or serial number and make listed MICROFICHE NO 05328 90056 change s to manual NEW OR REVISED ITEM EFIRATA Table 6 1 A12 05328 60031 Replaceable Parts Add SERIES 1636 to the Description of A12 A12 Component Locator Change C4 to C3 and C3 to C4 The C3 and C4 component locators are transposed in the illustration Paragraph 1 17 the following sentence The 05328 60121 Spare Parts Kit is described the end of Table 6 1 W Page Pagel f 2 Table 1 1 Equipment Supplied Add KIT SPARE PARTS HP PART NUMBER 05328 60121 Page 1 2 Paragraph 1 19 Change 5328AF 096 to read 5328 A H42 Page 6 12 Table 6 1 A8 05328 60032 Replaceable Parts Change A8R40 to HP Part No 0698 4132 6 RESISTOR 62 5 125W CC TC 270 540 01121 BB6205 Change A8R67 to A8R67 0698 4132 6 RESISTOR 62 5 125W CC TC 270 540 01121 BB6205 FACTORY SELECTED PART 27 Figure 8 14 A8 05328 60032 Schematic Diagram Change A8R40 and R67 to 62 ohms Page 8 21 Figure 8 10 A3 A3A1 Schematic Diagram and Component Locator Change reference designato
57. Model 5328A Replaceable Parts Table 6 2 Manufacturers Code list muere dest oe U S A Common Any Supplier of the U S Allen Bradley Co Milwaukee WI Texas Instr Inc Semicond Cmpnt Div Dallas TX RCA Corp Solid State Div Somerville Spectrol Electronics Corp City of Ind CA Ferroxcube Corp Saugerties NY GE Co Semiconductor Prod Dept Syracuse NY Motorola Semiconductor Products Phoenix AZ Fairchild Semiconductor Div Mountain View CA Siliconix Inc Santa Clara CA Signetics Corp Sunnyvale CA Mepco Electra Corp Mineral Wells TX Transitron Electronic Corp Wakefield MA Corning Glass Works Bradford Bradford PA Specialty Connector Co Inc Indianapolis IN National Semiconductor Corp Santa Clara CA Hewlett Packard Co Corporate HQ Palo Alto CA Mepco Electra Corp San Diego CA Bourns Inc Trimpot Prod Div Riverside CA Advanced Micro Devices Inc Sunnyvale CA Centre Engineering Inc State College PA Stettner Trush Inc Cazenovia NY Sprague Electric Co North Adams MA Electro Motive Corp Sub IEC Willimantic CT Beckman Instruments Inc Helipot Div Fullerton CA TRW Inc Philadelphia Div Philadelphia PA Littelfuse Inc Des Plaines IL TRW Capacitor Div Ogallala NE 6 24 PART NUMBER lt 11PS18A 121 0059 121 0061 121 0180 140 0177 40 0202 140 0209 140 0214 40 0215 140 0221 140 0225 150 0096 160 0127 160 0128 160 0154 160 0161 160 0174 160 031 160 034 160 205 160 224 160 224 160 224 160 304 160
58. Qualifier negate circuit U30C can invert the qualifier bit for any given state so that the machine can branch on the qualifier being low or being high U7 is added for psuedo sub routine capability In the output mode the ASM goes through the same group of states once for every character being outputted on the bus U7 is incremented every time so that the ASM can tell which character it is to output 4 181 Bus Command Mode 4 182 In this mode ATN low the ASM accepts parallel bytes of information and decodes them into bus commands This usually requires setting or clearing bits of storage in U19 or U26 4 183 Listen Mode 8 184 In the listen mode the listen qualifier of U26 must be low and ATN high The interface will then accept 8 bit parallel bytes continuously When receiving the ASCII characters P Q U or T the counter will act upon the byte immediately refer to programming in Section 11 When receiving the letters F G A B C D or S the interface will then route any ASCII number or numbers following these letters into particular storage registers These registers are U28 U33 and U34 along with any that are contained in any of the optional modules installed in the mainframe 4 185 Talk Mode 4 186 The HP IB Interface will go into the talk mode if the talk qualifier of U26 is low or the talk always switch is set to talk always and ATN high for both cases There will be no output in normal operation unless a completed
59. SENSITIVITY Channel B Specification 15 mV rms 0 35MHz de coupled 20 Hz 35 MHz ac coupled 50 mV rms 35 MHz 100MHz Description A generator with calibrated output drives the B channel of the 5328A under test The frequency of the B channel MARKER OUTPUT is measured by a second frequency counter The generator is set to the specified 5328A signal sensitivity level and varied over the specified frequency range The second counter must display the correct frequency Adjustments of the 5328A LEVEL B control may be necessary to achieve a stable count 5 5 Model 5328A Maintenance Table 5 4 Performance Test Continued 10 Hz to 10 MHz Setup COUNTER 1 COUNTER UNDER TEST COUNTER No 2 HP 5328A HP 651B CHANNEL B HP5328A TEST OSCILLATOR INPUTB MARKER UNIVERSAL 1M2 OUTPUT COUNTER 509 TERMINATION 1 DC coupled 10 Hz to 10 MHz e Set counter No 1 HP 5328A to SEP LEVEL B to PRESET ATTEN X1 B channel DC coupling B channel e Set the 651B to 15 mV rms Vary the 6516 s frequency from 10 Hz to 10 MHz and verify that the 5328A Channel B MARKER OUTPUT is the correct frequency as read by counter No 2 Adjust the 5328A LEVEL B control as necessary to achieve a stable display Mark results on performance test record AC coupled 20 Hz to 10 MHz Set Counter 1 HP 5328A to AC coupling B channel e With the 651B set to 15 mV rms vary the frequency from 20 Hz to 10 MHz and verify that the 5328A
60. These signals are routed to the Time Base input via the ROM controlled Time Base Multiplexer U10 on the A4 Function Selector board 4 81 The Time Base circuit has two modes of operation consistent with the two types of mea surements performed by the 5328A For frequency and time interval type measurements the Time Base circuit generates a gate during which either oscillator or input pulses are counted For totalize type measurements the Time Base circuit divides its input by N as set on the RESOLUTION N switch on the front panel and outputs the divided signal to be counted in the DCA The outputs of the Time Base circuit corresponding to both operating modes are gener ated simultaneously Regardless of the type of measurement being performed these outputs are made available to the A4 Function Selector which selects the proper signal to perform the function 4 82 The length of the gate time generated by the Time Base circuit and the scale factor of the Time Base Input is determined by the Time Base code The 5328A Mainframe ROM reads the codes of both the Time Base RESOLUTION N and FUNCTION switches and outputs the proper code to the Time Base such that measurement resolution and scale factor agree with the information in the various RESOLUTION N switch positions 4 83 A2 POWER SUPPLY 4 84 The power supply has five output voltages 5 5 2 15 15 and 3 5 volts dc The 5V and 5 2V circuits are essentially the same as are t
61. Time Base 4 9 Model 5328A Theory of Operation 4 10 4 64 Display Control 4 65 The display control section on Al Motherboard acts as an interface between the A16 Display board and the other circuits of the counter 4 66 The outputs of the A16 Display Board FUNCTION and RESOLUTION switches go to the ROM A1U37 The outputs of the ROM position the decimal point and annunciators in the dis play and provide control functions for other circuits of the counter Data from the data bus is translated from BCD to seven segment form in decoder U41 and sent to the display which is strobed by U39 U39 decodes the digit address code from BCD to one of 10 forms Leading zero blanking is provided by the latch comprised of U32B and U40B Latches U25 U26 U27 and U31 provide outputs related to function and time base codes for use in other sections of the instrument 4 67 State Control 4 68 The state control section is comprised of circuits U1 U2 U3 U4 and US Decade Counter U1 generates the digit select strobe code for the display Circuit U4 receives the Sample Rate signal and generates the main Reset Transfer and Inhibit signals 4 69 A3 OSCILLATOR SUPPORT 4 70 An oven temperature regulated crystal oscillator A3A1 supplies the precision 10 MHz time base signal in the 5328A A3A1 crystal oscillator also designated HP Model 10544A is in rectangular metal enclosure which plugs into the A3 Oscillator Support The A3
62. and U23 FF U31A synchronizes the reset of the State Counters to occur at the proper time 4 190 ASM OSCILLATOR As shown in the ASM Oscillator Timing Diagram Figure 4 70 the ASM oscillator circuit provides three separate phases of clock outputs Schmitt trigger U18A is the fundamental oscillator element which uses hysteresis to develop oscillation The output of U18A through U13 strobes storage latches U11A and B U15 U19 U24 U26 U28 U33 U31B and U34 The output of U18A is also sent through a delay circuit consisting of re sistor R14 and capacitor C4 into U18B to provide another phase of the clock output that deter mines the next state of the ASM In addition the output of U18A is sent through U30A to pro vide a third clock phase which is applied to U31A The output of U31A resets the 8 bit State Counter synchronously at power up or when the IFC signal occurs Synchronous reset prevents loading the storage latches with erroneous data The IFC signal also resets U26 ASM storage The power up reset circuit U18C and U18D clears all storage elements 4 191 BUS INTERFACE The bus interface circuit consists of bus line termination resistors data output drivers and data input buffers Resistors R29 and R30 form the line termination net works U4 is used to buffer the bus line inputs and U5 U10 and U16 are high current drivers that drive the bus lines output The ATN signal is sent through U9A and U29D to ensure that the gates connecte
63. o www m 6 6 1 6 N NNN N RODEAR 34 DESCRIPTION C CHANNEL INP CAPACITOR FXD CAPACITOR FXD 6 CAPACITOR FXD 6 CAPACITOR FXD 2 CAPACITOR FXD CAPACITOR FXD 6 CAPACITOR FXD 6 CAPACITOR FXD CAPACITOR FXD CAPACITOR FXD 1 CAPACITOR FXD CPACITOR FXD 1 CAPACITOR FXD 1 CAPACITOR FXD 1 CAPACITOR FXD CAPACITOR FXD CAPACITOR FXD 1 CAPACITOR FXD 1 CAPACITOR FXD CAPACITOR FXD CAPACITOR FXD CAPACITOR FXD 1 CAPACITOR FXD CAPACITOR FXD CAPACITOR FXD 6 CAPACITOR FXD CAPACITOR FXD CAPACITOR FXD CAPACITOR FXD 1 CAPACITOR FXD 6 CAPACITOR FXD 1 CAPACITOR FXD DIODE SWITHING DIODE SCHOTTKY DIODE SCHOTTKY DIODE SCHOTTKY DIODE SHOTTKY DIODE SCHOTTKY DIODE SCHOTTKY DIODE SWITCHING DIODE SWITCHING DIODE SCHOTTKY DIODE SWITCHING DIODE SWITCHING DIODE SWITCHING DIODE SCHOTTKY FUSE 125 125V FUSE HOLDER INSULATOR CONNECTOR 55 CONNECTOR 55 CHOKE WIDE BAND CHOKE WIDE BAND COIL MLD 1MH 5 CHOKE WIDE BAND COIL PEAKING TRANSISTOR NPN TRANSISTOR NNPN TANSISTOR NPN S TRANSISTOR NPN TRANSISTOR NPN TRANSISTOR NPN TRANSISTOR NPN NOT ASSIGNED TRANSISTOR PNP RESISTOR 10K 5 RESISTOR 10K 5 RESISTOR 270 5 RESISTOR 1M 5 RESISTOR 10K 5 SEE INTRODUCTION TO THIS SECTION FOR ORDERING INFORMATION UT SERIES 1736 1UF 20 50VDC CER 8UF 20 6VDC TA 8UF 20 6VDC TA 29 20 20VDC 1UF 20 50VDC CER 8UF 20 6VDC TA
64. sensitivity of the counter For frequencies below 40 MHz it is typically less than 25 mV peak to peak At frequencies from 40 MHz to 100 MHz it is typically less than 70 MHz peak to peak The signal must pass through the entire hysteresis band before a trigger pulse is generated If the SLOPE switch is set to the trigger pulse occurs at the top of the hysteresis band If the SLOPE switch is set to the trigger pulse occurs at the bottom of the hysteresis band SLOPE TRIGGER POINT TRIGGER LEVEL READ BY DVM SLOPE TRIGGER POINT Figure 3 11 Hysteresis Band 3 55 Since trigger level measurements indicate the center of the hysteresis band a better value for the actual trigger level may be obtained by subtracting one half the hysteresis band slope or adding one half the hysteresis band slope A typical value for the width of the hysteresis band is 30 mv peak to peak 3 56 The value to use for the hysteresis band depends on the frequency or for pulses it de pends on the rise time 3 57 External Frequency Standard Input 3 58 The rear panel external frequency standard EXT OSC IN input is useful for locking the counter to a high stability external frequency standard This external standard must be 1 2 5 5 or 10 MHz with an amplitude of gt 1V rms into 1 maximum input of 5 volts peak to peak Model 5320A Operation 3 59 Marker Outputs 3 60 Two marker output connect
65. the PERIOD AVG mode gives increased resolution and accuracy Trigger error is decreased by N and the resolution is in creased by N resolution 100 15 The measurement time is equal to the period times 3 12 In PERIOD and PERIOD AVG with the rear panel ARM switch OFF the measurement cycle is initiated by the SAMPLE RATE control and the input signal With the ARM switch ON PERIOD and PERIOD AVG are armed by a trigger event at the B input To measure the fre quency of a tone burst signal use arming and the PERIOD AVG for increased resolution over a low frequency measurement as shown in Figure 3 4 Select N equal to or less than the number of periods in the tone burst and adjust Channel B trigger level to trigger on the first cycle of the input signal REAR PANEL ARM SWITCH ON B TRIGGER LIGHT x INDICATES WHEN B TRIGGER EVENT ARMS MEASUREMENT Figure 3 2 Tone Burst Measurement Model 5328A Operation 3 13 TIME INTERVAL MEASUREMENTS 3 14 One of two time interval functions can be selected time interval or time interval average These functions measure the time interval between a START signal at the Channel A input and STOP signal at the Channel B input If both the START and the STOP signals are derived from the same signal place the COM A SEP in COM A position Separate slope and level controls for each channel allow variable triggering on either positive or negative going slope 3 15 In single shot time interva
66. when CONTINUE key of 9825A is pressed verify counter readout as 1 000 With function generator connected to Channel B of counter when CONTINUE key of 9325A is pressed counter should display approximately 1 00 kHz frequency of function generator Set the function generator to a triangular pulse output of 1 kHz at 300 mV with a 0 4 offset 5 9 Connect signal to counter s Channel A input Counter s Channel A and B trigger lights should be blinking When the 9825A CONTINUE key is pressed observe the counter s trigger lights stop blinking Set the function generator to a triangular pulse output of 1 kHz at 300 mV with a 0 4 offset Connect the function generator s output to Channel A of the counter Set the counter s LEVEL A and B to PRESET When the 9825A CONTINUE key is pressed observe Channel A and B trigger lights commence blinking When the 9825A CONTINUE key is pressed counter should display approximately 150 75 wide tolerance When the 9825A CONTINUE key is pressed counter should display approximately 400usec 100usec wide tolerance When the 9825A CONTINUE key is pressed counter should display approximately 400usec 100usec wide tolerance When the 9825A CONTINUE key is pressed counter should display approximately 150usec 75usec wide tolerance 5 37 Model 5328A Maintenance Table 5 8 HP IR Bus Commands LOCAL LOCKOUT LLO DEVICE CLEAR DC
67. 00 134 9186 REASON Accuracy 8 E 3 Identify the cover on the junction box item no 5 REASON It is a separate item and is not called out on figure 19 E 9 Add the cover of the junction box as an item in the listing for figure 19 REASON Same as above NAME GRADE TITLE ANDO TELEPHONE NUMBER SSG I M DeSpiritof 999 1776 RECOMMENDED CHANGES EQUIPMENT TECHNICAL MANUALS SOMETHING WRONG mm manva FROM YOUR UNIT S COMPLETE ADDRESS THEN JOT DOWN THE DOPE ABOUT IT ON THIS FORM TEAR IT OUT FOLD IT AND DROP IT IN THE MAIL DATE PUBLICATION NUMBER DATE TITLE BE EXACT PIN POINT WHERE IT I IN THIS SPACE TELL WHAT IS WRONG O ee s s ee s lt s PAGE AND WHAT SHOULD DOME ABOUT 17 wo GRAPH lt i NAME GRADE OR TITLE AND TELEPHONE NUMBER SIGN HERE DA 984 2028 P S 1F YOUR OUT Fi DEPARTMENT THE ARMY OFFICIAL PENALTY POR PRIVATE usu 1009 Commander US Army Communications and Electronics Materiel Readiness Command ATTN DRSEL ME MQ Fort Monmouth New Jersey 07703 N lt Jw q A ss a s s w wam umu u lt lt s lt eee SNTI GELL0 0 ONOTV gt lt
68. 01295 01295 01295 01295 01295 01295 01295 01295 01295 01295 01295 28480 01295 02395 01295 047513 28480 28480 28480 28480 0000 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 56289 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 72136 72136 56289 56289 28480 28480 2840 28480 28480 28480 04713 04713 04713 04713 28480 298480 04713 04713 04713 MFR PART NUMBER SN7475N SN7475N SN7423N SN7486N SN7486N SN7475N SN7423N SN7404N SN7404N SN7404N SN7404N 1816 2251 SN7432N SN7442N SN7400N MC8307P 1200 0525 1200 0473 1200 0473 0360 0124 ORDER BY DESCRIPTION 1200 0549 1251 2026 1251 2035 8159 0005 05328 60035 0180 2842 0180 2842 0160 0576 0160 0576 0160 2203 0160 0945 196D336X0010KA1 0160 3879 0180 2827 0180 2827 0180 2832 0180 2832 0180 0418 0180 0418 DM15C050K0500WV1CR DM15C050K0500WV1CR 672D476H025CC5B 672D476H025CC5B 0160 0576 0160 3879 0160 0128 0160 0128 1902 0774 1902 0774 MR820 MR820 1N5340B 1N5340B 1901 0040 1901 0040 1N5354B 1N5354B MDA 970 2 MODEL 5328A REPLACEABLE PARTS TABLE 6 1 REPLACEABLE PARTS REFERENCE DESIGNATION A2F1 A2F2 A2L1 A2L2 A2L3 A2Q1 A2Q2 A203 A204 A205 A206 A207 A208 209 2010 2011 A2R1 A2R2 A2R3 A2R4 A2R5 A2R6 A2R7 A2R8 A2R9 A2R10 A2R11 A2R12 A2R13 A2R14 A2R15 A2R16 A2R17 A2R18 A2R1
69. 0160 3876 200 500 X7R 471M 0150 0059 0160 2242 0160 2244 0150 0059 0160 2246 0160 2247 400 500 X7R 473M 400 500 X7R 473M 0180 0428 DM15F301F0300WV1C DM15F301F0300WV1C 0160 3873 0160 3874 1902 3082 1901 0040 1901 0376 1901 0040 1901 0376 1901 0376 1902 0126 1901 0376 1902 0126 1901 0376 1901 0040 1901 0040 1901 0040 1901 0040 1901 0040 1901 0040 1901 0040 1200 0548 0490 0642 0490 1175 0490 1183 0490 1175 0490 1183 0490 1175 0490 1175 0490 1175 0490 1175 0490 1175 0490 1183 9100 2288 9100 2288 9140 0178 9140 0178 1854 0071 2N5912 2N5912 BB1031 BB1031 1810 0080 CB3925 BB4725 MODEL 5328A REPLACEABLE PARTS TABLE 6 1 REPLACEABLE PARTS CONTINUED REFERENCE HP PART QTY DESCRIPTION MFR MFR PART NUMBER DESIGNATION NUMBER CODE A12R6 0683 3925 2 RESISTOR 3 9K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 01121 CB3925 A12R7 0683 4725 2 RESISTOR 4 7K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 01121 CB4725 A12R8 0698 5999 5 RESISTOR 4 7K 5 125W CC TC 350 857 01121 BB4725 A12R9 0683 8215 3 RESISTOR 820 5 25W FC TC 400 600 01121 CB8215 A12R10 0683 8215 3 RESISTOR 820 5 25W FC TC 400 600 01121 CB8215 A12R11 0675 1021 8 2 RESISTOR 1K 10 125W CC TC 330 800 01121 BB1021 A12R12 0683 1025 9 RESISTOR 1K 5 25W FC TC 400 600 01121 CB1025 A12R13 0675 1021 8 RESISTOR 1K 10 125W CC TC 330 800 01121 BB1021 A12R16 0683 5115 6 RESISTOR 510 5 25W FC TC 400 600 01121 5115 A12R17 0683 5115 6 REISTOR 510 5 25
70. 04713 10105 A10U13 1820 0803 2 IC GATE ECL DR NOR TPL 04713 10105 10014 1820 0802 1 IC GATE ECL NOR QUAD 2 INP 04713 10102 A10U15 1820 0833 8 IC LCH TTL COM CLEAR 8 BIT 07263 9334PC A10U16 1820 1245 8 1 IC DCDR TTL LS 2 TO 4 LINE DUAL 2 INP 01295 SN74LS155N A10U17 1820 1208 3 1 GATE TTL LS QUAD 2 INP 01295 SN74LS32N A10W1 05328 60114 4 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY EXT LINE 28480 05328 60114 A10 MISCELLANEAOUS 1480 0116 8 PIN GRV 063 IN DIA 25 IN IN LG STL 28480 1480 0116 4040 0748 3 2 BOARD BLK 28480 4040 0748 11 05328 60023 4 1 DIGITAL ANALOG CONVERT 28480 05328 60023 11 1 0180 0374 3 2 CAPACITOR FXD 10UF 10 20VDC 56289 150D106X9020B2 11 2 0160 3879 7 CAPACITOR FXD 01UF 20 100VDC CER 28480 0160 3879 A11C3 0180 0428 8 CAPACITOR FXD 68UF 20 6VDC TA 28480 0180 0428 A11C4 0180 0428 8 CAPACITOR FXD 68UF 20 6VDC TA 28480 0180 0428 A11C5 0160 2743 2 2 CAPACITOR FXD 33PF 10 200VDC CER 28480 0160 2743 A11C6 0180 0374 3 CAPACITOR FXD 10UF 10 20VDC TA 56289 150D106X9020B2 A11C7 0160 3879 7 CAPACITOR FXD 01UF 20 100VDC CER 28480 0160 3879 A11C8 0160 3879 7 CAPACITOR FXD 01UF 20 100VDC CER 28480 0160 3879 A11C9 0160 3879 7 CAPACITOR FXD 01UF 20 100VDC CER 28480 0160 3879 A11C10 0160 3879 7 CAPACITOR FXD 01UF 20 100VDC CER 28480 0160 3879 11 11 0160 2746 2 CAPACITOR FXD 33PF 10 200VDC CER 28480 0160 2743 A11C12 0160 3879 7 CAPACITOR FXD 01UF 20 100
71. 0765 6 INSULATOR XSTR 28480 0340 0765 51 3101 1234 3 1 SWITCH SL DPDT NS STD 1 5A 250VAC 28480 3101 1234 T1 9100 3046 3 1 TRANSFORMER PWR PRI 100 120 220 240V 28480 9100 3046 1 8120 1378 1 1 CABLE 55 18AWG 3 CNDCT JGK JKT 27480 8120 1378 MISCELLANEOUS PARTS 0380 0004 0 2 SPACER RND 188 IN LG 18 IN ID 00000 ORDER BY DESCRIPTION 1200 0547 7 6 LOCK DUAL INLINE PKG IC FOR 14 PIN 28480 1200 0547 1250 0083 1 3 CONNECTOR RF BNC FEM SGL HOLE FR 50 OHM 28480 1250 0083 1390 0406 8 4 FASTENER CATCH STRIKE PL 16 GA STL 1 00 28480 1390 0406 1400 0560 8 1 CLAMP HOLDER CMPNT CA 15 3 28480 1400 0560 2190 0016 3 1 WASHER LK INTL T 3 8 IN 377 IN ID 28480 2190 0016 4040 1214 0 1 PANEL PLASTIC 28480 4040 1214 7101 0470 1 1 COVER ASSEMBLY 28480 7101 0470 7120 7018 3 1 NAME PLATE FRONT 28480 7120 7018 8120 0520 3 2 CABLE 55 28480 8120 0520 5040 7216 5 2 5 HANDLE 28480 5040 7216 5040 7221 2 4 FOOT REAR 28480 5040 7221 5040 7224 5 2 HANDLE ADAPTER 28480 5040 7224 8120 2176 9 1 CABLE ASSY 28480 8120 2176 05328 00003 4 1 BRACKET FRONT 28480 05328 00003 05328 00011 4 1 SHIFLD FREQUENCY C 28480 05328 00011 05328 00014 7 1 PLATE COVER ASCII 28480 05328 00014 05328 00017 0 1 PANEL REAR 28480 05328 00017 05328 00019 2 1 BRACKET FAN 28480 05328 00019 05328 00020 5 1 HANDLE FRONT 28480 05328 00020 05328 00021 6 1 COVER TOP 28480 05328 00021 05328 00022 7 1 COVER BOTTOM 28480 05328 00022 05328 20212 9 1 PANEL DISPLAY 28
72. 1 INP 01295 SN7416N A12U2 1820 0805 4 1 IC GATE ECL EXCL OR NOR TPL 1 INP 04713 10107 A12U3 1820 0577 7 IC INV TTL HEX 1 INP 01295 SN7416N A12U4 1826 0426 7 1 IC COMPARATOR 16 DIP C 34335 AM687DL A12XU4 1200 0475 0 CONNECTOR SGL CONT SKT 016 IN BBC 8Z 28480 1200 0475 A12 MISCELLANEOUS 1480 0116 8 PIN GRV 062 IN DIA 25 IN LG STL 28480 1480 0116 4040 0748 3 EXTRACTOR PC BOARD BLK POLYC 28480 4040 0748 A13 NOT ASSIGNED 14 NOT ASSIGNED 15 05328 60019 1 HP IS INTERFACE BOARD 28480 05328 60019 SERIES 1632 15 1 0180 1735 2 1 CAPACITOR FXD 22UF 10 35VDC 5689 150D224X9035A2 A15C2 0170 0040 9 1 CAPACITOR FXD 047UF 10 200VDC POLYE 56289 292P47392 A15C3 0180 0106 9 2 CAPACITOR FXD 60UF 20 6VDC TA 56289 150D606X000682 15 4 0160 0154 5 1 CAPACITOR FXD 2200 10 200VDC POLYE 28480 0160 0154 15 5 0160 0161 4 1 CAPACITOR FXD 01UF 10 200VDC POLYE 28480 0160 0161 SEE INTRODUCTION THIS SECTION FOR ORDERING INFORMATION MODEL 5328A REPLACEABLE PARTS TABLE 6 1 REPLACEABLE PARTS REFERENCE DESIGNATION A15C6 15 7 A15C8 A1509 15 1 A15CR2 A15CR3 A15CR4 A15CR5 A15CR6 A15J6 1501 1502 1503 1504 1505 A15R1 A15R2 A15R3 A15R4 15 5 A15R6 A15R7 A15R8 A15R9 A15R10 15 11 A15R12 A15R13 A15R14 A15R15 A15R16 A15R17 A15R18 A15R19 A15R20 A15R21 A15R22 A15R23 A15R24 A15R25 A15R26 A15R27 A15R28 A15R29 A15R30 A15R31 A15R32 A15R33 A15R34 A15R35
73. 1 volts rms into 500 External Input Operates from 1 2 5 5 and 10 MHz inputs at 1V rms Input impedance 1 lt 30 pF Counter automatically switches to external mode when external input is present Oscillator Aging Rate 5x10 day after 24 hour warmup Oscillator oven is energized when power cable is connected to line voltage Model 5328A Installation SECTION Il INSTALLATION 2 1 INTRODUCTION 2 2 This section provides instructions for unpacking inspection preparation for use ship ment and storage 2 3 UNPACKING AND INSPECTION 2 4 If the shipping carton is damaged inspect the counter for visible damage scratches dents etc If the counter is damaged notify the carrier and the nearest Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office immediately offices are listed at the back of this manual Keep the ship ping carton and packing material for the carrier s inspection 2 5 PREPARATION FOR USE CAUTION Before connecting this instrument to an ac power line be sure that the 115 230 volt line selector switch on the rear panel is set to the proper position and proper line fuse is installed see below 2 6 Power Requirements 2 7 This instrument can be operated on single phase 115 or 230 10 5 volts ac Power required is approximately 100 VA maximum To avoid instrument damage the rear panel line selector switch must be set to the correct position and the correct fuse as labeled on the rear pan
74. 114 The A11 DAC board processes the four serial data bytes and produces one parallel BCD output The BCD output provides the information for generating a square wave train by using a series of rate multipliers The square wave train has an average duty cycle proportional to the input code supplied to the rate multipliers This square wave train switches on a pre cision current source that feeds a voltage averager to produce a dc output 4 115 REMOTE CONTROLLABLE PROGRAMMABLE INPUT SCHEMATIC THEORY 4 116 Theory of operation for the programmable input section is given in the following paragraphs 4 117 A19 Switch Control Board 4 118 In local mode 0 7 volts is applied to switches 51 58 This potential allows the switches to control their respective functions by supplying an active low available at each switch In a closed switch position the 0 7 volts will forward bias the associated diode pull the anode low and cause a low to be sent to the amplifier board through 4 119 In remote mode the 0 7 volts switches to 5 volts only allowing the output lines trans mitted through J3 to be high When a switch is open the pull up resistor on the line causes it to go high When the switch is closed the associated diode is reverse biased and the line re mains high 4 120 Trigger LEDs DS1 and DS2 are driven by the inverted A and B outputs of the Schmitt trigger A12U4 These signals enter pins 14 and 10 of ECL to TTL translato
75. 1K 5 RESISTOR 5 1K 5 RESISTOR 51K 5 RESISTOR 120 5 RESISTOR 330 5 RESISTOR 560 5 RESISTOR 300 5 RESISTOR 5 1K 5 RESISTOR 51K 2 RESISTOR 30K 2 25 FC TC 400 600 25 FC TC 400 500 25 TC 400 500 125W CC 270 540 25W FC TC 400 600 25W FC TC 400 700 5 25W TC 400 700 25W FC TC 400 800 25W FC TC 400 600 25W FC TC 400 600 25W FC TC 400 600 25W FC TC 400 600 25W FC TC 400 700 X 125W F TC 0 100 125W F TC 0 100 FACTORY SELECTED PART RESISTOR 1K 25 RESISTOR 51 55 RESISTOR 51 55 RESISTOR 220 5 RESISTOR 51 55 RESISTOR 51 55 RESISTOR 18005 RESISTOR 47 55 RESISTOR 1K 5 RESISTOR 51 5 RESISTOR 1K 5 RESISTOR 20 5 RESISTOR 1K 5 RECISTOR 1K 5 RESISTOR 20 5 RESISTOR 1K 5 NETWORK RES 8 SEE INTRODUCTION TO THIS SECTION FOR ORDERING INFORMATION PIN SIP 125W F TC 0 100 25 FC TC 400 500 25 FC TC 400 500 25 FC TC 400 600 25W FC TC 400 500 25 FC TC 400 500 25 FC TC 400 600 25 TC 400 500 25W TC 400 600 125W CC TC 270 540 25 TC 400 600 25 FC TC 400 500 25 400 600 25W FC TC 400 600 25W FC TC 400 500 25W FC TC 400 600 125 PIN SPCG CODE 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 30983 01121 01121 01121 RESISTO 28480 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01
76. 1M 55 25W FC TC 800 900 01121 CB1055 A12R39 0683 2005 7 RESISTOR 20 5 25W FC TC 400 500 01121 CB2005 A12R40 0683 5115 6 RESISTOR 510 5 25W FC TC 400 600 01121 5115 A12R41 0683 2005 7 RESISTOR 20 5 25W FC TC 400 500 01121 CB2005 A12R42 0698 6400 5 2 RESISTOR 900K 1 25W F TC 0 100 19701 MF52C1 4 T0 9003 F A12R43 0698 6974 8 2 RESISTOR 90K 25 125W F TC 0 25 28480 0698 6974 A12R44 0698 6974 8 RESISTOR 90K 25 125W F TC 0 25 28480 0698 6974 A12R45 0698 6400 5 RESISTOR 900K 1 25W F TC 0 100 19701 MF52C1 4 T0 9003 F A12R46 0757 0442 9 2 RESISTOR 10K 1 125W TC 0 100 24546 4 1 8 0 1002 A12R47 0757 0442 9 RESISTOR 10K 1 125W F TC 0 100 24546 C4 1 8 T0 1002 F A12R48 0757 0931 1 2 REISTOR 2K 2 125W F TC 0 100 24546 4 1 8 0 2001 A12R49 0757 0900 4 2 RESISTOR 100 2 125W F TC 0 100 24546 C4 1 8 TO 101 G A12R50 0757 0931 1 RESISTOR 2K 2 125W F TC 0 100 24546 4 1 8 0 2001 A12R51 0757 0900 4 RESISTOR 100 2 125W F TC 0 100 24546 C4 1 8 TO 101 G A12R52 A12R52 0683 4725 2 RESISTOR 4 7K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 01121 CB4725 A12R53 0683 4725 2 RESISTOR 4 7K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 01121 CB4725 A12R54 0683 1015 7 RESISTOR 100 5 25W FC TC 400 500 01121 CB1015 A12R55 0683 1015 7 RESISTOR 100 5 25W FC TC 400 500 01121 CB1015 A12R56 2100 2633 5 RESISTOR TRMR 1K 10 C SIDE ADJ 1 TRN 30983 ET50X102 A12R57 2100 2633 5 RESISTOR TRMR 1K 10 C SIDE ADJ 1 TRN 30983 ET50X102 A12U1 1820 0577 7 2 IC INV TTL HEX
77. 28480 28480 24931 24931 28480 24931 28480 28480 28480 28480 24931 24931 28480 24931 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 MFR PART NUMBER CB2015 C4 1 8 T0 3831 F CB6215 CB4315 CB2015 CB6215 CB1035 4 1 8 0 1501 1525 1525 4 1 8 0 825 1045 1025 4 1 8 0 825 1025 1810 0055 2055 2055 0360 0124 0360 0124 0360 0124 0360 0124 0360 0124 0360 0124 MLM201AG SN74S74N LM324 A MLM201AG SN74LS132N LM324 A CD4015AF MC14527BCP MC14527BCP MC14527BCP CD4015AF MC14527BCP MC14527BCP MC14527BCP CD4015AF CD4015AF 05328 60111 8120 0229 1250 0834 1250 0870 232 2 5 105 2 1250 0960 N126 2 05328 60111 8120 0229 1250 0834 1250 0870 232 2 cs 105 2 1250 0960 N126 2 0360 0065 4040 0748 05328 60031 0160 3879 0160 3879 0160 3879 0160 3879 0160 3879 0160 3879 0160 3879 0160 3879 0160 3879 0160 0128 MODEL 5328A REPLACEABLE PARTS TABLE 6 1 REPLACEABLE PARTS REFERENCE DESIGNATION 12 11 12 12 12 13 12 14 12 15 A12C16 12 17 12 18 A12C19 A12C20 12 21 A12C22 A12C23 A12C24 A12C25 A12C26 A12C26 A12C26 A12C29 A12C29 A12C29 A12C30 A12C31 A12C32 A12C33 A12C34 A12C35 A12C36 A12CR1 A12CR2 A12CR3 A12CR4 A12CR5 A12CR6 A12CR7 A12CR8 A12CR9 A12CR10 A12CR11 A12CR12 A12CR13 A12CR14 A1
78. 330 5 25W FC TC 400 600 RESISTOR 330 5 25W FC TC 400 600 NETWORK RES 8 PIN SIP 125 PIN SPCG RESISTOR 510 5 25W FC TC 400 600 NETWORK RES 8 PIN SIP 125 PIN SPCG SEE INTRODUCTION TO THIS SECTION FOR ORDERING INFORMATION CODE 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 30983 01121 01121 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 04713 01295 01295 01928 01928 04713 01295 27014 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 0000 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 52763 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 01121 01121 28480 01121 28480 MFR PART NUMBER CB1525 CB5125 CB5615 CB2025 CB2715 CB2025 CB2025 BB2705 BB2705 ET50X102 CB1035 CB4745 1826 0084 1826 0151 1826 0085 1820 2112 1820 0736 1820 1019 MC10125L SN7475N SN7426N CA1458G CA1458G MC10105P SN7426N LM3909N 05328 60116 8120 0029 05328 60119 0890 0029 1250 0824 1250 0833 05328 60120 1200 0063 5082 4655 8150 0450 8150 0451 ORDER BY DESCRIPTION 1200 0475 1251 0600 1251 2229 1480 0116 4040 0747 05328 60020 0180 0428 0180 0428 0160 2055 0160 3879 0160 3879 304324 2 8PF NPO 0160 2244 0160 3879 1902 3036 1200 0548 1200 0548 1200 0548 1854 0071 CB3315 CB3315 1810 0080 5115 1810 0080 MODEL 5328A REPLACEABLE PARTS TABLE 6 1 REPLACEABL
79. 387 170 002 170 004 170 005 180 010 180 011 180 0124 180 0229 180 0374 180 1701 180 1735 180 1746 0360 012 N ds N ol I o N 0683 100 0683 101 0683 103 0683 201 0683 202 0683 205 0683 272 0683 301 0683 3355 0683 3905 0683 5115 0683 5125 0683 6815 0693 3111 0698 3136 0698 3152 0698 3153 0698 3156 0698 3157 0698 3160 0698 3378 0698 5103 0698 5426 0698 5996 0698 5999 0751 0199 0757 0200 0757 0279 s TABLE 6 3 PART NUMBER NATIONAL STOCK NUMBER CROSS REFERENCE INDEX FSCM 73899 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 NATIONAL STOCK NUMBER 10 00 983 2623 10 00 776 4185 10 00 983 2623 1T0 00 410 2393 10 00 91 73137 10 00 852 2609 10 00 920 3776 10 00 835 3
80. 5 28 Model 5328A Maintenance Table 5 5 IC Troubleshooting A1 Motherboard Continued JI w aa Tw JJI d Kb al k Tw 901 N e N I L L OUTPUTS Aaror 5 TI aa IT 2 Tu aaa 2 2 Z aa dt pul pe NAON e Two at h S aa x r r FREQ RESOLUTION TT ad ed aa aa a aa a a2 I a _ ot T arts 232253 wo 10 15 16 m 9 EE FE E EL EL ELE 10 OUTPUTS 15 16 INPUTS H 5 29 Model 5328A Maintenance Table 5 5 IC Troubleshooting 1 Motherboard Continued u37 ROM STATES WITH A4 REMOVED L L L L H L H H H H L L Table 5 6 5328A Functional Signals NOTE N 0 7 Exponent of 10 on FREQ RESOLUTION N Switch N is position 1 on switch All other positions 0 10 MHz Don t care Displayed Number Signal to TB Signal to 1st Decade Arming Main Gate Gate FREQ TIME Output A4U10 Output A4U6 Output A4U5 Input A4U6 Opt 030 Hz Seconds IFN 0 IFNZ0 IFN 0 Norm IFN 0 IF N70 Input A8U4 UNT FREQ A CLK PER AVG A CLK e 10N PER A TO AB FREQ C Option 030 CLK D fum
81. 55 25W TC 400 700 RESISTOR 270 5 25W FC TC 400 600 RESISTOR 510 5 25W FC TC 400 600 RESISTOR 10K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 270 5 25W FC TC 400 600 RESISTOR 10K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 10K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 10K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 10K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 NETWORK RES 9 PIN SIP 15 PIN SPCG RESISTOR 1K 5 25W FC TC 400 600 RESISTOR 10K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 10K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 150K 5 25W FC TC 800 900 RESISTOR 10K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 M RESISOTR 56K 5 25W FC TC 400 800 RESISTOR 1K 5 25W FC TC 400 600 RESISTOR 4 7K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 680 5 25W FC TC 400 600 RESISTOR 1K 5 25W FC TC 400 600 x RESISTOR 56 5 25W FC TC 400 500 RESISTOR 56 5 25W FC TC 400 500 RESISTOR 56 5 25W FC TC 400 500 RESISTOR 56 5 25W FC TC 400 500 RESISTOR 56 5 25W FC TC 400 500 RESISTOR 56 5 25W FC TC 400 500 RESISTOR 56 5 25W FC TC 400 500 RESISTOR 56 5 25W FC TC 400 500 RESISTOR 56 5 25W FC TC 400 500 5 RESISTOR 10K 5 25W TC 400 700 x RESISTOR 3 9K 2 125W F TC 0 100 RESISTOR 12 2 125W F TC 0 100 RESISTOR 3 16K 1 125W F TC 0 100 RESISTOR 2K 2 125W F TC 0 100 RESISTOR 10K 5 25W TC 400 700 RESISTOR 10K RESISTOR 10K RESISTOR 430 RESISTOR 10 25W FC TC 400 700 25W FC TC 400 700 25W FC TC 400 700 25W FC TC 400 700 ooo
82. 5615 0683 2025 0683 2715 orror 0683 2025 0683 2025 0698 7080 9 he 0698 7080 9 2100 2633 5 0683 1035 1 0683 4745 6 1826 0084 1826 0151 1826 0085 4 aw 1820 2112 0 1820 0736 1820 1019 1820 1052 1820 0301 1820 0514 N mQ BO 1826 0139 1826 0139 1820 0803 1820 0514 1826 0419 S M 05328 60116 8120 0029 7 05328 60119 0890 0029 0 1250 0824 8 1250 0833 9 05328 60120 1200 0063 1990 0517 8150 0450 8150 0451 Mop 0380 0310 1200 0475 1251 0600 1251 2229 1480 0116 4040 0747 N 05328 60020 0180 0428 0180 0428 0160 2055 0160 3879 0160 3879 0121 0059 0160 2244 0160 3879 7 1902 3036 3 1200 0548 8 1200 0548 8 1200 0548 8 1854 0071 7 0683 3315 0683 3315 1810 0080 0683 5115 1810 0080 O OY CONTINUED QTY WN 11 DESCRIPTION RESISTOR 1 5K 5 25W TC 400 700 RESISTOR 5 1K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 560 5 25W FC TC 400 600 RESISTOR 2K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 270 5 25W FC TC 400 600 X RESISTOR 2K 55 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 2K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 27 5 125W CC TC 270 540 FACTORY SELECTED PART RESISTOR 27 5 125W CC TC 270 540 FACTORY SELECTED PART RESISTOR TRMR 1K 10 C SIDE ADJ 1 TRN RESISTOR 10K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 NOT ASSIGNED NOT ASSIGNED RESISTOR 470K
83. A UA r E 278 lt ino Xt po D 7 SERE L Eum 1 per Ec Ns E 7 wo x 210 1 3266 3 ral n da T a FROM ST eee B x mE 54 su 19 i UF uso usi dp TP Der m resp 12 DATA 4 581 TO Al 109 04 H 541 oy T art 2 7 I Ji 340 is E s R30E RIN la 5 F 5 3000 6200 ri rcr AM ox e Ed cua I 2 ok FO is mostre 10103 0 D mE STORM Pup Yu 3 I EET I e us GE ven NEM ua les 2 1 ES x E E 1 6200 x ES wok pis i d pos 7 gs al N P Ens 3 igh 2 UV gt jy um or 2700 3 fq Ne HS d n N INH I i R306 RIOR l NES pee 1 1 q gt po 30 g 600 5 ES c peas sa 4 gt 4 gt z P 2 LOIS Signals from A15J1 through Cable A1J1 Motherboard j Des H i m i m g g otherboard 8 un sha sm YS Y 2 ANT TO FROM DAV 5 Ta 221 3000 1 9 8324 7 R32G SR
84. BE ENERGIZED VIA AN AUTOTRANS FORMER FOR VOLTAGE REDUCTION MAKE SURE THE COMMON TERMINAL IS CONNECTED TO THE EARTHED POLE OF THE POWER SOURCE WARNING BEFORE SWITCHING ON THE INSTRUMENT THE PROTECTIVE EARTH TERMINALS OF THE INSTRUMENT MUST BE CONNECTED TO THE PROTECTIVE CONDUCTOR OF THE MAINS POWER CORD THE MAINS PLUG SHALL ONLY BE INSERTED IN A SOCKET OUTLET PRO VIDED WITH A PROTECTIVE EARTH CONTACT THE PROTECTIVE ACTION MUST NOT BE NEGATED BY THE USE OF AN EXTENSION CORD POWER CABLE WITHOUT A PROTECTIVE CONDUCTOR GROUNDING WARNING THE SERVICE INFORMATION FOUND IN THIS MANUAL IS OFTEN USED WITH POWER SUPPLIED AND PROTECTIVE COVERS REMOVED FROM THE INSTRUMENT ENERGY AVAILABLE AT MANY POINTS MAY IF CONTACTED RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY CAUTION BEFORE SWITCHING ON THIS INSTRUMENT 1 MAKE SURE THE INSTRUMENT IS SET TO THE VOLTAGE OF THE POWER SOURCE 2 ENSURE THAT ALL DEVICES CONNECTED TO THIS INSTRU MENT ARE CONNECTED TO THE PROTECTIVE EARTH GROUND 3 ENSURE THAT THE LINE POWER MAINS PLUG IS CONNEC TED TO A THREE CONDUCTOR LINE POWER OUTLET THAT HAS A PROTECTIVE EARTH GROUND GROUNDING ONE CON DUCTOR OF A TWO CONDUCTOR OUTLET IS NOT SUFFICIENT 4 MAKE SURE THAT ONLY FUSES WITH THE REQUIRED RATED CURRENT AND OF THE SPECIFIED TYPE NORMAL BLOW TIME DELAY ETC ARE USED FOR REPLACEMENT THE USE OF REPAIRED FUSES AND THE SHORT CIRCUITING OF FUSE HOLDERS MUST BE AVOIDED Model 5328A General Inf
85. CAPACITOR FXD 2 2UF 20 50VDC CER 68UF 20 6VDC TA 68UF 20 6VDC TA 01UF 20 100VDC CER 1UF 20 50VDC CER 1UF 20 50VDC CER 10UF 20 25VDC TA 01UF 20 100VDC CER 10UF 20 25VDC TA 68UF 20 6VDC TA 68UF 20 6VDC TA 47PF 20 200VDC CER 470PF 20 500VDC CER 47PF 20 200VDC CER 470PF 20 500VDC CER 3 3PF 25PF 500VDC CER 2 4PF 25PF 500VDC CER 3PF 25PF 500VDC CER FACTORY SELECTED PART CAPACITOR FXD 3 3PF CAPACITOR FXD 3 6PF CAPACITOR FXD 3 9PF 25PF 500VDC CER 25PF 500VDC CER 25PF 500VDC CER FACTORY SELECTED PART CAPACITOR FXD 047UF 20 500VDC CER CAPACITOR FXD 047UF 20 500VDC CER CAPACITOR FXD 68UF 20 6VDC TA CAPACITOR FXD 300PF 1 300VDC MICA CAPACITOR FXD 300PF 1 300VDC MICA CAPACITOR FXD 4 7PF 5PF 200VDC CER FACTORY SELECTED PART CAPACITOR FXD 10PF 5PF 200VDC CER FACTORY SELECTED PART DIODE ZNR 4 64V 55 DI 7 PD 4W TC 023 DIODE SWITCHING 30V 50 2NS 00 35 DIODE GEN PRP 35V 50MA DO 7 DIODE SWAITCHING 30V 50MA 2NS DO 35 DIODE GEN PRP 35V 50MA DO 35 DIODE GEN PRP 35V 50MA DO 7 DIODE ZNR 2 61V 5 DO 7 PD 4W TC 072 DIODE HEN PRP 35V 50MA DO 7 DIODE ZNR 2 6V 5 DO 7 PD 4W TC 072 DIODE GEN PRP 35V 50MA DO 7 DIODE SWITCHING 30V 50MA 2NS DO 35 DIODE SWITCHING 30V 50MA 2NS DO 35 DIODE SWITCHING 30V 50MA 2NA DO 35 DIODE SWITCHING 30V 50MA 2NS DO 35 DIODE SWITCHING 30V 50MA 2NS DO 35 DIODE SWTCHING 30V 50MA 2NS DO 35 DIODE SET
86. CODE 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 04713 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 MFR PART NUMBER CR6815 CB1525 CB3315 CB3315 CB1525 CB2025 CB6815 WRS4G056S103M 3101 1596 3101 1596 3101 1596 3101 1313 3101 1596 3101 1596 3101 1596 3101 1596 0360 0124 MC10125L 05328 40004 05328 60121 1990 0404 1990 0437 1990 0485 05328 60120 2110 0001 2110 0002 2110 0301 MODEL 5328A REPLACEABLE PARTS TABLE 6 1 REPLACEABLE PARTS CONTINUED REFERENCE HP PART QTY DESCRIPTION MFR MFR PART NUMBER DESIGNATION NUMBER CODE CHASSIS PARTS Bl 0950 1589 7 1 FAN AND CONTROL MODULE ASSEMBLY 28480 0950 1589 0160 0676 6 2 CAPACITOR FXD 1800PF 10 28480 0160 0676 C1B 0160 0676 6 CAPACITOR FXD 1800PF 1800PF 10 28480 0160 0676 F1 2110 0001 8 1 FUSE 1A 250V FAST BLO 1 25X 25 UL IEC 75915 312001 F1 2110 0002 9 1 FUSE 2A 250V FAST BLO 1 25X 25 UL IEC 75915 312002 2110 0464 7 1 FUSEHOLDER EXTR POST 20A 300V UL IEC 75915 345002 010 2110 0465 8 1 FUSEHOLDER CAP PST 20A 28480 2110 0465 2110 0467 0 1 NUT HEX 1 2 28 THD 0 688 A F 75915 903 070 Q1 0340 0765 6 5 INSULATOR XSTR KAPTON 28480 0340 0765 02 0340 0765 6 INSULATOR XSTR 28480 0340 0765 07 0340 0765 6 INSULATOR XSTR 28480 0340 0765 08 0340 0765 6 INSULATOR XSTR 28480 0340 0765 011 0340
87. DO 7 DIODE GE 60V 60MA 1 5 DO 7 DIODE GE 60V 60MA 1 5 DO 7 CONNECTOR 24 PIN F MICRORIBBON TRANSISTOR NPN SI PD 350MW FT 300MHZ TRANSISTOR NPN SI PD 350MW FT 300MHZ TRANSISTOR NPN SI PD 350MW FT 300MHZ TRANSISTOR NPN SI PD 350MW FT 300MHZ TRANSISTOR PNP SI PD 310MW FT 250MHZ RESISTOR 30K RESISTOR 10K RESISTOR 10K RESISTOR 270 RESISTOR 3 3K 5 RESISTOR 4 7K 5 RESISTOR 10K RESISTOR 10K RESISTOR 10K RESISTOR 10K RESISTOR 12K RESISTOR 10K RESISTOR 270 25W FC TC 400 800 25W FC TC 400 700 25W FC TC 400 700 25W FC TC 400 600 25W FC TC 400 700 25 TC 400 700 25W FC TC 400 700 25W FC TC 400 700 25W FC TC 400 700 25W FC TC 400 700 25W FC TC 400 800 25W FC TC 400 700 25W FC TC 400 600 55 55 RESISTOR 270 5 25W FC TC 400 600 55 55 RESISTOR 10K RESISTOR 10K RESISTOR 15K RESISTOR 4 7 5 RESISTOR 4 7 5 25 TC 400 700 25 FC TC 400 700 25 FC TC 400 800 25 FC TC 400 700 25 TC 400 700 RESISTOR 10 5 25W TC 400 700 RESISTOR 10 5 25W TC 400 700 RESISTOR 4 7 5 RESISTOR 4 7K 5 25 TC 400 700 25 400 700 RESISTOR 10 5 25W TC 400 700 RESISTOR 2 7 5 25W TC 400 700 RESISTOR 2 RESISTOR 25 400 700 25 400 700 5 RESISTOR 3 55 25W FT TC 400 700 5 1 NETWORK RES 0 5 1 PIN
88. FC 1 125W 25W FC 25W FC 1 125W 25W FC 125W 125W 125W 125W 125W ED PART 25W FC 1 125W F TC 0 100 25W FC TC 400 600 T C 400 600 DO 7 DO 7 DO 7 DO 7 DO 7 DO 7 DO 7 DO 7 DO 7 DO 7 DO 7 D0 7 DO 35 SI SI SI SI F TC 0 100 i T C 400 600 C 400 600 F TC 0 100 Ti F E F F F T C 400 600 TC 0 100 TC 0 100 TC 0 100 TC 0 100 TC 0 100 C 400 600 125W F TC 0 100 Herre 18 125W F TC 0 100 A 125W F TC 0 100 125W F TC 0 100 125W F TC 0 100 125W F TC 0 100 25 TC 400 500 15 125W F TC 0 100 25 TC 400 600 25 FC TC 800 900 C SIDE ADJ 17 TRN C SIDE ADJ 17 TRN 25W FC TC 400 700 C SIDE ADJ 17 TRN C SIDE ADJ 17 TRN 25W FC TC 400 600 25W FC TC 800 900 1 125W 1 125W 1 125W 1 125W 1 125W 1 125W ED PART 1 125W 1 125W 25W FC 1 125W 1 125W 1 125W 1 125W 1 125W 1 125W ED PART F F 0 100 TC 0 100 TC 0 100 TC 0 100 TC 0 100 TC 0 100 TC 0 100 F TC 0 100 T Leo Ry nj nj nj nj C 400 600 TC 0 100 TC 0 100 TC 0 100 TC 0 100 TC 0 100 TC 0 100 CODE 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 24046 24046 28480 28480 28480 01295 28480 28480 01295 2
89. FC TC 400 600 RESISTOR 1 5K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 p p je SEE INTRODUCTION TO THIS SECTION FOR ORDERING INFORMATION CODE 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 56289 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 56289 56289 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 MFR PART NUMBER WP4G048P255RZ CB2005 CB3325 CB1025 CB1025 3101 1621 3101 1940 1200 0474 1251 0600 1251 2582 5001 0156 5001 0157 5040 6948 5040 6949 05000 20017 05328 20252 05328 40003 3130 0498 3130 0500 05328 60030 150D606X0006B2 0160 3879 0160 3879 0160 3879 0160 3879 0160 3879 0160 3879 150D156X9020B2 150D156X9020B2 0160 3490 1901 0040 1901 0040 1901 0040 1901 0040 1901 0040 1901 0040 1901 0040 1901 0040 1901 0040 1901 0040 1901 0040 1901 0040 1901 0040 5082 4984 5082 4984 1251 2034 1250 1163 1251 1626 1250 1163 WRS4G056S103M CB1035 CB1035 CB1035 CB1035 CB1035 CB1035 CB1035 CB1035 CB2025 CB1035 CB1525 CB2715 CB2715 CB1525 MODEL 5328A REPLACEABLE PARTS TABLE 6 1 REPLACEABLE PARTS REFERENCE DESIGNATION A19R21 A19R22 A19R23 A19R24 A19R25 A19R
90. HP 3406A HP 10525T HP 10526T HP 10529A HP 9830A or 9820A HP 59405A Option 030 HP 9866A HP 8008A HP 6213A HP 3400A 10 Hz to 10 MHz at 5V p p 10 MHz to 480 MHz 10 to 80 MHz Frequency Measurements 10V Range 01 Accuracy 0 to 200V dc 1 Accuracy 0 to 250V ac 1 mV to Logic State Test State Activator IC Test HP IB Compatible Connects 9830A to HP IB Compatible with 9830A 0 5 Hz to 25 MHz at 1V 0 10V Stable to 1 mV RMS ac Voltage 0 10V Range Frequency Counter Digital Multimeter DC Voltmeter AC VTVM RF Voltmeter Logic Probe Logic Pulser Logic Comparator Calculator HP IB Calculator Interface Printer Pulser Generator DC Power Supply RMS Voltmeter 5 9 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 5 10 Preventive maintenance consists of periodic inspection cleaning performance checks and oscillator calibration Table 5 3 lists the recommended schedule of preventive maintenance routines Table 5 3 Preventive Maintenance Inspection Weekly Cleaning Monthly Performance Test As required Oscillator Calibration Quarterly Model 5328A Maintenance 5 11 Inspection 5 12 The 5328A should be inspected for indications of mechanical and electrical defects Elec tronic components that show signs of overheating leakage frayed insulation and other signs of deterioration should be checked and a thorough investigation of the a
91. Interval Low Main Gate or LTOTZLST signal operating through U8 and enabled by ROM lines LMGF LTIF LTOTZLST respectively control the Main Gate In addition ROM line HOPN can override LTIF or LMGF and lock open Main Gate U6 2 through U8C Main Gate status is detected and sent off the A4 Function Selector by ECL to TTL translator U2D Capacitor C11 and resistor R35 serve to stretch any ECL gate signal present at U2 10 so that the slower TTL control chip A1U4 and gate light one shot Q6 U36B E can see the pulses and properly react U8D differentially drives bus lines MG and M to operate the remote Main Gate of Channel C 4 93 The output of the main multiplexer U6 15 feeds into first binary U1 of the main DCA U1A is an ECL High Speed binary the output of which couples to pins 14 and 15 of ECL to TTL translator U2 The TTL output of U2 13 clocks Schottky quinary U4 and U3 The outputs of the first decade U3 9 U4 9 U3 5 and U2 13 travel off the A4 Function Selector board to the DCA on the Al Motherboard where they are latched and the carry feeds into the next decade of the DCA 4 94 Arming Multiplexer and Arming FF 4 95 The Arming FF the second half of U4 serves to inhibit various measurements by en abling or disabling Time Base Multiplexer U10 and the synchronizers in the Universal Module This action occurs via the High Disables Syncrhonizers HDS signal from U4 6 The signal which sets or enables
92. LOGIC QUALIFIER HP IB MULTIPLIER ua LARM HRD LTR COUNTER PROGRAM SAT TO COUNTER OSC HP IB DATA LATCHES s FN CODE U28 33 3 4 TB CODE osc MEMORY DEVICE SELECT LATCH STROBE LK PRESENT STATE ASM PROGRAM PROGRAM STORAGE STORAGE CATCHES eee 19 26 RESET STATE CCOUNTER PRESET COUNTER FOR STATE LINKAGE 14 43 PRESET OR COUNT PRESET COUNT LOGIC U11A 254 300 ASCII OUALIFIER TRUE OR OUTPUT FALSE CHARACTERS BUS DRIVERS UB 10 18 INPUT SELECT u12 SECONDARY MULTIPLEXER 16 STATE COUNTER UG Figure 8 21 A15 HP IB Interface Block Diagram Schematic Diagrams Model 5328A Rmi Qo t o Rs sli w i T H m 22 P O Figure 8 22 15 Interface Schematic and Components 8 36 415 HP 18 ASSEMBLY 05328 60019 SERIES 1624
93. PART NUMBER 1820 0174 1818 2253 1820 1057 1820 0876 1820 0054 noone 1820 1358 1820 0269 1820 1166 1820 0054 1820 0282 RON gt 1820 0077 1820 0658 1820 1358 1820 1166 Nas 05328 60110 0380 0529 0380 0644 1200 0485 1530 1098 SS Bo 05328 60026 0180 0124 m 1901 0040 1901 0040 1901 0040 1910 0016 1901 0040 1990 0437 1990 0437 1990 0437 1990 0437 1990 0437 1990 0437 1990 0437 1990 0437 1990 0437 1990 0404 1990 0404 1990 0404 1990 0404 1990 0404 1990 0404 00 OO 1990 0404 1990 0404 1990 0404 1990 0404 00 1853 0326 1853 0326 1853 0326 1853 0326 1853 0326 CO 1853 0326 1853 0326 1853 0326 1853 0326 1854 0492 WW 1854 0492 1854 0492 1854 0492 1854 0492 1854 0492 1854 0492 1854 0492 1854 0492 1854 0492 1854 0492 1854 0492 o 0683 3905 0683 3905 0683 3905 1810 0213 0683 1005 1 00 00 CONTINUED QTY N gt Na 10 12 1 DESCRIPTION IC IC IC IC IC IC IC IC IC IC IC IC IC INV TTL HEX 1 INP CNTR TTL L BIN SYNCHRO POS EDGE TRIG LCH TTL L D TYPE 4 BIT GATE TTL NAND QUAD 2 INP LCH TTL L COM CLEAR 8 BIT GATE TTL NAND QUAD 2 INP FF TTL L D TYPE COM CLEAR QUAD GATE TTL NAND QUAD 2 INP GATE TTL EXCL DR QUAD 2 INP FF TTL D TYPE POS EDGE TRIG CLEAR M
94. SPCG NETWORK RES 10 PIN SIP 1 PIN SPCG NETWORK RES 9 PIN SIP 15 PIN SPCG NETWORK RES 9 PIN SIP 15 PIN SPCG NETWORK RES 9 PIN SIP 15 PIN SPCG NETWORK RES 9 PIN SIP 15 PIN SPCG RESISTOR 10K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 SWITCH SL 7 1A NS DIP NS DIP SLIDE ASSY IC IC IC IC IC IC IC IC IC IC IC IC IC IC IC IC IC IC IC IC MV TTL MONOSTBL COMPTR TIL L MAGTD 5 BIT MUXR DATA SEL TTL L 8 TO 1 LINE 8 INP INV TTL MEX 1 INP BFR TTL NAND QUAD 2 INP MUXR DATA SEL TTL L 8 TO 1 LINE 8 INP CNTR TTL BIN ASYNCHRO NEG EDGE TRIG MUXR DATA SEL TTL L 8 TO 1 LINE 8 INP INV TTL HEX 1 INP BFR TTL NAND QUAD 2 INP FF TTL D TYPE POS EDGE TRIG CLEAR MUXR DATA SEL TTL L 8 TO 1 LINE 8 INP DCDR TTL L BCD TO DEC 4 TO 10 LINE CNTR TTL L BIN SYNCHRO POS EDGE TRIG MUXR DATA SEL TTL L 2 TO 1 LINE QUAD BFR TTL NAND QUAD 2 INP GATE TTL NAND QUAD 2 INP SCHMITT TRIG TTL NAND QUAD 2 INP LCH TTL L COM CLEAR 8 BIT GATE TTL NAND QUAD 2 INP SEE INTRODUCTION TO THIS SECTION FOR ORDERING INFORMATION MFR CODE 28480 56289 56289 56289 82480 82480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 04713 04713 04713 04713 28480 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 01121 28480 01295 07263 07263 01295 01295 07263 01295 0
95. TO FUNCTION SELECTOR 931 DIGIT 7 ENABLE DIGIT ADDRESS DIGIT 8 ENABLE DECODER DIGIT SELECT 9 LINES DIGIT DIGIT 0 6 ENABLE STROBE DECODER INHIBIT u39 M zs DECADE que m ARRY DECADE COUNTER HEX DECADE u12 BLANKING 11328 u40B LATCH ANSE SEVEN GATE DATA BUS SEGMENT DATA DECODER MEINES yal 7 LINES TIME BASE CODE A 3 LINES TO FROM A4 FUNCTION SELECTOR PULSE TIME BASE LOG OUT TO A4 LMG RS UN GATE LIGHT FUNCTION De UE SELECTOR RM LIGHT LEXT FROM BUS SWITCH CONTROL 8V DISABLE TO BUS LDSW Q8 U40A D D7V ENABLE OSC y osc Ui5 LEXT j DISABLE NOTE REFER TO TABLE 6 1 FOR DESCRIPTION OF SIGNAL MNEMONICS Figure 8 6 Motherboard Model 5328A Schematic Diagrams FUNCTION CHECK FREQ RESOLUTION 1kHz 103 BV DIV ms DIV ov PIN 3 ov aw PEN ua PING ov pus PIN 11 OV U4 PIN 17 U2 PIN 8 SV DIV 1 ms DIV 5V DIV TO bv DIV 1 ms DIV 0 U1 PIN11 OSCILLOSCOPE HP 180A 1801A 1821A WITH 10 1 PROBE COUPLING DC SLOPE SYNCH INT ACF BV DIV 1 ms DIV 1ms DIV mm qr x on n ov vert Ut PIN 14 p OUI PIN 1 FUL PING UT PING 1V DIV 5 ms DIV U2 PIN 13 8 12 P O Figure 8 7 1 Mother board Assembly 5328A FUNCTION CHECK FREQ RESOLUTION PP SV DIV 1
96. U4 comes from Arming Multiplexer U5 6 ROM lines control U5 10 11 while the remaining address line pin 9 is controlled by the Low Arm L ARM signal from the rear panel ARM switch US thus selects either C ARM B B or free run 5V as the signal to send to U4 as the Arming signal The A and B signals are derived from ECL to TTL translator U2A and U2B respectively Capacitors C4 and 5 and resistors R17 and R18 serve as pulse stretcher timing elements to enable the narrow ECL pulses on lines and B to be seen by the TTL Arming FF U4 Model 5328A Theory of Operation 4 96 Time Base Multiplexer and Main Gate FF 4 97 Time Base Multiplexer U10 select either A B or OSC to send the Time Base Input TBI signal via pin 8 to the Time Base This same signal is also sent to 1 the Main Gate FF as a desynchronizing signal ROM lines R HTBA R HTBO and R HTBB control the selection of the Time Base Input signal The HDS signal to U10 3 or ROM line to U10 1 serve to enable or disable U10 4 98 U1B is a high speed ECL FF used to generate precise stable gate times for the Main Gate Multiplexer U8 and the remote gate in the Frequency C module A TTL replica of the Main Gate signal GATE OUT is generated in the Time Base and sent to 1 via the line Main Gate Synchronizer on the Motherboard Resistors R14 and R43B translate this TTL signal down to ECL levels at U1 10 The output of Time Base Multiplexer 10 via resistors R42 and R4
97. U6 U7 and 9 for controlling the counters output data signal over flow indication and circuitry for strobing data into the display U41 The data output of each Decade Counter in the DCA corresponds to a digit on the display The first Decade Counter in the sequence of operation corresponds to the least significant digit and the last to the most significant digit Digits O through 5 are processed by U12 digit 6 by U10 and digit 7 by U11 Model 5328A Theory of Operation 4 77 All measurements performed by the 5328A result in pulses being counted in the DCA Pulses are admitted to the DCA by way of the Main Gate on A4 which is either controlled by a Gate Out signal from the Time Base A1U19 or held open by the HOPN signal from A1U25 4 78 Data strobe signals transfer pulses reset pulses and an output disabling signal are routed to the DCA via the 5328A State Control Circuitry These signals are processed in the DCA and are used to control transfer of the counter s output data to the latch outputs strobe this data onto the Data Bus disable the outputs that feed into the Data Bus and reset the counters after a measurement cycle is over 4 79 TIME BASE 4 80 The 5328A Time Base circuit is comprised of an 8 decade divider U21 shaping flip flop U19A and Synchronization flip flop U19B The Time Base input depending on the particular measurement being made is either the 10 MHz system clock or the Channel A or B input signal
98. a different series number If there is a difference between the series number marked on the board and the schematic in this manual a minor electrical difference exists If the number on the printed circuit board is lower than that on the schematic refer t Section VI for backdating information If it is higher refer to the loose leaf manual change sheets for this manual If the manual change sheets are missing con tact your local Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office See the listing on the back cover of this manual 8 12 Revision letters A B etc denote changes in printed circuit layout For example if a capacitor type is changed electrical value may remain the same and requires different spac ing for its leads the printed circuit board layout is changed and the revision letter is incre mented to the next letter When a revision letter changes the series number is also usually changed The production code is the four digit seven segment number used for production purposes 8 1 Model 5328A Schematic Diagrams 8 13 Symbols are used on PC boards to aid in identifying pin numbers diode elements etc as follows A OR D IDENTIFIES Pin 1 of dip and flat pack IC s Tab of TO CASES side of electrolytic capacitors Pin 1 of resistor packs Cathode of diodes Section dip switches 8 14 ASSEMBLY LOCATIONS AND LOCATORS 6 15 Figures in this section show the front rear and top views of th
99. base 1 MHz OUT and 10 MHz OUT connectors allow internal high stability oscillator signal to be used outside the 5328A Outputs are buffered GATE MARKER OUT connector High when the main gate is open HP 18 Interface connector 24 pin Used to convey data and programming instructions HP IB Interface address switch See Programming Operation in this Section Figure 3 7 5328A Rear Panel Controls and Connectors 3 7 Model 5328A Operation 3 8 3 25 FUNCTION OF CONTROLS INDICATORS INPUTS AND OUTPUTS 3 26 The following paragraphs provide a detailed description of the function of controls indi cators and connectors 3 27 Display 3 28 The 5328A counter display consists of nine digit seven segment LED display and annun ciators for indicating the measurement units of Hz s as well as multiplier indicators K m n These display units and multipliers are automatically displayed along with the correct deci mal point location Overflow OVFL indicates that left most significant digits have overflowed the display Remote RMT indicates that the counter HP IB interface is under remote program control A GATE lamp indicates that the counter has been armed and that a measurement is in process 3 29 Power Line 3 30 The LINE switch puts the counter in OPER operate or STBY standby The STBY position with STBY light on turns off some but not all the power supply voltages This circuit arrangement allows the hig
100. beep spc 2 dsp CHECK POINT 7 PRESS CONTINUE stp if Lzl1 gto 4 prt CHECK POINT 8 wrt 701 prt 2 dsp CHECK POINT 8 PRESS CONTINUE stp if Lel gto 4 prt CHECK POINT 9 wrt 701 F R 5 33 Model 5328 Maintenance Table 5 7 Program Listing Continued prt T I AVC A B beep spc 2 dsp CHECK POINT 9 PRESS if L l gto 4 CHECK POINT 10 wrt 701 F gt R prt FREQ C beep spc 2 dsp CHECK POINT 19 PRESS CONTINUE stp if 1 1 940 4 CHECK POINT 11 wrt 701 F R prt RATIO 2 dsp CHECK POINT 11 PRESS CONTINUE stp if L l gto 4 CHECK POINT 12 wrt 701 F lt G1S137R dsp MANUAL OK PRESS CONTINUE stp prt SAMPLE RATE wrt 701 S60R dsp GATE LIGHT OFF PRESS CONTINUE stp prt SINGLE MULTIPLE 5 2 dsp CHECK POINT 12 PRESS CONTINUE stp if L 1 gto 8 13 p CHECK POINT 13 wrt 701 PF4G4S 13A 379B37R dsp STEPS 1 2 PRESS CONTINUE stp wrt 701 PF4G4S13A139B13R wait 1000 prt ATTENUATOR beep spc 2 dsp CHECK POINT 13 PRESS CONTINUE stp if L 1 gto 6 14 CHECK POINT 14 dsp STEP 3 PRESS CONTINUE stp wrt 701 eF523513A7987R wait 2000 dsp STEP 4 PRESS CONTINUE Sto wrt 701 4 551 3 79 wait 2000 prt 2 aso
101. display TTL active low blanks display except LHS annunciators Low decimal point TTL active low turns decimal points on Must be timed with digit address code to display selected decimal points Low disable switches The active low disables the FUNCTION RESOLUTION and RESET switches Allows module control Low external TTL active low disables function and resolution switches for external control and lights RM annunciator LINH Low inhibit TTL active low inhibits starting new measurement LMG Low main gate TTL active low indicates main gate open RL LMGF Latched ROM bit to Function Selector which selects the main gate F F on the Function Selector to establish the gate time LMRES Low when reset signal comes from display Provides power up type reset LRES Low reset TTL active low resets when FUNCTION RESOLUTION or RESET switch settings are changed Also resets when DVM switches are changed Provides power up type of reset Non latched ROM line which is high in stop totalize and low in start Low totalize Latched ROM bit low in totalize mode TTL level Low transfer TTL active low used in DCA Main gate Accurate signal to drive remote gate such as channel C ECL levels 10 MHz oscillator TTL level 8 5 Model 5328A Schematic Diagrams RG RL1 HEC RL2 BIL RL3 HDVM RL4 RL5 TIO RL6 HC SRT RL TBA RL TBB RL TBC TBI TBO TBS Code A TBSA TBS Code
102. each A event is counted into 1st decade U1A U4A and U3 4 102 After the appropriate gate time has elapsed N clock counts into the Time Base the Main Gate Syncrhonizer signal goes low and the next Oscillator signal clocks Main Gate FF U1 closed U2 10 detects the closing of the Main Gate and sends a TTL signal LMGF to U4 in the State Control section of the Al Motherboard which initiates a new display cycle 4 103 A16 DISPLAY ASSEMBLY 4 104 The Display Assembly contains the display as shown in the block diagram in Section in addition to switches 51 POWER 52 RESET 53 FUNCTION 54 FREQ RESO LUTION N and SAMPLE RATE control R6 as shown in the schematic diagram in Section VIII 4 105 The display consists of a nine digit seven segment LED numeric display DS1 DS9 and annunciators for indicating measurement units DS10 DSI6 in addition to overflow DS17 remote DS18 and gate DS19 The display digits and annunciators are automatically dis played with the correct decimal point 4 106 The digit address code from A1U39 on the Motherboard is applied to transistors Q1 through 9 to strobe each digit which receives the seven segment code from A1U41 through transistors Q13 Q20 The gate DS19 remote DS18 and overflow DS17 LED s receive signals from the Motherboard through transistors Q10 Q11 and Q12 respectively 4 13 Model 5328A Theory of Operation 4 107 REMOTE CONTROLLABLE PROGRAMMABLE INPUT BLOCK D
103. each item listed is given in this column The lists are designed to inventory all items in one area of the major item before moving onto an adjacent area e Usable on Code Not applicable f Quantity Required Qty Reqd This column lists the quantity of each item required for a com plete major item g Quantity This column is left blank for use during an inventory Under the Rcvd column list the quantity you actually receive on your major item The Date columns are for your use when you inventory the major item B 1 SECTION 1 2 ILLUSTRATION NATIONAL A FIG NO 1 1 NO STOCK NUMBER 6625 01 061 8929 6625 01 061 8905 6625 01 061 8904 INTEGRAL COMPONENTS OF END ITEM 3 DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER COUNTER ELECTRONIC DIGITAL READOUT TS 3662 U 5328A E42 28480 EXTENDER BOARD 05328 62016 POWER CORD 8120 1348 28480 28480 COVER ASSEMBLY 7101 0470 28480 FSCM INSIDE INSIDE INSIDE 4 5 LOCATION USABLE ON CODE COVER COVER COVER 6 7 QTY QUANTITY REQD RCVD SECTION III 1 ILLUSTRATION A B FIG ITEM NO NO 1 2 3 4 5 BASIC ISSUE ITEMS 2 NATIONAL STOCK NUMBER 5920 00 280 8342 5920 00 793 4592 5920 00 010 5920 3 DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER FSCM FUSE 1 AMP F BLO 2110 0001 28480 FUSE 2 AMP F BLO 2110 0002 28480 MANUAL TM 11 6625 2941 14 amp P FUSE 3 AM
104. interval averaging time intervals as short as 100 picosecond with resolution to 10 picosecond may be measured Applications include coaxial cable length measurements phase measurements logic timing measurements and integrated circuit propagation delay measurement 1 14 Full bandwidth sensitivity and signal conditioning of the Channel A B and C input amplifiers is provided for ratio and totalizing measurements 1 15 The 5328A HP IB Interface is able to output measurement data and be controlled fully programmed via the Hewlett Packard Interface Bus HP 16 The 5328A may be interfaced to HP IB compatible instruments calculators or computers by interconnecting with an HP IB cable 1 16 EQUIPMENT SUPPLIED AND ACCESSORIES AVAILABLE 1 17 Table 7 7 lists equipment supplied with the 5328A and Table 7 2 lists accessories avail Table able The Service Kits listed in Table 1 2 are described im Section lll Table 1 1 Equipment Supplied DESCRIPTION HP PART NUMBER Detachable Power Cord 231 cm 7 ft long 8120 1348 Extender Board 18 pin 05328 62016 Table 1 2 Accessories Available DESCRIPTION HP PART NUMBER HP Interface Bus Interconnect Cable 10631A 914 mm 3 ft long 10631B 1828 mm 6 ft long 10631C 3656 mm 12 ft long 106310 0 5 m 1 4 long Front Handle Kit 5061 0088 Rack Flange Kit for instruments without handles 5061 0076 Rack and Handle Kit installation instructions included 5061 0082 w
105. is programmed for a 2 22V trigger level Refer to Program Code Sel Table 3 5 for an explanation of the format 4 149 The first data byte a appears on the input data lines MDA MDD This data byte is supplied to the inputs of shift registers U7 and U11 An LMS clock pulse routed through A10U6 applied to U7 pin 1 shifts the into U7 and U11 The next three data bytes all two s are shifted into U7 and U11 in the same manner 4 150 With the and the three numerals shifted into U7 and U11 the shift registers provide a parallel BCD output This parallel output is static until the A channel DAC is reprogrammed The parallel output is supplied to the input of rate multiplier chain U8 U9 and U10 4 151 Circuit USC and related components are configured as an oscillator The oscillator output is coupled through Q7 to the clock input of rate multipliers U8 U9 and U10 The clock signal is also supplied through inverter U5D to D FF U2A which is used as a synchronizer and wave shaper 4 152 With 1000 pulses entering pin 9 of each rate multiplier the output at U10 6 will be 222 pulses These pulses are supplied through level shifter and inverter U5B to U2 12 The in put pulese are synchronized and shaped by U2A The Q and Q outputs from U2A supply level shifter networks composed of resistors R31 R34 and R36 R38 and R39 The pulse outputs from the level shifter networks arrive at the cathode of CR6 and the anode of CR8 4 153 The
106. normally return an item to like new condition k Rebuild Consists of those services actions necessary for the restoration of unserviceable equipment to a like new condition in accordance with original manufacturing standards Rebuild is the highest degree of materiel maintenance applied to Army equipment The rebuild operation includes the act of returning to zero those age measurements hours miles etc considered in classifying Army equipment components D 3 Column Entries a Column 1 Group Number Column 1 lists group numbers the purpose of which is to identify com ponents assemblies subassemblies and modules with the next higher assembly b Column 2 Component Assembly Column 2 contains the noun names of components assemblies subassemblies and modules for which maintenance is authorized c Column 3 Maintenance Functions Column 3 lists the functions to be performed on the item listed in column 2 When items are listed without main tenance functions it is solely for purpose of having the group numbers in the MAC and RPSTL coin cide d Column 4 Maintenance Category Column 4 specifies by the listing of a work time figure in the appropriate subcolumn s the lowest level of maintenance authorized to perform the function listed in column 3 This figure represents the active time required to perform that maintenance function at the indicated category of maintenance If the number or complexity of the task
107. outputs of U15 it has the same code into U7 and thus the same code out of U7 for the same function as Channel A 4 142 Refer to Table 3 5 Program Code Set for the proper format to program a trigger level The proper format is X YZ and follows an A and B which indicates to which channel it applies 4 143 For the following discussion assume a trigger level is programmed following the proper format and preceeded by an A The interface resets to the non DAC mode when the A15 board receives an ASCII P from the system controller When the A15 board receives the A the MA line is set high and the MB line is set low U16 decodes the MA and MB lines in the non DAC mode and clocks the A channel latch U8 4 144 When a or appears on the MDA MDD lines a high is latched into U8 12 Latching occurs on the positive clock pulse transition from U16 The high at U8 12 will cause U17 8 to go high U17 8 is connected to U7 14 where the high changes the input address to ROM U7 and locks the interface into the DAC control mode The high at U17 8 is also connected to U16 1 A high at U16 1 causes U16 to supply clock pulses to either the A or B channel DAC Model 5328A Theory of Operation Since the condition of the MA and MB lines remains the same the Channel A DAC receives the clock pulses On the negative transition of the clock pulse the or is shifted into the A channel DAC shift registers A10U7 and U11 4 145
108. parts The list includes HP manufactured parts and purchased parts Prefix 0121 0122 0510 0674 thru 0778 0811 thru 0831 1200 1205 1410 1420 1820 1826 1850 1851 1853 1854 1855 1900 thru 1912 1920 thru 1952 1990 3100 thru 3106 8120 9100 Component Part Material Capacitors Variable mechanical Capacitors Voltage Variable semiconductor Capacitors Fixed Capacitors Fixed Non Electrolytic Capacitors Fixed Capacitors Fixed Electrolytic Insulting Materials Insulters Formed Knobs Control Spacers and Standoffs Crystals Adhesives Relays Fasteners Resistors Fixed non wire wound Resistors wire wound Sockets for components Heat Sinks Connectors RF and related parts Connectors non RF and related parts Bearings and Bushings Batteries Monolithic Digital Integrated Circuits Monolithic Linear Integrated Circuits Transistors Germanium PNP Transistors Germanium NPN Transistors Silicon PNP Transistors Silicon NPN Field Effect Transistors Diodes Vacuum Tubes Semiconductor Photosensitive and Light Emitting Diodes Switches Cables Transformers Coils Chokes Inductors and Filters 6 9 For example 1854 0037 1854 0221 and 1851 0192 are all NPN transistors The first two are silicon and the last is germanium 6 3 Model 5328A Replaceable Parts 6 4 6 10 General Usage Parts 6 11 The following list gives the prefixes for HP manufactured
109. s mw CEDE Ca 3t OMN IL OS SY per gt DES 152 1222 l 2 TL T E 52 2 5 p 3 m o AA HR ute IEEE EE 2 T T 5 I FAO E NS a A EE xw Meme M AA o oer 1 5 Q O NOTES cse TT BUS LINE NUMBER 220 XA 13 SHADED AREAS SHOW LOCATION OF 0 2 as XA 12 CONNECTOR MOUNTING IN RELATION S TO BUS LINES C53 C49 2 FOR DESCRIPTION OF MNEMONICS 2 DU 22 REFER TO TABLE 8 1 x 3 ASTERISK INDICATES SIGNAL EN o o SOURCE FOR SCHEMATICS OPTIONS SEE OPTION MANUAL ee ae T 4 DOT INDICATES ACTIVE CONNECTION TO BUS LINE AND ASSEMBLY lla J Q Q 27 0 1 Figure 8 7 Al Motherboard Schematic and Components Sheet 2 of 2 Model 5328A Schematic Diagrams 1651 U5B 011 5V REFERENCE 35V OUT SOURCE REGULATOR TO DISPLAY POWER SWITCH M SWITCHING Y REGULATOR t 15V LINEAR REGULATOR 5V OUT 15V OUT 100 120 220 240 VAC IN 25V NOMINAL RECTIFIER FILTERS 25V NOMINAL 15V REF CR13 C1 C2 5 2 SWITCHING REGULATOR 15V LINEAR REGULATOR 15V OUT U2 Q2 04 06 U4 08 010 Figure 8 6 8 18 Figure 8 8 2 Power Supply Blo
110. tells what occurs during each test and what should be observed by the operator if the test has been successfully completed At the conclusion of each test the program stops and displays the current check point To advance to the next test simply press CONTINUE If it is desired to repeat a test set the variable L to 1 via the keyboard 1 L EXECUTE then press CON TINUE To go on to the next test after looping set L back to O when the program halts O L EXECUTE then press CONTINUE Model 5328A Maintenance a3za8nF 3 6 CHECK 7 PER AVYG A HF IE TESTS CHECK POINT POINT 4 CHECK POINT 3 CHECK POINT 2 I AVG AB CHECK 18 CHECK POINT 3 RESOLUTION ca c mt n mr paras rm Tm HECK 11 RATIO CR mrs ar ui 57 5 POINT 12 ieee SAMPLE RATE CHECK POINT 4 FSINGLE MULTIFLE A MER SHHT CHECK POINT 5 CHECK POINT 13 ATTENUATOR POINT amp CHECK POINT 14 D SEPARATE COMMON NORMAL INVERTED Figure 5 7 Sample Printout 5 32 POINT 15 COUPLING CHECK POINT 16 TRIGGER LEVELS CHHL 5 CHHL Es SLOFE CHHL As SLOPE CHHL As SLOPE CHEC
111. that the A19 board is separate from the A10 Synchronizer Assembly during this operation Remove the front panel from A19 by removing the MARKER OUTPUT connector nuts and removing the LEVEL A and B control knobs Remove the A10 Synchronizer Assembly by pulling the assembly upward Replacement is essentially the reverse of removal Display Assembly Removal and Replacement 5 61 To remove and replace the A16 Display Assembly proceed as follows a Disconnect the power cable from the 5328A Safety Precaution b Remove the top cover from the 5328A c Using a suitable flat blade screwdriver as a prying tool gently remove the plastic filler strip from the top of the cast front panel frame 5 45 Model 5328A Maintenance 5 46 2 2 Remove the two machine screws that secure the top of the display front panel to the top of the cast front panel frame Turn the 5328 on its side and remove the two machine screws that secure the bottom of the display front panel to the bottom of the cast front panel frame Slightly loosen all remaining machine screws along the top of the cast front panel frame This releases the compressive force on the module front panel Remove the A16 Display Assembly with front panel attached by gently pushing the assembly from the rear Note that the display assembly is separated from the A1 Mother board during the operation Using a suitable allen wrench remove the SAMPLE RATE control knob fro
112. trace the exact number of counts is indeterminant since the number of short duration pulses actually counted by the DCA s cannot be known Since the time interval to be measured is slightly greater than the clock period the fourth waveshape shows that the average answer will be in error having been biased usually low because of the DCA s requirement of having full clock pulse to be counted 4 31 This problem is alleviated by the synchronizers which are designed to detect leading edges of the clock pulses that occur while the gate is open The waveshape applied to the DCA s when synchronizers are used is shown by the fifth waveform The leading edges are detected and reconstructed such that the pulses applied to the DCA s are of the same duration as the clock 4 32 Synchronizers are a necessary part of time interval averaging without them the aver aged answered is biased In addition it may easily be seen that with synchronizers involved time intervals of much less than the period of the clock can be measured This technique is only as good as the synchronizers however The 5328A high speed synchronizers enable intervals as small as 100 picosecond to be measured Model 5328A Theory of Operation START START START STOP STOP STOP GATE OUT COUNTS ACCUMULATED IN DCA S COUNTS ACCUMULATED IN DCA S J 1 1 1 1 WITH SYNCHRONIZERS Figure 4 5 Synchronizer Operation with Time Interval Averaging 4 33 Ther
113. walls to ensure good electrical contact between conductors on opposite sides of the board To prevent damage to the plating and the replacement component apply heat sparingly and work carefully 5 20 Replacing Integrated Circuits 5 21 Following are two recommended methods of replacing integrated circuits a SOLDER GOBBLER This is the best method Solder is removed from board by a solder ing iron with a hollow tip connected to a vacuum source b CLIP OUT This method should be used as a last resort only Clip the leads as close to the base as possible With a soldering iron and long nose pliers carefully remove the wires from each hole Then clean the holes 5 3 Model 5328A Maintenance Table 5 4 Performance Test 1 SENSITIVITY Channel A Specification 15 mV rms 0 35 MHz dc coupled 20 Hz 35 MHz ac coupled 50 mV rms 35 MHz 100 MHz Description A signal generator with calibrated output is set to the specified 5328 signal sensitivity level and varied over the specified frequency range The counter must display the correct frequency a 5 4 10 Hz to 10 MHz Setup HP 5328A HP 651B INPUT A TEST OSCILLATOR 50 22 OUTPUT 50 2 TERMINATION 1 DC coupled 10 Hz to 10 MHz Set the 5328A to FREQ A 1 Hz RESOLUTION SAMPLE RATE fully ccw Level A to PRESET DC COUPLING ATTEN X1 SEP Rear panel ARM switch should be set to OFF e Set the 651B for 15 mV rms Vary the 651B s frequenc
114. 0 125W CC TC 120 400 25W FC TC 400 600 RESISTOR TRMR 10K 10 C SIDE ADJ 1 TRN RESISTOR 51 5 RESISTOR 82 5 125W CC TC 270 540 25W FC TC 400 500 RESISTOR 1 1K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 56 2 1 5W F TC 0 100 RESISTOR 300 5 RESISTOR 5 1K 5 RESISTOR 120 5 RESISTOR 51K 5 RESISTOR 470 5 RESISTOR 51 5 je 25W FC TC 400 600 25W FC TC 400 700 25W FC TC 400 600 25W FC TC 400 800 25W FC TC 400 600 125W CC 270 540 RESISTOR 5 1K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 1 1K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 82 5 RESISTOR 51 5 RESISTOR 560 55 RESISTOR 27 5 25W FC TC 400 500 25W FC TC 400 500 25W FC TC 400 600 125W CC 270 540 FACTORY SELECTED PART RESISTOR 27 5 125W CC TC 270 540 FACTORY SELECTED PART RESISTOR 1 1K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 1 1K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 2K 5 RESISTOR 51 5 RESISTOR 51 5 RESISTOR 51 5 RESISTOR 30 5 RESISTOR 51 5 RESISTOR 2K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 25W FC TC 400 500 25W FC TC 400 500 125W CC TC 270 540 125W CC TC 270 540 125W CC TC 270 540 25W FC TC 400 700 FACTORY SELECTED PART RESISTOR 51 5 125W CC TC 270 540 FACTORY SELECTED PART RESISTOR 56 5 RESISTOR 120 5 125W CC 270 540 25W FC TC 400 600 FACTORY SELECTED PART RESISTOR 180 5 RESISTOR 51 5 RESISTOR 51 5 RESISTOR 51 5 RESISTOR 470 5 RESISTOR 5
115. 0030 0180 0106 0160 3879 0160 3879 0160 3879 0160 3879 a 0160 3879 0160 3879 0180 1746 0180 1746 0160 3490 1901 0040 1901 0040 1901 0040 1901 0040 1901 0040 1901 0040 1901 0040 1901 0040 1901 0040 1901 0040 1901 0040 1901 0040 1 1901 0040 1 m 1990 0485 5 1990 0485 1251 2034 1250 1163 1251 1626 1250 1163 2100 3516 0683 1035 0683 1035 0683 1035 0683 1035 0683 1035 0683 1035 0683 1035 0683 1035 0683 2025 0683 1035 0683 1525 0683 2715 0683 2715 0683 1525 CONTINUED QTY he m DESCRIPTION RESISTOR VAR CONTROL CCP 2 5M 20 10CW RESISTOR 20 5 25W FC TC 400 500 RESISTOR 3 3K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 1K 55 25W FC TC 400 600 RESISTOR 1K 55 25W FC TC 400 600 SWITCH TGL SUBMIN DPDT NS 2A 250VAC PC SWITCH PB DPDT MOM 02A 20VAC A16 MISCELLANEOUS SOCKET IC 14 CONT DIP SLDR CONNECTOR SGL CONT PIN 1 143MM3BSC SZ SQ CONNECTOR PC EDGE 24 CONT ROW 2 ROWS CONTACT PC SPRING PC INSULATOR MALE INSULATOR FEMALE SPACER LED SINGLE SPACER STANDOFF SPACER LED LONG SHAFT amp INDEX ASSEMBLY 45 DEG INDEX 8 SHAFT amp INDEX ASSEMBLY 36 DEG INDEX 10 NOT ASSIGNED NOT ASSIGNED SWITCH ASSEMBLY SERIES 1736 CAPACITOR FXD 60UF 20 6VDC TA CAPACITOR FXD 01UF 20 100UDC CER CAPACITOR FXD 01UF 20 10
116. 0VDC CER CAPACITOR FXD 01UF 20 100VDC CER CAPACITOR FXD 01UF 20 100VDC CER CAPACITOR FXD 01UF 20 100VDC CER CAPACITOR FXD 01UF 20 100VDC CER CAPACITOR FXD 15UF 10 20VDC TA CAPACITOR FXD 15UF 10 20VDC TA CAPACITOR FXD 1UF 20 50VDC CER DIODE SWITCHING 30V 50 2NS 00 35 DIODE SWITCHING 30V 50 2NS 00 35 DIODE SWITCHING 30V 50 2NS 00 35 DIODE SWITCHING 30V 50 2NS DO 35 DIODE SWITCHING 30V 50MA 2NS 00 35 DIODE SWITCHING 30V 50MA 2NS DO 35 DIODE SWITCHING 30V 50MA 2NS DO 35 DIODE SWITCHING 30V 50MA 2NS DO 35 DIODE SWITCHING 30V 50MA 2NS DO 35 DIODE SWITCHING 30V 50MA 2NS DO 35 DIODE SWITCHING 30V 50MA 2NS DO 35 DIODE SWITCHING 30V 50MA 2NS DO 35 DIODE SWITCHING 30V 50MA 2NS DO 35 LED VISIBLE LUM INT 800UCD IF 30MA MAX LED VISIBLE LUM INT 800UCD IF 30MA MAX CONNECTOR PC EDGE 10 CONT ROW 2 ROWS CONNECTOR RF BNC FEM PC 50 DHM CONNECTOR PC EDGE 12 CONT ROW 2 ROWS CONNECTOR RF BNC FEM PC 50 OHM RESISTOR VAR W SW 10K 20 LIN SPST NO RESISTOR 10K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 10K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 10K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 10K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 10K RESISTOR 10K 55 25W FC TC 400 700 55 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 10K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 10K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 2K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 10LK 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 1 5K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 270 5 25W FC TC 400 600 RESISTOR 270 5 25W
117. 1 A1 Motherboard Schematic and Components Sheet 1 of 2 8 17 A1 Motherboard Schematic and Components Sheet 2 of 2 8 19 A2 Power Supply Block Diagram 8 18 A2 Power Supply Schematic and Components 8 19 A3 A3A1 Oscillator Support Schematic and Components 8 21 A4 Function Selector Block Diagram 4 Function Selector Schematic and Components A8 Channel Block Diagram 8 26 A8 Channel C Schematic and Components A10 Synchronizer Block Diagram A10 Synchronizer Schematic and Components A11 Digital to Analog Converter Block Diagram A11 Digital to Analog Converter Schematic and Components A12 A B Channel Block Diagram 12 A B Channel Schematic and Components A15 HP IB Interface Block Diagram A15 HP IB Interface Schematic and Components 8 37 A16 Display Block Diagram 8 39 A16 Display Schematic and Components 8 41 A19 Switch Attenuator Schematic and Components 8 43 vii Model 5328A Safety Considerations viii SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS GENERAL This is a Safety Cl
118. 110 ORDER BY DESCRIPTION 0380 0644 1200 0485 ORDER BY DESCRIPTION 05328 60026 30D207G006DC2 1901 0040 1901 0040 1901 0040 1910 0016 1901 0040 5082 7751 5082 7751 5082 7751 5082 7751 5082 7751 5082 7751 5082 7751 5082 7751 5082 7751 5082 4480 5082 4480 5082 4480 5082 4480 5082 4480 5082 4480 5082 4480 5082 4480 5082 4480 5082 4480 1853 0326 1853 0326 1853 0326 1853 0326 1853 0326 1853 0326 1853 0326 1853 0326 1853 0326 1854 0492 1854 0492 1854 0492 1854 0492 1854 0492 1854 0492 1854 0492 1854 0492 1854 0492 1854 0492 1854 0492 1854 0492 CB3905 CB3905 CB3905 1810 0213 CB1005 MODEL 5328A REPLACEABLE TABLE 6 1 REFERENCE DESIGNATION A16R6 A16R7 A16R8 A16R9 A16R10 A16S1 A16S2 17 18 19 A19C1 A19C2 A19C3 A19C4 A19C5 A19C6 A19C7 A19C8 A19C9 A19C10 A19CR2 A19CR3 A19CR4 A19CR5 A19CR6 A19CR7 A19CR8 A19CR9 A19CR11 A19CR12 A19CR13 A19CR14 A19CR15 A19DS1 A19DS3 A19J1 A19J2 A19J3 A19J4 A19R1 A19R2 A19R5 A19R7 A19R8 A19R10 A19R11 A19R13 A19R14 A19R15 A19R16 A19R17 A19R18 A19R19 A19R20 PARTS REPLACEABLE PARTS HP PART NUMBER 2100 3455 0683 2005 0683 3325 0683 1025 0683 1025 3101 1621 3101 1940 1200 0474 1251 0600 1251 2582 5001 0156 5001 0157 Sor 5040 6948 5040 6949 9 05000 20017 05328 20252 05328 40003 3130 0498 0 3130 0500 5 05328 6
119. 12 y BOARD 805 8 1 ki Tar a SERB 2 Ne 10 R78 HS E 4 0220 i 13 zd ay m i 12 13 D gt 4 a 9 L2 p m 1000 E J s gt T3 p Pg ur ird y CONECTOR AA AA OATEAARIER LA a Stas TO A Lo DISPLAY Fow Tow BOARD i i J i A va SAME eV 12 POWER Sk z5 NABER npu ae sn OF 159 RTO q 13 13 po CA 3 15 2 0 aer oss 0 RLINT881 Du 250 16 RLCTRCH e 4 w CA ECO ee ED y Faks I I SELECTOR i i Los e o RPE NABER PINS 0 ALEC I T RU LIGHT LL aseow To TEN L RECTE MM 6 LIGHT 5 RUTBA ly US SV DISMLE atay i ENABLE DISABLES I 82 16 M di 0 14 l UPA I L 4 2 12 1 2 3 E sa 4 2 ex ig OF Liga 4 oo 1 MX ra Vi 1 REFERENCE DESIONATIONS WITHIN THIS SSV COMMON ASSEMBLY ARE ABBREVIATED ADO mo z ASSEMBLY NUMBER ABBREVIATION X iX FOR COMPLETE DESCRIPTION 1 1 97 18 15 2 UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED i RESI
120. 121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 24546 24546 24546 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 28480 MFR PART NUMBER CB1035 CB1215 CB8215 CB1035 BB2715 BB1005 CB5615 ET50X103 BB5105 CB8205 CB1125 01121 0757 1001 CB3015 CB5125 CB1215 CB5135 CB4715 BB5105 CB5125 CB1125 CB8205 CB5105 CB5615 BB2705 BB2705 CB1125 CB1125 CB2025 CB5105 CB5105 BB5105 BB3005 BB5105 CB2025 BB5105 BB5605 CB1215 CB1815 CB5105 CB5105 BB5105 CB4715 CB5125 CB5125 CB5135 CB1215 CB3315 CB5615 CB3015 CB5125 4 1 8 0 5102 4 1 8 0 3002 C4 1 8 T0 1001 G CB5105 CB5105 CB2215 CB5105 CB5105 CB1815 CB4705 CB1025 BB5105 CB1025 CB2005 CB1025 CB1025 CB2005 CB1025 1810 0080 MODEL 5328A REPLACEABLE PARTS TABLE 6 1 REPLACEABLE PARTS REFERENCE DESIGNATION A8R75 A8R76 A8R77 A8R78 A8R79 A8R80 A8R81 A8R83 A8R84 A8R85 A8R86 A8R87 A8R88 A8R89 A8U1 A8U2 A8U2 A8U3 804 805 806 A8U7 A8U8 A8U9 A8U10 A8U11 A8U12 A8U13 A8W1 A8W2 A9 A10 A10C1 A10C2 A10C3 A10C4 A10C5 A10C6 A10C7 A10C9 A10CR1 A10J1 A10J2 1093 1001 A10R1 A10R2 A10R3 A10R4 A10R5 HP PART NUMBER 0683 1525 0683 5125 0683
121. 1501 6 1810 0055 C4 1 8 T0 1502 G CB1035 CB1035 CB1035 CB2715 CB5115 CB1035 CB2715 CB1035 CB1035 CB1035 CB1035 1810 0055 CB1025 CB1035 CB1035 CB1545 CB1035 CB5635 CB1025 CB4725 CB6815 CB1025 CB5605 CB5605 CB5605 CB5605 CB5605 CB5605 CB5605 CB5605 CB5605 CB1035 C4 1 8 TO 3901 G C4 1 8 TO 1202 G C4 1 8 TO 3161 F C4 1 8 TO 2001 G CB1035 CB1035 CB1035 CB4315 CB1035 3101 1977 SN7490AN SN74132N SN7405N 1820 0632 SN7409N SN7486N SN7408N SN7404N SN7432N DM8552N SN7475N 1820 0634 SN7403N SN7409N SN7413N SN74010N SN7404N SN7474N SN7490AN 1820 0633 SN7403N SN7402N SN7486N SN7475N MODEL 5328A REPLACEABLE PARTS TABLE 6 1 REPLACEABLE PARTS REFERENCE DESIGNATION A1U26 A1U27 A1U28 A1U29 A1U30 A1U31 A1U32 A1U33 A1U34 A1U35 A1U36 A1U37 A1U38 A1U39 1040 1041 A1XU4 A1XU12 A1XU21 A2 A2C1 A2C2 A2C3 A2C4 A2C5 A2C6 A2C7 A2C8 A2C9 A2C10 A2C11 A2C12 A2C13 A2C14 A2C15 A2C16 A2C17 A2C18 A2C19 A2C20 A2C21 A2C22 A2CR1 A2CR2 A2CR3 A2CR4 A2CR5 A2CR6 A2CR7 A2CR8 A2CR9 A2CR10 A2CR11 A2CR12 A2CR13 HP PART NUMBER 1820 0301 1820 0301 1820 0538 1820 0282 1820 0282 1820 0301 1820 0538 1820 0174 1820 0174 1820 0174 1820 0174 1816 2251 1820 0661 1820 0214 1820 0054 1820 0914 1200 0525 1200 0473 1200 0473 0360 0124 0380 0640 1200 0549 1251 2026 1251 2035 8159 0003 0532
122. 179 1901 0179 1901 0179 1901 0179 1901 0179 1901 0179 1902 0680 1902 0680 1901 0040 1901 0040 1200 0548 1855 0081 1855 0416 1855 0416 1855 0081 1853 0020 1854 0071 1854 0071 1854 0071 0683 6215 0757 0438 0683 2015 0683 4315 0698 3153 0683 6215 0698 3136 0698 3156 0698 3157 0757 0199 0757 0447 0683 2015 0698 3152 0683 4315 0698 3136 0698 3156 0698 3157 0757 0199 0757 0447 0698 3152 0683 1015 0698 3153 0683 1025 0683 1055 2100 2705 2100 2705 0683 1035 2100 2503 2100 2503 0683 1025 0683 1055 2100 2705 0683 1015 2100 2705 0698 3152 0698 3136 0698 3156 0698 3157 0757 0199 0757 0447 0698 3153 0698 3152 0683 4315 0757 0438 0698 3136 0698 3156 0698 3157 0757 0199 0757 0447 CONTINUED IIS m o Q Q S Oo BORPNN GOO gt Q Q N 00 O O o HS Y Q 00 HS Q WN OW OO QTY 12 28 Ww C9 C9 DESCRIPTION DIODE SWITCHING DIODE SWITCHING DIODE SWITCHING DIODE SWITCHING DIODE SWITCHING DIODE SWITCHING DIODE SWITCHING DIODE SWITCHING DIODE SWITCHING DIODE SWITCHING DIODE SWITCHING DIODE SWITCHING DIODE ZNR IN827 DIODE ZNR IN827 DIODE SWITCHING DIODE SWITCHING SOCKET IC 14 CONT DIP DIP SLDR 15V 15V 15v 15v 15v 15v 15v 15V 15V 15V 15V 15V 50MA 50MA 50MA 50MA 50MA 50MA 50MA 50MA 50MA 50MA 50MA 50MA 6 2V 5 6 2V 5
123. 2 215 41 5 5 2728 5 To alo REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS WITHIN FROM 12 P208 277156 TO 0 P206 THIS ASSEMBLY ARE ABBREVIATED FROM TA A T To 1 FROM 12 2248 B 14 E TO alo DESCRIPTION FROM 12 2 HIS e TO AIG P2 B 2 UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED RESISTANCE IN i 15 1 CAPACITANCE IN FARADS i RI EM PRESET 1 i Pro CHANNEL 3 RI AND 8 ARE PART OF THE ES EVEL A J3 oro PRT 15 SAME COMPONENT SLOPE 1 EVEL B Y 4 R2B AND 510 ARE PART OF THE Me 2 TAE ES 2 To 412 P242 SAME COMPONENT i RIT BY I I 1500 7 cre RIS I 270 I w lt I FROM 12 11 EN lI MARKER SUT 1 1 1 I I i FROM 12 P241 26 T 1287 SND R23 A 330 A SLOPE 3 TO ai P2 2 I A amp 1 FROM 02 2 10 10 9 si Sy DISABLE I D TV ENABLE i 16 3 2 I 4 TO AlOP IH IA I I A SLOPE IC TO 8 1 E er 270 bg 2 TO AIO P2 2 FROM AT2 2 12 12 l MARKKER 007 L 1 TO AID 2 16 P O BATTEN TO P2 5 FROM AIO 9 Aea 15Y I CHANNEL FROM AIO P2 41 4 2 i cl ca 50U g FROM AIO P
124. 201 10 00 023 2355 10 00 772 8728 10 00 078 1950 10 00 247 7226 10 00 809 5484 10 00 057 3934 10 00 879 7210 10 00 911 9271 10 00 234 9817 10 00 982 8390 10 00 776 4176 10 00 211 1611 10 00 957 2765 10 00 008 4451 10 00 430 5697 10 00 472 5006 10 00 477 8011 10 00 726 624 10 00 829 024 10 00 797 974 10 00 127 166 10 00 864 841 5190 00 962 033 10 00 403 244 10 00 931 705 10 00 615 748 10 00 430 601 10 00 430 6036 O O OO UW 0 00 993 9338 5905 00 420 7124 5905 00 960 0099 5905 00 102 5294 5905 00 998 1929 2905 00 683 2238 5905 00 686 3370 5905 00 762 8168 5905 00 882 2723 5905 00 682 4110 5905 00 402 4264 5905 00 498 6059 5905 00 801 8272 5905 00 139 1642 5905 00 727 8001 5905 00 420 7126 5905 00 891 4247 5905 00 420 7130 5905 00 974 6081 5905 00 974 6084 5905 00 433 6904 5905 00 974 6078 5905 00 856 9865 5905 00 420 7139 5905 00 139 2271 5905 00 172 4901 5905 00 444 5552 5905 00 981 7513 5905 00 891 4224 5905 00 221 8310 PART NUMBER REPLACEMENT NATIONAL STOCK FSCM NUMBER SMR Q o PX PX PX PX PX PX PX PX PX PX PX PX PX PX PX PX PX PX PX PX PX PX PX PX PS PX PX PX PX PX PX PX PX PX PX PX PX PX PX PX OUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUU0UUUuUuUuuUuUuUuUuuUuUuUUUUUUUUUUUuuuuuUuuuuuuUuUuUuUuuuuuuUuuuoooou PART NUMBER 07
125. 25W FC TC 400 700 01121 CB1035 A10R26 1810 0020 4 1 NETWORK RES 8 PIN SIP 125 PIN SPCG 28480 1810 0020 A10R27 0683 1025 9 RESISTOR 1K 5 25W FC TC 400 600 01121 CB1025 A10R28 0683 5115 6 RESISTOR 510 5 25W FC TC 400 600 01121 5115 A10R29 0683 5115 6 RESISTOR 510 5 25W FC TC 400 600 01121 5115 1051 3101 1596 0 8 SWITCH SL DPDT NS MINTR 1A 125VAC PC 28480 3101 1596 10 1 0360 0124 3 11 CONNECTOR SGL CONT PIN 04 5 82 RND 28480 0360 0124 10 2 0360 0124 3 CONNECTOR SGL CONT PIN 04 5 82 NRD 28480 0360 0124 0360 0124 3 CONNECTOR SGL CONT PIN 04 IN BSC SZ RND 28480 0360 0124 10 4 0360 0124 3 CONNECTOR SGL CONT PIN 04 IN BSC SZ RND 28480 0360 0124 1001 1820 1320 0 1 ECL LINE TPL 2 INP 04713 MC10216L A10U2 1820 1049 0 2 IC TTL NON INV HEX 01295 SN74367N A10U3 1820 0802 1 5 IC GATE ECL NOR QUAD 2 INP 04713 10102 A10U4 1820 0802 1 IC GATE ECL NOR QUAD 2 INP 04713 10102 A10U5 1820 0802 1 IC GATE ECL KNOR QUAD 2 INP 04713 10102 A10U6 1820 0817 8 10 ECL D M S DUAL 04713 MC10131P A10U7 1816 0821 5 1 IC SN74188N 256 BIT ROM TTL 01295 SN74S188N PROGRAMMED A10U8 1820 0833 8 2 IC LCH TTLCOM CLEAR 8 BIT 07263 9334PC A10U9 1820 1049 0 IC BFR TTL NON INV HEX 01295 SN74367N A10U10 1820 0802 1 IC GATE ECL NOR QUAD 2 INP 04713 10102 A10U11 1820 1359 5 1 MUXR DATA SEL ECL 4 TO 1 LINE DUAL 14713 10174 A10U12 1820 0803 2 IC GATE ECL OR NOR TPL
126. 26 A19R27 A19R28 1951 1952 1953 A1984 1955 1956 1957 1958 19 1 1901 CONTINUED HP PART NUMBER 0683 6815 5 0683 1525 4 0683 3315 4 0683 3315 4 0683 1525 4 0683 2025 1 0683 6815 5 2100 3516 5 3101 1596 0 3101 1596 0 3101 1596 0 3101 1313 9 3101 1596 0 3101 1596 0 3101 1596 0 3101 1596 0 0360 0124 3 1820 1052 5 05328 40004 05328 60121 1990 0404 1990 0437 1990 0485 05328 60120 2110 0001 2110 0002 2110 0301 QTY O1 Or O P WW DESCRIPTION RESISTOR 680 5 FC TC 400 600 RESISTOR 1 5K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 330 5 25W FC TC 400 600 RESISTOR 330 5 25W FC TC 400 600 RESISTOR 1 5K 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 2K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 680 5 25W FC TC 400 600 RESISTOR VAR W SW 10K 20 LIN SPST NO SWITCH SL DPDT NS MINTR 1A 125VAC PC SWITCH SL DPDT NS MINTR 1A 125VAC PC SWITCH SL DPDT NS MINTR 1A 125VAC PC SWITCH SL DP3T NS MINTR 5A 125VAC DC PC SWITCH SL DPDT NS MINTR 1A 125VAC PC SWITCH SL DPDT NS MINTR 1A 125VAC PC SWITCH SL DPDT NS MINTR 1A 125VAC PC SWITCH SL DPDT NS MINTR 1A 125VAC PC CONNECTOR SGL CONT PIN 04 IN BSC SZ RND IC XLTR ECL TTL ECL TO TTL QUAD 2 INP A19 MISCELLANEOUS STANDOFF LED SHORT KIT SPARE PARTS CONSIST OF LED RED MIN LED INDICATOR LED GREEN MIN CABLE ASSEMBLY OVERLOAD FUSE 1A F BLO FUSE A F BLO FUSE 12A MIN AX SEE INTRODUCTION TO THIS SECTION FOR ORDERING INFORMATION
127. 2CR15 A12CR16 A12CR17 A12J1 A12K1 A12K2 A12K3 A12K4 A12K5 A12K6 A12K7 A12K8 A12K9 A12K10 A12K11 1211 1212 1213 1214 1201 1203 1204 A12R1 A12R2 A12R3 A12R4 A12R5 HP PART NUMBER 0160 0128 0180 0428 0180 0428 0160 3879 0160 0576 0160 0576 0180 0415 0160 3879 0180 0415 0180 0428 0180 0428 0160 3876 0160 4423 0160 3876 0160 4423 0150 0059 0160 2242 0160 2244 0150 0059 0160 2246 0160 2247 0160 4424 0160 4424 0180 0428 0140 0225 0140 0225 0160 3873 0160 3874 1902 3082 1901 0040 1901 0376 1901 0040 1901 0376 1901 0376 1902 0126 1901 0376 1902 0126 1901 0376 1901 0040 1901 0040 1901 0040 1901 0040 1901 0040 1901 0040 1901 0040 1200 0548 0490 0642 0490 1175 0490 1183 0490 1175 0490 1183 0490 1175 0490 1175 0490 1175 0490 1175 0490 1175 0490 1183 9100 2288 9100 2288 9140 0178 9140 0178 1854 0071 1855 0213 1855 0213 0698 5426 0698 5426 1810 0080 0683 3925 0698 5999 CONTINUED AWIWU Oi J OO OO CO woo DDDDH o rererere P COWW e N C QTY DESCRIPTION CAPACITOR FXD CAPACITOR FXD CAPACITOR FXD CAPACITOR FXD CAPACITOR FXD CAPACITOR FXD CAPACITOR FXD CAPACITOR FXD CAPACITOR FXD CAPACITOR FXD CAPACITOR FXD CAPACITOR FXD CAPACITOR FXD CAPACITOR FXD CAPACITOR FXD CAPACITOR FXD CAPACITOR FXD
128. 2NS DO 35 DIODE SWITCHING 30V 50MA 2NS DO 35 DIODE GE 60V 60MA 1US DO 7 DIODE SWITCHING 30V 50MA 2NS DO 35 TRANSISTOR NPN SI PD 300MW FT 200MHZ TRANSISTOR NPN SI PD 300MW FT 200MHZ TRANSISTOR NPN PD 300MW FT 200MHZ TRANSISTOR NPN SI PF 200MW FT 600MHZ TRANSISTOR NPN SI PD 300MW FT 200MHZ TRANSISTOR NPN SI PD 300MW FT 200MHZ RESISTOR 270 5 25W FC TC 400 600 NETWORK RES 9 PIN SIP 15 PIN SPCG RESISTOR 2 7K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 3 3M 5 25W FC TC 900 1100 FACTORY SELECTED PART NETWORK RES 9 PIN SIP 15 PIN SPCG RESISTOR 330 5 25W FC TC 400 600 RESISTOR 10K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 4 7K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 1 5K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 1K 55 25W FC TC 400 600 RESISTOR 1K 55 25W FC TC 400 600 RESISTOR 1K 55 25W FC TC 400 600 RESISTOR 10K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 4 7K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 SEE INTRODUCTION TO THIS SECTION FOR ORDERING INFORMATION CODE 28480 56389 28480 56289 72136 28480 56289 84411 56289 28480 56289 56289 28480 56289 28480 56289 28480 28480 56289 28480 56289 28480 28480 56289 56289 56289 56289 56289 56289 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 01121 28480 01121 01121 28480 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 MFR PART NUMBER 05328 60028 1
129. 2t6 GND acou a 8 TO 2 P2t3 5 TOAIO P2 9 Pro J3 9 TO 412 P2 9 i 54 FROM AIO P2 2 12 To al2 L 2 X 100 rx PRIN 10K FROM AIO P214 Y COUP Te 412 Figure 8 25 A19 Switch Attenuator Schematic and Components 8 43 DA Pam 310 4 DA Pam 310 7 TB 43 0118 TM 38 750 TM 750 244 2 TM 11 6625 2941 14 amp P APPENDIX A REFERENCES Index of Technical Manuals Technical Bulletins Supply Manuals Types 7 8 and 9 Supply Bulletins and Lubrication Orders US Army Equipment Index of Modification Work Orders Field Instructions for Painting and Preserving Electronics Command Equipment Including Camo flauge Pattern Painting of Electrical Equipment Shelters The Army Maintenance Management System TAMMS Procedures for Destruction of electronics Mater iel to Prevent Enemy Use Electronics Command APPENDIX B COMPONENTS OF END ITEM LIST Section INTRODUCTION B 1 Scope This appendix lists integral components of and basic issue items for the AN USM 459 to help you in ventory items required for safe and efficient operation B 2 General This Components of End Item List is divided into the following sections a Section IL Integral Components of the End Item These items when assembled comprise the and must accompany it whenever
130. 3D and capacitor C16 clocks 1 11 yielding a synchronized fast rise and fall time Main Gate signal on U1 14 4 99 An Example of Operation 4 100 To show how the above mentioned function selector circuits operate together an ex ample of the measurement of frequency A is given in the following paragraphs 4 101 Assume the counter is in the middle of its display cycle Low Inhibit LINH is TTL low High Reset Time Base HRTB has momentarily gone high resetting U1 and U4 and High Reset Decade HRD has momentarily gone high resetting First Decade U1 U4 and U4 The control chip on the Motherboard releases LINH to go high U9 13 goes low enabling Arming Multiplexer US Assuming that self arm has been selected A will have been dected by the ROM on pins 9 10 and 11 of U5 When the first A pulse occurs U4 4 goes low setting U4 U4 5 goes high turning on transistor Q1 which in turn pulls LINH low again and inhibits another measure ment from starting until Reset has occurred In a frequency measurement the ROM selects the Oscillator signal on pin 2 of U10 to be sent into the Time Base Shortly after the Time Base re turns a high signal on Main Gate Synchronizer drives U1 10 high On the next Oscillator signal through U10 U10 11 gets clocked causing U1 14 to go low This low signal propagates through U8 B and to U62 opening the Main Gate and initiating the count Signal A has been selected on U6 by ROM lines R22 23 and 24 thus
131. 480 05328 20212 05328 20217 4 1 PANEL FRONT 28480 05328 20217 05328 20253 8 2 THUMB SCREW 28480 05328 20253 05328 60115 5 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY OSCILLATOR 28480 05328 60115 05328 60120 2 2 CABLE ASSEMBLY OVERLOAD INDICATOR 28480 05328 60120 WITH A8DS1 05328 62016 9 2 BOARD ASSEMBLY EXTENDER 28480 05328 62016 05328 90055 4 1 MANUAL OPERATING AND SERVICE 28480 05328 90055 05328 90057 8 1 BOOKLET OPERATING 28480 05328 90057 1460 1345 5 2 TILT STAND SST 28480 1460 1345 2950 0001 8 6 NUT HEX DBL CHAM 3 8 32 THD 094 IN THK 00000 ORDER BY DESCRIPTION 2950 0035 8 4 NUT HEX DBL 0CHAM 15 32 32 THD 00000 ORDER BY DESCRIPTION 0370 1005 2 1 KNOB BASE PTR 3 8 JGK 125 IN ID 28480 0370 1005 0370 1097 2 1 KNOB BASE PTR 1 2 JGK 125 IN ID 28480 0370 1097 0370 1107 5 2 KNOB BASE PTR AND BAR 1 2 JGK 25 IN ID 28480 0370 1107 1251 2357 8 1 CONNECTOR AC PWR 9 MALE FLG MTG 28480 1251 2357 3101 0851 8 1 CAP PUSHBUTTON BLACK 2 IN DIA 155 IN 28480 3101 0851 7120 0644 1 1 LABFL WARNING 28480 7120 0644 7122 0097 2 1 NAMEPLATE REAR 28480 7122 0097 5020 8801 4 1 FRAME FRONT FULL 28480 5020 8801 5020 8802 5 1 FRAME REAR 28480 5020 8802 5020 8831 0 2 28480 5020 8831 5040 7201 8 4 FOOT STANDARD 82480 5040 7201 5040 7202 9 1 TRIM 28480 5040 7202 05328 00001 2 1 BRACKET MAIN 28480 05328 00001 05328 00002 3 2 BRACKET CORNER 28480 05328 00002 05328 00015 8 1 INSULATOR P S 28480 05328 00015 SEE INTRODUCTION THIS SECTION FOR ORDERING INFORMATION
132. 5 1015 1005 0811 1856 43 103 1025 1035 1035 1025 4 1 8 0 1782 SN74LS90N SN74LS158N 723PC MC10125L MC78L05ACP 05328 60115 8120 0229 0890 0029 1250 0824 1250 0870 C232 2 C9 105 2 1250 0960 N126 2 ORDER BY DESCRIPTION 1250 0835 1251 2035 8159 0005 05328 60005 0160 3879 0160 4084 DM15E800G0300WV1CR DM15E800G0300WV1CR 0160 2055 150D335X0015A2 0160 2055 150D335X0015A2 0160 2055 MODEL 5328A REPLACEABLE PARTS TABLE 6 1 REPLACEABLE PARTS REFERENCE DESIGNATION 4 11 4 12 A4C13 4 14 4 15 4 16 4 17 401 402 403 A4R1 A4R2 A4R3 A4R4 A4R5 A4R6 A4R7 A4R8 A4R9 A4R10 A4R11 A4R12 A4R13 A4R14 A4R15 A4R16 A4R17 A4R18 A4R19 A4R20 A4R21 A4R22 A4R23 A4R24 A4R25 A4R26 A4R27 A4R28 A4R29 A4R30 A4R31 A4R32 A4R33 A4R34 A4R35 A4R36 A4R37 A4R38 A4R39 A4R40 A4R41 A4R42 A4R43 A4R44 A4R45 A4R46 A4U1 A4U2 A4U3 404 405 406 4 7 A4U8 409 4010 5 6 7 0160 0342 0140 0214 0160 2055 0160 2055 0160 2055 0140 0202 0160 0153 1854 0215 1854 0215 1854 0215 0683 5115 0683 1315 0683 8205 0683 5115 0683 5115 0683 2025 0683 1815 0683 2025 0683 1815 0683 2025 0683 1815 0683 2025 0683 1815 0683 1825 0683 4315 0683 1825 0683 1815 0683 1815 0683 1825 0683 8205 0683 1315 0683 1825 0683 1825 0683 1825 0683 1035
133. 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 430 5 25W FC TC 400 600 je je RESISTOR 1 8K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 180 5 25W FC TC 400 600 RESISTOR 180 55 25W FC TC 400 600 RESISTOR 1 8K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 82 5 25W FC TC 400 500 je RESISTOR 130 5 25W FC TC 400 600 RESISTOR 1 8K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 1 8K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 1 8K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 10K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 430 5 25W FC TC 400 600 RESISTOR 270 5 25W FC TC 400 600 RESISTOR 330 5 25W FC TC 400 600 RESISTOR 1 8K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 1 8K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 2 7K 5 25W TC 400 700 RESISTOR 2 7K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 2 7K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 1 8K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 180 5 25W FC TC 400 600 RESISTOR 82 5 25W FC TC 400 500 RESISTOR 130 25W FC TC 400 600 RESISTOR 510 25W FC TC 400 600 RESISTOR 270 25W FC TC 400 600 RESISTOR 270 25W FC TC 400 600 RESISTOR 680 5 25W FC TC 400 600 RESISTOR 1 8K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 NETWORK RES 9 PIN 81P 15 PIN SPCG NETWORK RES 8 PIN SIP 125 PIN SPCG RESISTOR 430 5 125W CC TC 330 800 RESISTOR 1 8K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 IC FF ECL D M 8 DUAL IC XLTR ECL TTL ELC TO TTL QUAD 2 INP IC FF TTL 8 J K NEG EDGE TRIG IC FF TTL 8 J K NEG EDGE TRIG IC MUXR DATA SEL TTL 8 TO 1 LINE 8INP IC MUXR DATA SEL ECL 8 TO 1
134. 5 25W FC TC 800 900 IC WIDEBAND AMPL IC AMPLIFIER IC WIDEBAND AMPL FACTORY SELECTED PART IC CNTR ECL BIN DUAL IC CNTR ECL BI QUINARY IC XLTR ECL TTL ECL TO TTL QUAD 2 INP IC LCH TTL D TYPE 4 BIT IC GATE TTL NAND QUAD 2 INP IC 1428 OP AMP 8 DIP P IC 1458 OP AMP 8 DIP P IC GATE ECL OR NOR TPL IC GATE TTL NAND QUAD 2 INP IC 8 DIP P CABLE ASSEMBLY FREQUENCY C CABLE SHLD 18AWG 2 CNDCT JGK JKT CABLE ASSEMBLY TEST TUBING HS 187 D 093 RCVD 02 WALL CONNECTOR RF SMC FEM UNMTD 50 OHM TERMINATION COAX CA CRP CLP COAX CA FEM CABLE OVERLOAD INDICATOR CONNECTOR SGL CONT SKT RND LED VISIBLE LUM INT 3MCD IF 20MA MAX WIRE 24AWG O 300 PVC 7X32 80C WIRE 24AWG Y 300V PVC 7X32 80C A8 MISCELLANEAUS STANDOFF RVT ON 75 IN LG 6 32THD CONNECTOR SGL CONT SKT 016 IN BBC 8Z CONNECTOR SGL CONT PIN 114 5 82 SQ CONNECTOR SGL CONT SKT 033 5 82 PIN GRV 062 IN DOA 25 IN LG STL EXTRACTOR PC BOARD GRA POLYC NOT ASSIGNED SYNCHRONIZER CAPACITOR FXD 680 20 6VDC TA CAPACITOR FXD 680 20 6VDC TA CAPACITOR FXD 01UF 80 20 100VDC CER CAPACITOR FXD 01UF 20 100VDC CER CAPACITOR FXD 01UF 20 100VDC CER CAPACITOR V TRMR CER 2 8PF 350V PC MTG CAPACITOR FXD 3PF 25PF 500VDC CER CAPACITOR FXD 01UF 20 100VDC CER DIODE ZNR 3 16V 5 DO 7 PD 4W TC 064 SOCKET IC 14 CONT DIP SLDR SOCKET IC 14 CONT DIP DIP SLDR SOCKET IC 14 CONT DIP DIP SLDR TRANSISTORNNPN SI PD 300MW FT 200MHZ RESISTOR
135. 5 00 998 1794 9905 00 929 2529 5905 00 990 0303 5905 00 998 1792 5905 00 981 7530 5905 00 891 2811 5905 00 935 8470 5905 00 102 5693 5905 00 998 1825 5905 00 858 6501 5905 00 935 8481 5935 00 238 5507 5999 00 937 4420 5999 00 789 3794 5935 00 804 5144 5935 00 068 3546 5935 00 172 1007 5935 00 446 8768 5935 00 267 2973 9935 00 233 6728 5935 00 238 5507 5905 00 173 3985 5905 00 470 7377 5905 00 548 0915 5962 00 138 5248 5962 00 493 5961 5962 00 865 4626 5962 00 451 6345 5962 00 138 5250 9962 00 102 7520 5962 00 404 2559 5962 00 229 8500 5962 00 451 3131 5962 00 614 5251 5962 00 270 1960 5962 00 009 1356 5962 01 034 9974 5962 00 513 2691 5962 00 496 2209 5962 01 022 3250 5961 00 901 4862 5961 00 904 2540 5961 00 931 0372 5961 00 471 2984 5961 00 137 4608 9961 0 943 7572 5961 00 892 8706 5961 00 350 8299 59261 00 965 5917 5961 00 914 7496 5961 00 790 7834 5961 00 430 6819 5961 00 451 8685 9951 00 472 2987 5961 00 718 7329 5961 00 766 1459 5961 00 780 8330 5961 00 452 0438 5961 00 057 7873 5961 00 350 2205 5961 00 448 9737 5961 00 195 3526 5961 00 954 9182 PART NUMBER REPLACEMENT NATIONAL STOCK FSCM NUMBER n PX PX PX PX PX PX PX PX PX PX PX PX X PX PX PX PX PX PX PX PX PX PX PX PX PX PX PX PX PX PX PX PX PX PX x lt
136. 5 Qualifiers and Signal Mnemonics ADDR ANN ATN B1 B2 B3 BLK DAC DAV DIO1 DIO2 DIO3 DIO4 DIOS DIO6 DIO7 EOM LDP LIS LLO MA MB MLT MS OVFL ODV RDF REN RFD RMT SP SRQ swi TALK A TLK QUALIFIERS U26 4 H My Listen Address U32 3 L Annunciator On U8 5 L Attention U12 5 16 State Sequence Count for Output of ASCII Code U12 6 16 State Sequence Count for Output of ASCII Code U12 7 16 State Sequence Count for Output of ASCII Code U12 9 16 State Sequence Count for Output of ASCII Code U6 7 U32 5 H Decimal Point has been Outputted U8 7 H Data Accepted U3 1 L Data is Valid U3 2 HP IB Data Bit 1 U3 3 HP IB Data Bit 2 U3 4 Data Bit 3 U3 5 HP IB Data Bit 4 U3 6 HP 1B Data Bit 5 U3 7 HP 1B Data Bit 6 U3 9 HP IB Data Bit 7 H End of Measurement U8 2 Always HIGH used for unconditional jump U32 2 L Decimal Point On U6 1 H Address to Listen U19 9 H Local Lockout On U6 5 L Enable Strobe to Function Select Latch U34 and Select Bit on Module Strobe Code U6 6 L Enable Strobe to Time Base Select Latch U28 and Select Bit on Module Strobe Code U32 6 H Make Multiple Measurements U29 3 H Module Strobe t amp TB Strobe U32 4 L Overflow U32 7 L Wait until Addressed U32 9 H Read Data on the fly UB 4 L Remote Enabled UB 9 H Ready for Data H Option 011 in Remote U32 1 H Measure
137. 5 mA and blows when the input voltage reaches about 7 volts The signal passes through amplifier U1 with a single ended gain of 4 and drives U2 a combination amplifier Schmitt trigger differentially The Schmitt trigger output U2 pin 13 is a logic level from 0 volts to approximately 600 mV The now digital square wave signal passes through U3 where it branches to drive a binary U4 and a detector The detector circuit senses the presence of an input signal and sends a TTL C ARM command to the A4 Function Selector as described in the following paragraph 4 159 During normal operation in the frequency C function U4 is originally disabled by a High logic level at U4 pin 14 0 volts When the counter is ready to make a measurement and it senses that an input signal is present via the ARM line the main gate opens Pin 14 on U4 then goes low to 600 mV and the input signal passes through U4 5 where it is trans lated to ECL levels A 50 40 duty cycle for sine wave inputs signal is sent to the A4 Function Selector on C and C bus lines after the time base counts out the main gate closes U4 pin 14 goes high and U4 and U5 stop in their present states Circuit U6 translates the information in 04 05 to TTL level and it is shifted into a quad latch U7 where it is stored for strobing into the display 4 160 Circuit U10 Q1 Q2 and various resistors constitute a current source to properly bias U1 and U2
138. 50D224X9035A2 0160 0161 150D606X0006B2 DM15F401F0300WV1CR 0170 0024 150D105X0050A2 663UW10354W2 150D105X0050A2 0160 0153 150D105X0050A2 150D606X0006B2 0160 2055 150D335X0015A2 0160 2055 150D335X0015A2 0160 2055 0160 2055 150D225X0020A2 0160 2055 150D225X0020A2 0160 2055 0160 2055 150D335X0015A2 150D335X0015A2 150D225X0020A2 150D225X0020A2 150D225X0020A2 150D225X0020A2 1901 0040 1910 0016 1902 0031 1901 0050 1901 0050 1901 0040 1902 3082 1901 0040 1901 0040 1901 0040 1901 0040 1901 0040 1901 0040 1910 0016 1901 0040 1854 0071 1854 0071 1854 0071 1854 0092 1854 0071 1854 0071 CB2715 1810 0055 CB2725 CB3355 1810 0055 CB3315 CB1035 CB4725 CB1525 CB1025 CB1025 CB1025 CB1035 CB4725 MODEL 5328A REPLACEABLE PARTS TABLE 6 1 REPLACEABLE PARTS REFERENCE DESIGNATION 1 15 A1R16 1 17 1 19 A1R23 A1R27 A1R28 A1R29 A1R30 A1R32 A1R33 A1R34 A1R35 A1R36 A1R37 A1R38 A1R39 A1R40 1 41 1 42 A1R43 A1R44 1 45 A1R46 A1R48 A1R52 1 55 A1R56 1 57 A1R58 1 59 1 60 1 61 A1R62 A1R63 A1R64 1 65 1 66 1 67 A1R68 A1R69 A1R70 1 71 A1R72 A1R73 A1R74 1 75 1 78 1 80 151 152 153 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 PART
139. 520 REFERENCE DESIGMATIONS E IN T Case 5 24 WITHIN THIS ASSEMBLY ARE m ABBREVIATED ADD ASSEMBLY NUMBER TD ABBREYIATION B FOR COMPLETE DESCRIPT1UN E 1 2 UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED Pro or 2 TPI RESISTANCE IN OHuS Ji CLOCK B E iN FARADS FROM 13 I INDUCTANCE IN MENRIES 11 o 1 Fg Vg 3 ASTERISK INDICATES l sy Fd SELECTED VALUE AVERAGE 3 bg VALUE SHOWN 1 Raat 1 10K I All FROM AIQJI AS A s m I REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS I i t 06 m Fg CUII 7 7 i noe jj 950 5 IE I E 6 R42 FROM 25 2 eO 1600 ar 3 exi MEM e pro ote me i 4 nie j CRIE p H m i F le 5 1 20 U9 UIC g 36 d Doe MS EE ba ALL ACTIVE ELEMENTS bo 3 8 Rar CRIA a 6812 La F R490 8 Eu S USB gt t a CRI CRE 106 E ji 1 CP4 CRE CRE FROM 4 i I2 et bo EC s CRT CAB CRS sy T 154 1 1 CRIT CRI2 1901 0179 j i 1 5 gj A e C I 813 ER 1802 0666 R496 4 1 gt E D CRIS CRI6 1901 0040 CLOCK 22 FROM AIQJITI43 14 t MSD 4 8 db tr Roam ui FROM BUS LINE 12 UM t 18 11 IT BK I 12 53 S 02 91 1855 0416
140. 57 0280 0757 0283 0757 0421 0757 0427 0757 0428 0757 0438 0757 0439 0757 0442 0757 0447 0757 0454 0757 0900 0757 0924 0757 0931 0757 0938 0757 0950 09 52 3030 200 0063 205 0011 250 0083 250 0835 250 0870 251 2026 251 2034 491 2397 251 3246 810 0020 810 0041 810 0055 820 0054 820 0055 820 0068 820 0074 820 0077 820 0099 820 0174 820 0175 820 0196 820 0223 820 0301 820 0328 820 0537 820 0736 820 0802 820 1019 853 0016 853 0020 853 0036 853 0326 854 0071 854 0092 854 0215 855 0081 901 0040 901 0050 901 0376 901 0518 901 0535 901 0638 902 0031 902 0074 902 0126 902 0579 902 0774 902 3036 902 3082 1902 3224 1910 0016 TABLE 6 3 PART NUMBER NATIONAL STOCK NUMBER CROSS REFERENCE INDEX FSCM 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 27264 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 824 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 284 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 NATIONAL STOCK NUMBER 5905 00 853 8190 5905 00 998 1909 5905 00 891 4219 2905 00 91 7 0578 590
141. 7 and 3 to 12 Reinstall All board using an extender board 05328 62016 into XA11 NOTE Ensure jumper from pin 8 to 10 does not short to any of the other jumpers 3 Apply power to an HP 10526T Logic Pulser 4 Connect HP 3490A Voltmeter between A11TP5 and 5328A chassis used to monitor Channel A DAC output 5 Turn 5328A power switch to ON d Pulse A11U11 14 with the logic pulser This resets the DAC storage registers HP 3490 Voltmeter should display OV 50 mV If so perform step 5 If not refer to Table 5 14 and check the logic levels listed on line 1 reset pulse U11 14 for an improper level Sus pect any integrated circuit listed if it has an improper output e Pulse A11J1 14 once with the logic pulser and verify line 2 of able 5 14 Pulse A11J1 14 three more times stopping after each pulse to verify the next line of Table 5 14 Steps a through f have checked the A channel DAC To check the B channel DAC change the voltmeter connection to A11TP6 and 5328A chassis Repeat steps d through f pulsing A11J1 pin 13 instead of pin 14 The parentheses in Table 5 14 refer to B channel DAC circuit locations h If the A and B channel DAC output voltages were the same as in Table 5 74 board is functioning correctly If a digital output from Table 5 74 js incorrect suspect the integrated circuit generating the level If the digital outputs are correct and the analog output is incorrect continue with step i
142. 7263 01295 01295 01295 07263 07263 27014 01295 01295 01295 01295 07263 01295 MFR PART NUMBER 0170 0024 150D336X901082 150D336X901082 150D156X902082 1910 0016 1910 0016 1910 0016 1910 0016 1910 0016 1910 0016 1251 3283 SPS 3611 SPS 3611 SPS 3611 SPS 3611 1853 0036 CB3035 CB1035 CB1035 CB2715 CB3325 CB4725 CB1035 CB1035 CB1035 CB1035 CB1235 CB1035 CB2715 CB2715 CB1035 CB1035 CB1535 CB4725 CB4725 CB1035 CB1035 CB4725 CB4725 CB1035 CB2725 CB2025 CB3025 CB3025 1810 0136 1810 0136 1810 0055 1810 0055 1810 0055 1810 0055 CB1035 3101 1973 SN74121N 93L24PC 93L12PC 8N7404N 8N7438N 93L12PC SN7493N 93L12PC 8N7404N 8N7438N SN7474N 93L12PC 93L01PC DM86L76N SN74L98N SN7438N 8N7400N SN74132N 93L34PC SN7403N MODEL 5328A REPLACEABLE PARTS TABLE 6 1 REPLACEABLE PARTS REFERENCE DESIGNATION A15U21 A15U22 A15U23 A15U24 A15U25 A15U26 A15U27 A15U28 A15U29 A15U30 A15U31 A15U32 A15U33 A15U34 A15W1 Al6 16 1 A16CR1 A16CR2 A16CR3 A16CR4 A16CR5 A16DS1 A16D82 A16DS3 A16DS4 A16DS5 A16DS6 A16DS7 A16DS8 A16DS9 A16DS10 A16DS11 A16DS12 A16DS13 A16DS14 A16DS15 A16DS16 A16DS17 A16DS18 A16DS19 1601 1602 1603 1604 1605 1606 1607 1608 1609 A16010 A16011 A16012 A16013 A16014 A16015 A16016 A16017 A16018 A16019 A16020 A16021 16 1 16 2 A16R3 A16R4 A16R5 HP
143. 8 60035 0180 2842 0180 2842 0160 0576 0160 0576 0160 2203 0160 0945 0180 0562 0160 3879 0180 2827 0180 2827 0180 2832 0180 2832 0180 0418 0180 0418 0140 0209 0140 0209 0180 0587 0180 0587 0160 0576 0160 3879 0160 0128 0160 0128 1902 0774 1902 0774 1901 1086 1901 1086 1902 0522 1902 0522 1901 0040 1901 0040 1902 0632 1902 0632 1901 0638 CONTINUED oooou Prouou 2 00 Ww 0 wo QTY NP bp DESCRIPTION IC LCH TTL D TYPE 4 BIT IC LCH TTL D TYPE 4 BIT IC GATE TTL NOR DUAL 4 INP IC GATE TTL EXCL OR QUAD 2 INP IC GATE TTL EXCL OR QUAD 2 INP IC LCH TTL D TYPE 4 BIT IC GATE TTL NOR DUAL 4 INP IC INV TTL 1 INP IC INV TTL HEX 1 INP IC INV TTL HEX 1 INP Ic INV TTL HEX 1 INP IC GATE TTL OR QUAD 2 INP IC DCDR TTL BCD TO DEC 4 TO 10 LINE IC GATE TTL QUAD 2 INP IC DCDR TTL BCD TO 7 SEG 4TO 7 LINE SOCKET IC 20 CONT DBL STRP DIP SLDR SCKET IC 16 CONT DIP DIP SLDR SOCKET IC 16 CONT DIP DIP SLDR Al MISCELLANEOUS CONNECTOR SGL XONT PIN 04 IN BSC 32 RND STANDOFF RND 5 IN LG 6 32THD 25 IN OD SOCKET IC 14 CONT STRIPO DIP SLDR CONNECTOR PC EDGE 18 CONT ROW 2 ROWS CONNECTOR PC EDGE 15 CONT ROW 2 ROWS WIRE 22WG W PVC 1X22 80C ASSEMBLY POWER SUPPLY SERIES 1808 OPTION 096 CAPCITOR RXD 450 00 20 35VDC AL CAPACITOR FXD 4500UF 20 35 VDC AL CAPACITOR FXD 1UF 20 50
144. 825A HP 5328A HP 8013A COMPUTING INPUT PULSE CONTROLLER GENERATOR e 5328 rear panel address switches as follows on ee E i TALK ONLY J 5 11 Model 5328A Maintenance Table 5 4 Performance Test Continued Set the pulse generator for the following output POSITIVE OUTPUT 2045 80 ps EyF NEGATIVE OUTPUT 300 20 us e 80 SLOPE TEST Execute the following from the 9825A keyboard wrt 701 PF8G1S13A57 000 B57 000 R Counter should display 20 us 10 us Mark results on performance test record CHANNEL A START CHANNEL A I i p MEASURED T 1 9 CHANNEL B STOP 80 us e Press RESET button on HP 53284 Set Channels A and B slope switches to CHANNEL 8 4 SLOPE TEST Execute the following from the 9825A keyboard wrt 701 PF8G1S13A7 000 B7 000 R Model 5328A Maintenance Table 5 4 Performance Test Continued e Counter should display 20 us 10 us Mark results on performance test record CHANNEL A START CHANNEL A 14 MEASURE T I CHANNEL CHANNEL B STOP TEST Press RESET button 5328 and set both channels A and B to coupling e Execute the following from the 9825A keyboard wrt 701 PF8G1S13A37 000 B37 000 R e Counter should display 0 us and the GATE light should be off Both A and B cha
145. 8480 28480 28480 28480 01121 24546 01121 01121 24546 01121 12546 24546 24546 24546 24546 01121 24546 01121 24546 24546 24546 24546 24546 24546 01121 24546 01121 01121 32997 32997 01121 32997 32997 01121 01121 32997 01121 32997 24546 24546 24546 24546 24546 24546 24546 24546 01121 24546 24546 24546 24546 24546 24546 MFR PART NUMBER 1901 0179 1901 0179 1901 0179 1901 0179 1901 0179 1901 0179 1901 0179 1901 0179 1901 0179 1901 0179 1901 0179 1901 0179 1N827 1N827 1901 0040 1901 0040 1200 0548 2N5245 1855 0416 1855 0416 2N5245 1853 0020 1854 0071 1854 0071 1854 0071 CB6215 4 1 8 0 5111 2015 4315 4 1 8 0 3831 6215 C4 1 8 T0 1782 F 4 1 8 0 1472 4 1 8 0 1962 4 1 8 0 2152 4 1 8 0 1622 2015 4 1 8 0 3481 4315 4 1 8 0 1782 4 1 8 0 1472 4 1 8 0 1962 C4 1 8 T0 2152 F 4 1 8 0 1622 C4 1 8 T0 3481 F CB1015 C4 1 8 T03831 F CB1025 CB1055 3009P 1 102 3009P 1 102 CB1035 3009P 1 203 3009P 1 203 CB1025 CB1055 3009P 1 102 CB1015 3009P 1 102 C4 1 8 T0 3481 F C4 1 8 T0 1782 F 4 1 8 0 1472 4 1 8 0 1962 4 1 8 0 2152 4 1 8 0 1622 4 1 8 0 3831 4 1 8 0 3481 4315 4 1 8 0 5111 4 1 8 0 1782 4 1 8 0 1472 4 1 8 0 1962 4 1 8 0 2152 4 1 8 0 1622 MODE
146. 8480 28480 28480 56289 MFR PART NUMBER 312002 312002 9100 3017 9100 3017 9100 3139 X45H281 D44H5 1853 0326 5 001 1854 0492 1853 0016 45 281 D44H5 1854 0492 1853 0016 D44H5 0761 0026 0761 0026 CB1015 CB1015 CB1025 CB1025 CB6815 CB6815 0698 3620 0698 3620 CB8245 CB1055 CB4725 CB1025 CB1025 4 1 8 0 3162 4 1 8 0 1621 4 1 8 0 3322 1025 1025 1025 1025 4 1 8 0 2001 4 1 8 0 2001 4 1 8 0 1001 4 1 8 0 1001 82PR10K 4 1 8 0 1001 4725 1135 2715 BW20 1 3 4 J 0811 1340 0811 1340 CB1025 CB1025 SN72311P SN72311P LM301AN LM301AN 723PC 2110 0269 2110 0269 1251 3240 1251 3246 1251 3246 1251 3246 1251 3246 05328 60027 10544 60011 150D156X9020B2 0160 0576 0160 3877 0160 0576 150D685X9035B2 MODEL 5328A REPLACEABLE PARTS TABLE 6 1 REPLACEABLE PARTS REFERENCE DESIGNATION A3C6 A3C7 A3C9 A3C10 A3C11 A3C12 A3C13 A3C14 A3C15 A3C16 A3C17 A3C18 A3C19 A3CR1 A3CR2 A3CR3 A3L1 A3L2 A3L3 A3L4 A3Q1 A3Q2 A303 A3R1 A3R2 5 6 A3R7 A3R8 9 A3R10 A3R11 A3R12 A3R13 A3R14 A3R15 A3R16 A3R17 A3R18 A3R19 A3U1 A3U2 A3U3 A3U4 A3U5 A3W1 A4 A4C1 A4C2 A4C3 A4C4 A4C5 A4C6 A4C7 A4C8 A4C9 A4C10 HP PART NUMBER 0160 0576 0160 3876 0160 2055 0160 2055 0140 0221 gt Q 0121 0180
147. 9 A2R20 A2R21 A2R22 A2R23 A2R24 A2R25 A2R26 A2R27 A2R28 A2R29 A2R30 A2R31 A2R32 A2R33 A2R34 A2R35 A2R36 A2R37 2 1 A2U2 A2U3 A2U4 A2U5 A2XF1 A2XF2 2 1 2 2 2 7 2 6 2 011 1 A3C1 A3C2 A3C3 A3C4 A3C5 HP PART NUMBER 2110 0002 9 2110 0002 9 9100 3017 8 9100 3017 9100 3139 00 1853 0363 1854 0635 1853 0326 1854 0634 1854 0492 O 00 W 00 1853 0016 1853 0363 1854 0635 1854 0492 1853 0016 OY 00 00 1854 0635 o 0761 0026 0761 0026 0683 1015 0683 1015 0683 1025 O obama 0683 1025 0683 6815 0683 6815 0698 3620 0698 3620 uo 0683 8245 0683 1055 0683 4725 0683 1025 0683 1025 N O1 to 0698 3160 0757 0428 0757 0454 0683 1025 0683 1025 Qo Q 0683 1025 0683 1025 0757 0283 0757 0283 0757 0280 to 0757 0280 2100 1738 0757 0280 0683 4725 0683 1135 NON 0683 2715 0811 3050 7 D 0811 1340 4 0811 1340 4 0683 1025 9 0683 1025 o 1826 0065 1826 0065 1820 0477 1820 0477 1820 0439 on oo 2110 0269 2110 0269 oo 1251 3246 1251 3246 1251 3246 1251 3246 1251 3246 05328 60027 10544 60011 0180 1746 0160 0576 0160 3877 0160 0576 0180 0116 Ur Or Oro CONTINUED QTY m DESCRIPTION FUSE 2A 250V FAST BLO 1 25X 25 UL IEC FUSE 2A 250V FAST BLO 1 25X 25 UL IEC IND
148. A CONTROLLER COMPUTER HP 9825A FUNCTION GENERATOR HP 3312A NATIONAL NATO STOCK NUMBER 5180 00 064 5178 5180 00 605 0079 4931 00 113 2943 6625 00 113 3491 6625 00 566 3067 4931 00 491 0261 4931 00 491 0262 4931 00 491 0265 6625 01 010 3524 6625 00 487 2878 6625 01 010 9255 5999 00 757 7042 6625 00 159 2263 TOOL NUMBER SECTION 5 5 BY REPLACEMENT OF CIRCUIT CARD ASSEMBLIES A2 A6 AB 10 All 12 A15 A16 AND 19 OSCILLATOR A3 AND CHASSIS MOUNTED COMPONENTS BY REPLACEMENT OF INDIVIDUAL COMPONENTS 0 5 Order of the Secretary of the Army Official J C PENNINGTON Brigadier General United States Army The Adjutant General Distribution Active Army HISA Ft Monmouth 26 USAINSCOM 2 COE 1 TSG 1 USASRENBD 1 DARCOM 1 TRADOC 2 OS Maj Cmd 4 TECOM 2 USAIS 2 USAES 2 NG None USAR None For explanation of abbreviations used see AR 310 50 BERNARD W ROGERS General United States Army Chief of Staff USAICS 3 MAAG 1 USARMIS 1 USAERDAA 1 USA ERDAW 1 Ft Gordon 10 Ft Hauchuca 10 Ft Carson 5 Army Dep 1 except LBAD 14 SAAD 30 TOAD 14 SHAD 3 Ft Gillem 10 USA Dep 1 Sig Sec USA Dep 1 Ft Richardson CERCOM Ofc 2 Units org under fol TOE 29 207 2 29 610 2 0 4 U S GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE 1995 0 394 268 TEAR ALONG DOTTED LINE ym
149. A FREQ C Indicates frequency resolution in Hz PERIOD A T I A to Indicates the factor N by which time base is scaled Maximum resolution occurs with N 1 Indicates number of time intervals or periods over which the average measurement is made PERIOD AVG A AVG A to B RATIO B A RATIO C A Indicates the number of counts at the A inputover which the ratio measurement is made Resolution improves with increasing N Model 5328A Operation 3 10 3 40 Input Channel Section 3 41 Two separate inputs are provided on the right side of the panel The A and B inputs are identical in specification and identical controls are provided for each input to allow maximum versatility and accuracy 3 42 HP IB PROGRAMMABLE INPUT CONTROLS In COM A position the output of the Channel B attenutor is disconnected The output of the Channel A attenuator is routed to the A and B input amplifiers as shown in Figure 3 8 In COM A the Channel B AC DC X1 X10 X100 Attenuator relays are disabled The Channel A AC DC X1 X10 X100 Attenuator determine the coupling for the Channel B amplifier LEVEL A SLOPE SELECT CHANNEL A MULTI LEVEL B PLEXER SLOPE gt L T SEP COM A MER CHANNEL REUAY The invert A B function is implemented within the multiplexer Figure 3 8 Programmable Input Switch Configuration for COM A 3 43 The A and B input amplifiers have independent LEVEL and SLOPE controls regardless of the mode o
150. A10J3 Pin 10 Low COM A A10J3 Pin 10 High 5 49 Remote Mode Troubleshooting 5 50 The following information includes Programming Logic Troubleshooting and DAC Troubleshooting These areas will help isolate remote operation problems where A and B input channels operate correctly in local control 5 41 Model 5328A Maintenance 5 51 Programming Logic Troubleshooting includes Tables 5 12 and 5 13 Table 5 12 Program Interface Operation shows the necessary levels that the A10 must generate in any function Input and Output codes for ROM A10U7 are contained in Table 5 13 5 52 DAC Troubleshooting includes a checkout procedure that does not require a programming source Table 5 14 DAC Logic Levels gives the required logic output levels for proper operation The information in Table 5 15 DAC Signals is designed to aid in troubleshooting It should be used to troubleshoot problems where the logic levels are correct yet the analog output is bad 5 53 DAC TROUBLESHOOTING To perform DAC troubleshooting proceed as follows a Check 5 5 2 15 and 15 volts on the A1 Motherboard refer to A1 troubleshooting procedure for repair b Check for clock signal on U5 pins 8 and 11 and on collector of Q7 If incorrect suspect U5 Q7 or C12 c Perform the following setup procedure 1 Turn 5328A power off and unplug 14 conductor cable from A11J1 2 Remove DAC board A11 from 5328A and install jumpers in J1 from pins 8 to 10 5 to 6 4 to
151. AMP TEST LSWL p 10 R48 RAA 10 10 SAMPLE RATE SRT 122540 BUS LINE 3 4 35 35 5 7T o 6 37 5 36 5 36 I8 TO 2 TO AlU4 13 4 WIRE JUMPER TO C AMPLIFIER a T 24 Alu4 9 AND AIU39 15 Z 54 TABLE RESOLUTIO 0 IMH2 1 0 IMHZC10 1005 10 2 107 10005 IKHZC10 IMS 0 IKHZC10 015 10MS 0 10 2 10 15 100M 1 1 2 0 0 SWITCH S4 SHOWN IN THIS POSITION 53 TABLE FUNCTION FREQ A PER A PER AVG A RATIO B A TI 8 TI AVG 8 RATIO C A ITCH S3 SHOWN IN THIS POSITION 0 0 9 I 5 VIA AIXA16 SAME PIN NUMBERS NOTES 1 REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS WITHIN THIS ASSEMBLY ARE ABBREVIATED ADD ASSEMBLY NUMBER TO ABBREVIATION FOR COMPLETE DESCRIPTION 2 UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED RESISTANCE IN OHMS CAPACITANCE IN FARADS INDUCTANCE IN HENRIES 3 ASTERISK INDICATES SELECTED COMPONENT AVERAGE VALUES SHOWN Figure 8 24 AIG Display Schematic and Components Model 5328 Schematic Diagrams ALS SWITCH CONTROL ASSY 08326 80050 SERIES 1736 e B e M u NOTES FROM Ai
152. B TBSB TBS Code C TBSC TI TI Table 8 1 Signal Mnemonics Continued MNEMONIC DESCRIPTION 100 MHz oscillator ECL levels Overflow TTL active low indicates display overflow ROM bit Used to recognize period and institute hysteresis compensation TTL level Latched ROM bit TTL level enables channel C to strobe its digit onto the bus Latched ROM bit High for time interval average TTL level Latched ROM bit Enables DVM to strobe a minus sign on the display or blank characters TTL level Latched ROM bit TTL level low in time interval or period measurement Latched ROM bit TTL level used to recognize period average Latched ROM bit which turns hysteresis compensation on and has a time interval as opposed to a period measurement made by the Time Interval unit TTL level The charge node line that controls the sample rate speed Latched ROM bits that drive Time Base select code inputs TTL signal that drives Time Base Time Base scaled output TTL levels Time Base code input to ROM controlled by the Time Base switch TTL levels Time interval Output of Time Interval module used in time interval measurements ECL levels Model 5328A Schematic Diagrams A10R1 S1 1954 1956 2 1957 A19J3 Figure 8 2 5328A Front View A15S1 14 6 1 2 Figure 8 3 5328A Rear View Model 5328A Schematic Diagrams PAR PHAR A re 2 T sa AAA ma 8 8 O b n
153. CHING 30V 50MA 2NS DO 35 SOCKET IC 14 CONT DIP SLDR RELAY RED 2C 50MA 28VDC 5VDC COIL 3VA RELAY REED SPST NO 5VDC COIL RELAY REED SPST NO 5VDC COIL SAME AS K2 SAME AS K3 SAME AS K2 SAME AS K2 SAME AS K2 SAME AS K2 SAME AS K2 SAME AS K3 COIL MLD 1MH 10 Q 30 0950X 25LG NOM COIL MLD 1MH 10 Q 30 095DX 25LG NOM COIL MLD 12UH 12UH 10 Q 65 155DX 375LG NOM COIL MLD 12UH 105 Q 65 155DX 375LG NOM TRANSISTOR NPN SI PD 300MW FT 200MHZ TRANSISTOR JFET DUAL 2N5912 N CHAN TRANSISTOR JFET DUAL 2N5912 N CHAN RESISTOR 10K 10 125W CC TC 350 857 RESISTOR 10K 10 125W CC TC 350 857 NETWORK RES 8 PIN SIP 125 PIN SPCG RESISTOR 3 9K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 4 7K 5 125W CC TC 350 857 SEE INTRODUCTION TO THIS SECTION FOR ORDERING INFORMATION CODE 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 51642 28480 51642 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 51642 51642 28480 72136 72136 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 17856 17856 01121 01121 28480 01121 01121 MFR PART NUMBER 0160 0128 0180 0428 0180 0428 0160 3879 0160 0576 0160 0576 0160 3879 0180 0415 0180 0428 0180 0428 0160 3876 200 500 X7P 471M
154. Channel B MARKER OUTPUT is the correct frequency as read by counter No 2 Adjust the 5328A LEVEL B control as necessary to achieve a stable display Mark results on performance test record b 10 MHz to 100 MHz Setup HP 3406A HP 5328A nm HP 5328A BROADBAND INPUT B MARKER UNIVERSAL SAMPLING 1MQ OUTPUT COUNTER SWEEPER VOLTMETER 5 6 Model 5328A Maintenance Table 5 4 Performance Test Continued 1 DC coupled 10 MHz to 100 MHz e Set Counter No 1 HP 5328A to DC coupling B channel Set the 8601A for an output level of 15 mV rms as measured on the 3406A RF voltmeter Vary the 8601A s frequency from 10 MHz to 35 MHz and verify that the 5328A Channel B MARKER OUTPUT is the correct frequency as read by counter No 2 Increase the 8601A output level to 50 mV rms and vary the frequency from 35 MHz to 100 MHz Counter No 2 must continue displaying the correct input frequency Adjust the 5328A LEVEL B control as necessary to achieve a stable display Mark results on performance test record 2 AC coupled 10 MHz to 100 MHz e Set Counter No 1 HP 5328A to DC coupling B channel e Set the 8601A for an output level of 15 mV and repeat part 2 of step 1 above 3 SENSITIVITY Channel C Specification 15 mV rms 30 MHz 500MHz Description A signal generator covering the frequency range from 30 MHz to 500 MHz is set to the specified channel C 5328A signal sensitivity level and varied over the specified f
155. E DESCRIPTION JACKS ARE THE STATIONARY CONNECTORS AND PLUGS ARE THE MORE MOVEABLE OF TWO CONNECTORS ASSEMBLY ABBREVIATION COMPLETE DESCRIPTION A25 25 1 A25A1 25 1 1 NO PREFIX J3 J3 Assembly Sth No Assembly Series No Assembly Assembly fincludes A25A1 used to document Number Name Assembly chenges oO oe pr ars A25 POWER SUPPLY_ASSY 05190 6007 SERIES 330 12 mounted on Rectifier AI RECTIFIER ASSY 43 not mounted Assembly A25 Assembly 90510076050 on Assembly A25 Numbers indicate Part of A25 ATA Pins of J2 N J2 WHT ORN GY RED 33 7 Gy 14 ASPIG C 1245 0 6 3V supplied 3 from J3 to Pin 6 Thanaforiner A of Pl on Terminal Assembly AS Numbers Figure 8 1 Schematic Diagram Notes Model 5328A Schematic Diagrams Table 8 1 Signal Mnemonics MNEMONIC DESCRIPTION Output of Time Interval Unit A channel ECL levels gt gt gt Non latched ROM bits that drive Arming Multiplexer select lines on Function Selector TTL levels gt Output of Time Interval Unit B channel ECL levels Output of C module the carry input for the FS decade ECL levels Active high TTL line used for module C arming measurement OO ww gt Clock Digit address clock to display TTL levels TTL 4 bit BCD code Data going to display and TTL 4 bit digit address code Controls interchange of data Frequency line counted by Fu
156. E PARTS CONTINUED REFERENCE HP PART QTY DESCRIPTION MFR MFR PART NUMBER DESIGNATION NUMBER CODE 10 6 0683 2025 1 RESISTOR 2K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 01121 CB2025 10 7 0683 2225 3 3 RESISTOR 2 2K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 01121 CB2225 A10R8 0683 4725 2 9 RESISTOR 4 7K 5 25W TC 400 700 01121 CB4725 10 9 0683 5115 6 RESISTOR 510 5 250 TC 400 600 01121 5115 A10R10 0683 3025 3 3 RESISTOR 3K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 01121 CB3025 A10R11 0683 1815 5 RESISTOR 180 5 25W FC TC 400 600 01121 CB1815 A10R12 0683 5115 6 RESISTOR 510 5 25W FC TC 400 600 01121 CB5115 A1OR13 0683 9115 4 2 RESISTOR 910 5 25W FC TC 400 600 01121 CB9115 A10R14 1810 0080 6 NETWORK RES 8 PIN SIP 125 PIN SPCG 28480 1810 0080 A1OR15 0683 9115 4 RESISTOR 910 5 25W FC TC 400 600 01121 CB9115 A10R16 1810 0080 6 NETWORK RES 8 PIN SIP 125 PIN SPCG 28480 1810 0080 A1OR17 0683 5115 6 RESISTOR 510 5 25W FC TC 400 600 01121 5115 A10R18 0683 2025 1 RESISTOR 2K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 01121 CB2025 Al0R19 0683 2025 1 RESISTOR 2K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 01121 CB2025 A10R20 0683 5115 6 RESISTOR 510 5 25W FC TC 400 600 01121 CB5115 A10R21 0683 2225 3 RESISTOR 2 2K 5 25W TC 400 700 01121 CB2225 A10R22 1810 0080 6 NETWORK RES 8 PIN SIP 125 PIN SPCG 28480 1810 0080 A10R23 0683 2225 3 RESISTOR 2 2K 5 25W TC 400 700 01121 CB2225 A10R24 0683 1035 1 RESISTOR 10K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 01121 CB1035 A10R25 0683 1035 1 RESISTOR 10K 5
157. ENT 5 6 Test equipment recommended for maintaining and checking performance is listed in Table 5 2 Test equipment having equivalent characteristics may T mU for the equip ment listed Required test equipment is listed in Appendix D Maintenance Allocation 5 7 ASSEMBLY CONNECTION IDENTIFICATION 5 8 Throughout the manual connections to printed circuit assemblies are referred to in ab breviated form For example connection to A4 pin 10 is A4 10 Table 5 1 5328A Assembly Identification aei Main Motherboard 05328 60028 Power Supply 05328 60035 Oscillator Support Holds 10544A Oscillator 05328 60027 Oscillator 10544A 10544 60011 Function Selector 05328 60005 Not used Not used Not used Channel Input 05328 60032 Not used Synchronizer 05328 60020 Digital to Analog Converter 05328 60023 A B Channel Input 05328 60031 Not used Not used Interface 05328 60019 Display 05328 60026 Not used Not used Switch Attenuator 05328 60030 Model 5328A Maintenance 5 2 Table 5 2 Recommended Test Equipment Required Characteristics Frequency Standard 1 MHz Output HP 107AR Oscilloscope 50 MHz Bandwidth HP 180A Vertical Plug in 50 mV cm Sensitivity HP 1801A Time Base Plug In 50 MHz Bandwidth HP 1820A 1 GHz Sampler 1 GHz Bandwidth HP 1810A Test Oscillator VHF Signal Generator HP 651B HP 608E HP 5381A HP 3490 HP 970A HP 400F
158. ERIAL IN IC SHF RGTR CMOS D TYPE SERIAL IN CABLE ASSEMBLY RF A amp B INPUT CABLE COAX 50 OHM 29PF FT TERMINALTION COAX CA CRP CLP COAX CA FEM CONNECTOR RF FEM SGL HOLE RR 50 CONTACT RF CONN BNC TNCIFEMC CTR BUSHING RF CONN BNC TNCI FOR INTL SLEEVE RF CONN SER BNC TNC NUT RF CONN BNC TNCI CLAMP NUT FOR CABLE ASSEMBLY RF A amp B INPUT CABLE COAX 50 OHM 29F FT TERMINATION COAX CA CRP CLP COAX CA FEM CONNECTOR RF BNC FEM SGL HOLE RR 50 OHM CONTACT RF CONN BNC TNCIFEM CTR BUSHING RF CONN BNC TNCI FOR INTL SLEVE RF CONN SER BNC TNC NUT RF CONN BNC TNCI CLAMP NUT FOR 11 MISCELLANEOUS TERMINAL STUD FKD TUR SWGFRM MTG EXTRACTOR PC BOARD BLK POLYC A amp B CHANNEL INPUT CAPACITOR FXD 01UF 20 100VDC CER CAPACITOR FXD 01UF 20 100VDC CER CAPACITOR FXD 01UF 20 100VDC CER CAPACITOR FXD 01UF 20 100VDC CER CAPACITOR FXD 01UF 20 100VDC CER CAPACITOR FXD 01UF 20 100VDC CER CAPACITOR FXD 01UF 20 100VDC CER CAPACITOR FXD 01UF 20 100VDC CER CAPACITOR FXD 01UF 20 100VDC CER CAPACITOR FXD 2 2UF 20 50VDC CER SEE INTRODUCTION TO THIS SECTION FOR ORDERING INFORMATION CODE 01121 24546 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 24546 01121 01121 24546 01121 01121 24546 01121 28480 01121 01121 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 04713 01295 18324 04713 01295 18324 01925 04713 04713 04713 01928 04713 04713 04713 01928 01928 28480 28480
159. FF RVT ON 75 IN LG 6 32THD CONNECTOR RF SMC M PC 50 OHM CONNECTOR PC EDGE 15 CONT ROW 2ROWS WIRE 22AWG W PVC 1X22 80C FUNCTION SELECTOR NOT ASSIGNED CAPACITOR FXD 01UF 20 100VDC CER CAPACITOR FXD 1UF 20 50VDC CER CAPACITOR FXD 80PF 2 300VDC MICA CAPACITOR FXD 80PF 2 300VDC MICA CAPACITOR FXD 01UF 80 20 100VDC CER CAPACITOR FXD 3 3UF 20 15VDC TA CAPACITOR FXD 01UF 80 20 100VDC CER CAPACITOR FXD 3 3UF 20 15VDC TA CAPACITOR FXD 01UF 80 20 100VDC CER SEE INTRODUCTION TO THIS SECTION FOR ORDERING INFORMATION CODE 28480 28480 28480 28480 72136 52763 72136 28480 52763 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 02114 28480 28480 04713 04713 28480 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 24546 24546 01121 01121 01121 28480 02111 01121 01121 01121 01121 24546 01295 01295 07263 04913 04713 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 24931 24931 28480 24931 0000 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28460 72136 72136 28480 56289 28480 56289 28480 MFR PART NUMBER 0160 0576 0160 3876 0160 2055 0160 2055 DM15F221F0300WV1C 304324 15 60PF N1500 DM15F221F0300WV1C 0160 3875 304324 15 60PF N1500 0160 3456 0160 2055 0160 2055 0160 0576 1902 0579 1901 0040 1901 0040 9140 0131 VK200 20 48 9140 0096 9140 0096 SPS 3611 SPS 3611 1853 0036 CB1025 CB1025 CB1225 CB1035 CB47G5 C4 1 8 T0 5621 F 4 1 8 0 6811 4 71
160. GOSC CLK GOSC TBO CLK NOTES t ROM makes A into period gate time CA CARM 5 30 5 37 HP IB VERIFICATION USING THE HP9825A 5 38 The following program checks the 5328AF 096 H42 for proper operation on the HP IB The program is designed to operate with the 5328AF 096 H42 connected to a HP9825A Desktop Computer as a controller Model 5328A Maintenance 5 39 To perform the verification connect the 5328AF 096 H42 as shown in Figure 5 6 and set the rear panel address switches to decimal equivalent one 98034A HP IB Interface 9825A 5328A address switches ADDRESSABLE uwa A5 A4 A2 1 TALK A MEM Address Switches Address 01 9825A should have either the 98213A General 1 O Extended 1 ROM or the 98214A Plotter General 1 1 ROM Figure 5 6 System Configuration 5 40 The program listed in Table 5 7 may be keyed into the 9825A or may be loaded from an HP IB Verification cassette HP P N 59300 10001 Revision E or later which also contains HP IB verification programs for the 59300 series of instruments To run the program on the cassette insert the cassette into the 9825A Load file 0 and press RUN Enter 5328 when the instrument model number is requested The 9825A will then load into memory the 5328A verification program 5 41 The 5328A HP IB Verification Program goes through 17 check points The information in Table 5 8 B C
161. HEN JOT DOWN THE DOPE ABOUT IT ON THIS FORM TEAR IT OUT FOLD IT AND DROP IT IN THE MAIL TITLE DATE TM _ TM 11 6625 29L1 UMP 28 Mar 79 BE EXACT PIN POINT WHERE IT I THIS SPACE TELL WHAT 15 WRONG Paor PARA TABLE AND WHAT SHOULD BE DONE ABOUT 17 GRAPH AN DA 065 2028 2 P s 1F YOUR QUTEIT WANTS TO KNOW A BOUT YOUR ANUAL PUBLICATION NUMBER A owe ALONO DOTTED LINE e lt lt s s s s s m w FILL IN YOUR UNIT S ADDRESS DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY OFFICIAL BUSINESS PENALTY POR PRIVATE USE 9300 FOLO BACK AND FEES PAID DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY DOO 314 Commander US Army Communications and Electronics Materiel Readiness Command ATTN DRSEL ME MQ Fort Monmouth New Jersey 07703 Y c c u s MP qu a a oe FOLO BACK SY3L Y PIN 038245 000
162. Hz 10 MHz ac Sensitivity Channel 1 10 MHz 100 MHz dc 2 10 MHz 100 MHz ac Sensitivity Channel C 30 MHz 500 MHz period and period Average 1 0 usec display Approximately 999 9XXX nsec display with 0 1 psec resolution 5 17A Model 5328A Maintenance PERFORMANCE CHECK TEST CARD 5328A Date TEST DESCRIPTION 5 RATIO B A 1 000 display RATIO C A 1 000 display 6 TIME INTERVAL AND TIME INTERVAL AVERAGE A B 0 5 usec display TI AVG A B to 500 XXXX nsec display TI AVG to 500 XXXX nsec display 7 GATE MARKER OUT AND SAMPLE RATE 8 REMOTE PROGRAMMING SLOPE TEST 4 SLOPE TEST AC DC TEST SEP COM A TEST INVERT TEST ATTEN TEST 1 ATTEN X1 Test 2 ATTEN X10 Test 3 ATTEN X100 Test Trigger Level Test 5 17B Model 5328A Maintenance 5 22 ADJUSTMENTS 5 23 Adjustment procedures are provided for the oscillator and for the time interval unit sensitivity The adjustments should not be done unless a Atrouble has been repaired which would affect these values b The instrument does not meet all specifications while performing the check in Table 5 4 Performance Test or during periodic calibration 5 24 OSCILLATOR ADJUSTMENT Periodically the oscillator should be checked against a house standard When adjustment is required use the oscilloscope method shown in Figure 5 2 Using the appropriate sweep speed adjust the oscillator until the movement of the p
163. IAGRAM DESCRIPTION 4 108 the local mode the A19 Switch Control board generates TTL levels that control the A12 signal conditioning relays These levels allow front panel control of A and B channel input signal conditioning The A19 board accepts inverted A and B channel signals from the A12 board These signals are routed through pulse stretcher and driver circuits to the A and B chan nnel trigger LEDs located on the A19 board The inverted signals are also translated from ECL to TTL levels and supplied to the A and B marker outputs 4 109 Input circuitry for the A and B channels is on the A12 Amplifier board and part of the A10 Synchronizer board The A12 board contains the 100 MHz A and B channels with signal conditioning SLOPE AC DC ATTENUATORS SEP COM amplifiers and Schmitt triggers Signal conditioning circuitry is controlled by relays K1 through K12 synchronizing circuitry for period and time interval type measurements The A A B B TI Tl GOSC and GOSC outputs from the A10 board are routed to the A4 Function Selector 4 110 The programming interface section of A10 board is used to allow remote control of all input signal conditioning relays The A11 DAC board contains two identical DACs A and B channel that allow remote control of trigger levels The outputs of these DACs are supplied to a relay on the A12 board In remote the relay connects these DAC levels to the Schmitt trigger on the A12 board There are two modes of
164. IF 8344 _ _ 20 30K en 7 RE um M Te En ET aps rn ap ap cor l qa 1 1008 BUS 39 990 60 si n os FE io d i ca i 1 2 LDP BUS 41 DET R290 P 5 E hi 1 3 lt g 108 4 pneum an 2 3 LOVAL BUS 28 Song o FE j DG L I 4 FC BUS 36 XA16 5 L sae z aaa eu wien es QUALIF IER MULTIPLEXER 5 FD BUS 36 XA16 5 m omm QUA ac Uco B np 3 6 HRD BUS 33 nl 3 s ak i R29 20 E T 1 7 LRES BUS 32 VR d EHE LL Ht To IF ee 8 LTR BUS 31 XA4A 12 an BEN 2 ALGORITHMIC ate w 3 4 9 LINH BUS T is Ma wir in 30 Q9 00 LI f g BEBE MACHINE 8 016 jum CONUS cca eae 5 4102 to 10 TBSB BUS 35 24 8308 M NET y 4 2 TANE i oe 1 io 270 2 J 11 BUS 35 XA16 23 IA t a E if __ 12 FB BUS 37 16 7 CHASSIS 4285 R29R ou R18 8 1 4108 TIPLE 13 LARM XA4B 1 4
165. ILTOT FROM A U25 103 Pierre LL TO BUS LINE 58 13 RELST AIUESL44 oo FROM FROM A1U251 161 m _ 23 MAIN GATEE i Z w FROM MOE 23 MULTIPLEXER R29 q UBa FROM 0511168 ED Pinia ATI 4 a 9 2700 E PLANTEO TO BUS LINE r 9 5 m ET m A FROM AIU27191 FiBtr lt d 7 SL T BUS LINE T RA4B 519 I i 1 Bv Figure 8 12 4 Function Selector Schematic and Components 8 25 95 8 Yor gy 61 8 15 OVERLOAD INDICATOR OFFSET DC DRIFT COMPENSATE SIGNAL OUTPUT CARM TO FUNCTION DETECTER SELECTOR EECL FUNCTION OVERLOAD MECL C SELECTOR DETECTOR U3 E LIMITER MPLXR o VOLTAGE A a CONTROLLED 2 ES CURRENT SOURCE MAIN GATE _ a m sl NS STROBE MOTHERBOA SELECTOR EECL OTHERBOARD CIRCUITRY suueasSeicj 2 W8CES 2POW Model 5328A Schematte Diagrams
166. Input Output DIO lines 2 through 5 and the address switch S1 settings When a comparison occurs between the state of these DIO lines and the address switch settings U2 sends qualifier ADDR to multiplexer U8 The TALK ALWAYS section of the address switch provides a means of setting U6 so that inter face is always addressed to talk 4 195 DATA OUTPUT The Data Output circuit outputs characters on the bus data lines Storage circuit U24 transfers outputs from the ROM to DIO lines 5 through 7 U15 selects data from either the ROM or the 5328A data bus and transfers it to DIO1 DIO4 The state of the not bit from ROM U22 13 through U21E determines the selection made by U15 A displayed digit is selected from the 5328A any other characters decimal point E carriage return exponent linefeed etc are selected from the ROM 4 196 ASM STORAGE The internal memory for the ASM operation is in ASM Storage circuits U19 U26 and U31B There are 17 information bits that can be set or cleared by these circuits This section also includes one shot U1 which outputs a 2 ms pulse LRST to ensure reliable 4 23 Model 5328A Theory of Operation 4 24 operation of the state control circuit U4 on the motherboard Diode CR3 ensures that LINH is low to inhibit the counter during the time that LRST is low 4 197 STROBE ENABLE DECODER Decoder 13 is a 4 to lo line decoder used to strobe the various storage latches Pins 1 14 and 15 are
167. K POINT 17 BUS COMMANDS LOCAL LOCKOUT 0 CE CLEAR SELECTED DEVICE GROWP EXECUTE TRIGGER SERTAL POLL STATUS EYTE 6 46e B1 G TO LOCAL EHO WF TEST Model 5328A Maintenance Table 5 7 Program Listing Gim 2c5 40 3Gsg WIO0EL5325AE 095 1342 FREQ COUNTER prt 5328AF 0S5 prt 5322A d42 soc 1 prt 8 PEsTS ss l prt CHECK POIST 1 rem 701 ort REMOTO 2 CHECK POINT l PRUOS2 COnNTINOE T Sstc if L l gto port CHECK PCING 2 70L PE lt G3S13R 0 5 reo 701 25 tiLCX C3pbeeossua 2 asp CHECK 2 55 CONTINUE if L 1 gtc 4 prt CHECK PCINI 3 RUSGLUTIGN 1 uggp ifmt 2 G f 0 E wrt 701 2 red 701 C prt X 1 X if X 8 3to 2 gto Looe Jsp CHECK POINT 3 PRESS CONTINUE beep stp if Lz1 gto 9 ort CHECK POINT 4 wrt 701 prt FREQ 2 asp CHECK POINT 4 PRESS CONTINUE ste if L l gto 4 prt CHECK PCINT 5 wrt 701 FSR Ert RATIO 2 dsp CHECK POINT 5 PRESS CONTINUE if L l gto 4 prt CHECK POINT 6 wrt 701 F6R prt PEFIOD A beep spc 2 dsp CHECK POINT 6 PRESS CONTINUE if L l gto 4 prt CHECK POINT 7 wrt 701 F7R prt PER AVG A
168. K4XLs BAMA This manual is provided FREE OF from the BoatAnchor Manual Archive as a service to the Boatanchor community was uploaded by someone who wanted to help you repair and maintain your equipment If you paid anyone other than BAMA for this manual you paid someone who is making a profit from the free labor of others without asking their permission You may pass on copies of this manual to anyone who needs it But do it without charge Thousands of files are available without charge from BAMA Visit us at http bama sbc edu TM 11 6625 2941 14 amp P TECHNICAL MANUAL OPERATOR S ORGANIZATIONAL DIRECT SUPPORT AND GENERAL SUPPORT MAINTENANCE MANUAL INCLUDING REPAIR PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS LIST FOR COUNTER ELECTRONIC DIGITAL READOUT AN USM 459 HEWLETT PACKARD MODEL 5328A E42 NSN 6625 01 061 8928 HEADQUARTERS DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY MARCH 1979 This manual contains copyright material reproduced by permission of the Hewlett Packard Company TM 11 6625 2941 14 P Technical Manual HEADQUARTERS DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY No 11 6625 2941 14 P Washington DC 28 March 1979 OPERATOR S ORGANIZATIONAL DIRECT SUPPORT AND GENERAL SUPPORT MAINTENANCE MANUAL INCLUDING REPAIR PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS LIST FOR COUNTER ELECTRONIC DIGITAL READOUT AN USM 459 HEWLETT PACKARD MODEL 5328A E42 NSN 6625 01 061 8928 REPORTING OF ERRORS You can improve this manual by recommending impro
169. L SELECTED DEVICE CLEAR SDC GROUP EXECUTE TRIGGER GET SERIAL POLL SPE SPD GO TO LOCAL GTL Check Point Test When the 9825A CONTINUE key is pressed verify that counter RMT annunciator is on When the 9825A CONTINUE key is again pressed verify Local Lockout by pressing front panel RESET button and ensuring counter doesn t go into Local operation RMT annunciator Off When the 9825A CONTINUE key is pressed verify that counter displays 10 000 MHz When the 9825A CONTINUE key is again pressed counter will reset to its Remote Program Initialize mode and display O When the 9825A CONTINUE key is pressed verify that counter displays 10 000 MHz When the 9825A CONTINUE key is again pressed counter will reset to its Remote Program Initialize mode and display O When the 9825A CONTINUE key is pressed verify that counter is in Hold Gate Light off When the 9825A CONTINUE key is pressed Gate Light should flash twice and counter should display 10 000 MHz When the 9825A CONTINUE key is pressed counter should display 0 0000000 MHz and GATE Light should go off Calculator should print STATUS BYTE 64 00 When the 9825A CONTINUE key is pressed verify that counter is in Local RMT annunciator off When 9825A CONTINUE key is again pressed counter will go into remote END OF TEST 0 4vdc Figure 5 9 Triangular Pulse Oserved in Steps 5 and 7 Table 5 8B Model 5328A Maintenance Table 5 9 5328A A1
170. L 5328A REPLACEABLE PARTS TABLE 6 1 REPLACEABLE PARTS REFERENCE DESIGNATION A11R34 A11R35 A11R36 A11R37 A11R38 A11R39 A11R40 A11R41 A11R42 A11R43 A11R44 A11R45 A11R46 A11R47 A11R48 A11R49 A11R50 Al1R51 11 1 11 2 11 3 11 4 11 5 11 6 1101 A11U2 A11U3 A11U4 11 5 A11U6 A11U7 A11U8 A11U9 A11U10 11011 A11U12 A11U13 A11U14 11 15 A11U16 A11W1 A11W2 A12 A12C1 A12C2 A12C3 A12C4 A12C5 A12C6 A12C7 A12C8 A12C9 A12C10 NUMBER 0683 2015 0698 3153 0683 6215 0683 4315 0683 2015 0683 6215 0683 1035 0757 0427 0683 1525 0683 1525 0757 0421 0683 1045 0683 1025 0757 0421 0683 1025 00 S 1810 0055 m 0683 2055 0683 2055 0360 0124 0360 0124 0360 0124 0360 0124 0360 0124 CO 0360 0124 n 1826 0059 1820 0693 1826 0161 1826 0059 1820 1425 ANION 1826 0161 1820 0976 1820 1265 1820 1265 1820 1265 1820 0976 1820 1265 1820 1265 1820 1265 1820 0976 1820 0976 05328 60111 8120 0229 1250 0834 1250 0870 1250 0952 1250 0957 1250 0960 1250 0964 Q ROO 05328 60111 8120 0229 1250 0834 1250 0870 1250 0952 1250 0957 1250 0960 1250 0964 Q BROW 0360 0065 1 4040 0748 3 05328 60031 0160 3879 0160 3879 0160 3879 0160 3879 0160 3879
171. LINE 8 INP IC RCVR ECL LINE RCVR QUAD 2 INP IC GATE ECL NOR QUAD 2 INP IC GATE TTL NOR QUAD 2 INP IC GATE TTL AND OR INV 2 INP A4 MISCELLANEOUS PIN GRV 062 IN DIA 25 IN LG STL EXTRACTOR PC BOARD YEL POLYC NOT ASSIGNED NOT ASSIGNED NOT ASSIGNED SEE INTRODUCTION TO THIS SECTION FOR ORDERING INFORMATION CODE 28480 72136 28480 28480 28480 72136 28480 04713 04713 04713 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 28480 28480 01121 01121 04713 04713 01295 01295 01295 04713 04713 04713 01295 01295 28480 28480 MFR PART NUMBER 0160 0342 DM15E600J0300WV1CR 0160 2055 0160 2055 0160 2055 DM15C150J0500WV1CR 0160 0153 SPS 3611 SPS 3611 SPS 3611 CB5115 CB1315 CB8205 CB5115 CB5115 CB2025 CB1815 CB2025 CB1815 CB2025 CB1815 CB2025 CB1815 CB1825 CB4315 CB1825 CB1815 CB1815 CB1825 CB8205 CB1315 CB1825 CB1825 CB1825 CB1035 CB4315 CB2715 CB3315 CB1825 CB1825 CB2725 CB2725 CB2725 CB1825 CB1815 CB8205 CB1315 CB5115 CB2715 CB2715 CB6815 CB1825 1810 0041 1810 0080 BB4315 CB1825 MC10231P MC10125L SN748112N SN74S112N SN74151AN MC10164L MC10115P MC10102P SN7402N SN7454N
172. O RL3 HDw 5 5 c 5 RL2 BIL 5 RL HOPN 6 cARM 6 MG 6 RL HTBH 8 7 A RLiLMGF 7 RL1 HEC B 5 1 RL TBA 9 9 R HTAA 3 19 TI To 10 FB 10 RLITBA 11 GOSC 11 GOSC 11 FA 11 RE CTBCH 12 LTR 15 GND 12 FD 12 RL IB 13 HRD FS osc 13 FC 13 RL LTOT 14 LDDCA 14 5 OSC 14 NC 14 15 GATE OUT 15 FDD 15 DATA C 15 DSC 16 GND 36 16 DATA D DS A 17 17 17 DATA A 17 DS D 18 Foo 18 18 DATA 18 DS SIGNAL SOURCE SIGNAL SOURCE 8 24 P O Figure 8 12 A4 Function Selector Assembly Model 5328A Schematic Dragrams BUS LINE DG gw E 5 Tx R42 MAIN j n ENERO FET 182 MOD gate FF S MET 6 3 su 1800 REFERENCE DESIGNATIOMS WIT Paid COMMON aciz ASSEMBLY ARE ABBREVIATED ASSEMBLY NUMBER ABBREVI 3 au 4 FOR COMPLETE DESCRIPTION 15 1 2 gt 2 UNLESS OTHERBASE INDICATED RESISTANCE IM OHMS GATE QUT CAPACITANCE IM FARADS FROM Plat it i INDULTANCE IM HEMRIES 1 RM HRTA 5 ASTERISK W INDICATES FROM 2 PIALI VALUE AVERAGE Yale SHOW FROM 39 18H
173. OTE LOCAL YES PRESS 53284 SET 53284 ADDRESS RESET BUTTON SWITCH TO IS REFER TO REMOTE LOCAL REMOTE TROUBLESHOOTING SETS 53284 TO REMOTE LIGHT ON FLOWCHART LISTEN MODE NO IS SET 5328A ADDRESS SUSPECT REMOTE 1 U2 SWITCH 4 LIGHT ON R31 SETS 53284 TO REMOTE LISTEN MODE 3unoousopgno1z HOLIMS SSTAAAY 1 9314 V8CES Model 5328A Replaceable Parts SECTION VI REPLACEABLE PARTS 6 1 INTRODUCTION 6 2 This section contains information for ordering replacement parts Table 6 7 lists parts in alphanumerical order of their reference designators and indicates the description and HP PART Number of each part together with any applicable notes The table includes the following information Description of part see abbreviations below b Typical manufacturer of the part in a five digit code see list of manufacturers Manufacturer s part number d Total quantity used in the instrument Qty column 6 3 ORDERING INFORMATION 6 4 To obtain replacement parts address order of inquiry to your local Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office see lists at rear of this manual for addresses Identify parts bv their Hewlett Packard part numbers Instrument model number b Instrument serial number c Description of the part d Function and location of the part REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS assembly micellaneous electrical P ele
174. Operation 4 12 4 87 15V FAN POWER The 15V supply is a simple linear regulator using transistor Q7 as the pass transistor Transistor Q2 provides level shifting and current gain while U3 is used as comparator and gain block The 5328A cooling fan motor receives power from A20 A20 is a sealed unit which produces an alternating current from 15 volts input 4 88 The 3 5V supply is also a simple linear regulator with the operational amplifier section of U5 being used as a comparator and gain block Resistor R32 provides overcurrent limiting to protect against shorts 4 89 A4 FUNCTION SELECTOR 4 90 The A4 Function Selector serves as the main high speed switching module of the 5328A It receives high speed differential ECL data from the Main Bus from the modules that process the signal input and routes that data to either the Time Base or the DCA In addition the Main Gate FF the Arming Multiplexer and Arming FF and the First Decade of the DCA are on the A4 Function Selector assembly NOTE Refer tol Table 8 1 for definitions of mnemonics 4 91 High Speed Multiplexer Main Gate and 1st Decade 4 92 High speed multiplexer U6 serves as the main multiplexer and routes the following signals to the 1st decade of the DCA A B GATES OSC GOSC C DVM TIME BASE OUT TBO and OSCILLATOR OSC ROM lines IA IB and IC control the active address of the multiplexer Pin 2 enable of the multiplexer serves as the Main Gate The Low Time
175. Oscillator Support in turn plugs in the A1 Motherboard 4 71 A3 Oscillator Support 4 72 On the A3 Oscillator Support five separate functional circuits are provided a voltage regulator an external signal detector and amplifier multiplier a multiplexer and a 10 1 divider Integrated circuit U3 is a voltage regulator which regulates the 25 volt power at about 13 volts for the oscillator External signal detector U4C will detect if an external signal 1 5 or 10 MHz is applied to the 5328A rear panel EXT OSC IN connector and send a signal U4C 13 to control the U2 multiplexer If an external oscillator signal is applied the multiplexer selects the external signal for the 5328A time base If only the A3A1 10 MHz signal is available it is used for the time base U4A and B produce a 10 MHz output U4B 5 with either 1 5 or 10 MHz input The 1 10 MHz is divided to 1 MHz by 1 for the rear panel 1 MHz OUT connector NOTE The rear panel 10 MHz OUT and 1 MHz OUT are both always derived from the 10544A A3A1 Oscillator 4 73 A3A1 Oscillator HP 10544A 4 74 The oscillator specifications are given in Table 7 3 This oscillator is a factory serviced assembly No circuit description is given here 4 75 DECADE COUNTING ASSEMBLY DCA 4 76 The 5328A DCA is comprised of Decade Counter Latches U10 and U12 on the 1 Motherboard and U1A U3 and U4B on A4 Function Selector Board The Motherboard contains output enable circuitry
176. P FUSE 125 AMP 2110 0311 28480 4 LOCATION 5 USABLE ON CODE 6 7 QTY QUANTITY REQD RCVD APPENDIX D MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION Section D 1 General This appendix provides a summary of the main tenance operations for AN USM 459 It authorizes categories of maintenance for specific maintenance functions on repairable items and components and the tools and equipment required to perform each function This appendix may be used as an aid in planning maintenance operations D 2 Maintenance Function Maintenance functions will be limited to and defined as follows a Inspect To determine the serviceability of an item by comparing its physical mechanical and or electrical characteristics with established standards through examination b Test To verify serviceability and to detect in cipient failure by measuring the mechanical or elec trical characteristics of an item and comparing those characteristics with prescribed standards c Service Operations required periodically to keep an item in proper operating condition i e to clean decontaminate to preseve to drain to paint or to replenish fuel lubricants hydraulic fluids or compressed air supplies d Adjust To maintain within prescribed limits by bringing into proper or exact position or by set ting the operating characteristics to the specified parameters e Align To adjust specified variable elements of an item to bring about opti
177. PACITOR FXD 01UF 10 200VDC POLYE CAPACITOR FXD 60UF 20 6VDC TA FACTORY SELECTED PART CAPACITOR FXD 400PF 1 300VDC MICA CAPACITOR FXD 022UF 20 200VDC POLYE CAPACITOR FXD 1UF 20 50VDC TA CAPACITOR FXD 01UF 5 100VDC POLYE CAPACITOR FXD 1UF 20 50VDC TA CAPACITOR FXD 1000PF 10 200VDC POLYE CAPACITOR FXD 1UF 20 50VDC TA CAPACITOR FXD 60 20 6VDC TA CAPACITOR FXD 01UF 80 20 100VDC CER CAPACITOR FXD 3 3UF 20 15VDC TA CAPACITOR FXD 01UF 80 20 100VDC CER CAPACITOR FXD 3 3UF 20 15VDC TA CAPACITOR FXD 01UF 80 20 100VDC CER CAPACITOR FXD 01UF 80 20 100VDC CER CAPACITOR FXD 2 2UF 20 20VDC TA CAPACITOR FXD 01UF 80 20 100VDC CER CAPACITOR FXD 2 2UF 20 20VDC TA CAPACITOR FXD 01UF 80 20 100VDC CER CAPACITOR FXD 01UF 80 20 100VDC CER CAPACITOR FXD 3 3UF 20 15VDC TA CAPACITOR FXD 3 3UF 20 15VDC TA NOT ASSIGNED CAPACITOR FXD 2 2UF 20 20VDC TA CAPACITOR FXD 2 2UF 20 20VDC TA NOT ASSIGNED NOT ASSIGNED CAPACITOR FXD 2 2UF 20 20VDC TA CAPACITOR FXD 2 2UF 20 20VDC TA DIODE SWICHING 30V 50MA 2NS DO 35 DIODE GE 60V 60MA 1US DO 7 DIODE ZNR 12 7V 5 DO 7 PD 4W TC 061 DIODE SWITCHING 80V 200MA 2NS DO 35 DIODE SWITCHING 80V 200MA 2NS DO 35 DIODE SWITCHING 30V 50MA 2NS DO 35 DIODE ZNR 4 64V 5 DO 7 PD 4W TC 23 DIODE SWITCHING 30V 50MA 2NS DO 35 DIODE SWITCHING 30V 50MA 2NS DO 35 SIODE WITCHING 30V 50MA 2NS DO 35 DIODE SWITCHING 30V 50MA 2NS DO 35 DIODE SWITCHING 30V 50MA
178. PD 1W TC 009 DIODE SWITCHING 30V 50MA 2NS DO 35 DIODE SWITCHING 30V 50MA 2NS D0 35 COIL MLD 10MM 5 Q 80 24DX 74LG NOM CHOKE WIDE BAND ZMAX 680 OHM 180 MHZ COIL MLD 1UH 10 Q 50 155DX 375LG NOM COIL MLD 1UH 10 Q 50 155DX 375LG NOM TRANSISTOR NPN SI PD 350MW FT 300MHZ TRANSISTOR NPN SI PD 350MW FT 300MHZ TRANSISOTR PNP SI PD 310MW FT 250MHZ RESISTOR 1K 55 25W FC TC 400 600 RESISTOR 1K 55 25W FC TC 400 600 RESISTOR 1 2K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 10K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 4 7 5 25W FC TC 400 500 RESISTOR 5 62K 1 125W F TC 0 100 RESISTOR 6 81K 1 125W F TC 0 100 RESISTOR 470 5 25W FC TC 400 600 RESISTOR 100 5 25W FC TC 400 500 RESISTOR 10 5 25W FC TC 400 500 RESISTOR 250 5 5W PW TC 0 20 RESISTOR TRMR 10K 10 C SIDE ADJ 17 TRN RESISTOR 1K 5 25W FC TC 400 600 RESISTOR 10K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 10K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 RESISTOR 1K 55 25W FC TC 400 600 RESISTOR 17 8K 15 125W F TC 0 100 IC CNTR TTL LS DECD ASYNCHRO IC MUXR DATA SEL TTL LS 2 TO 1 LINE QUAD IC V RGLTR 14 DIP P IC XL TR ECL TTL ECL TO TTL QUAD 2 INP IC 78L05A V RGLTR TO 92 CABLE ASSEMBLY OSCILLATOR CABLE COAX 50 OHM 29PF FT TUBING HS 187 D 093 RCVD 02 WALL CONNECTOR RF SMC FEM UNMTD 50 OHM CONNECTOR RF BNC FEM SGL HOLE RR 50 OHM CONTACT RF CONN TNCIFEM CTR BUSHING RF CONN BNC TNCI FOR INTL SLEEVE RF CONN SER BNC TNC NUT RF CONN BNC TNCI CLAMP NUT FOR A3 MISCELLANEOUS STANDO
179. R50 A8R51 A8R52 A8R53 A8R54 A8R55 A8R56 A8R57 A8R58 A8R59 A8R60 A8R61 A8R62 A8R63 A8R64 A8R65 A8R66 A8R67 A8R68 A8R69 A8R70 A8R71 A8R72 A8R73 A8R74 NUMBER 0683 1035 0683 1215 0683 8215 0683 1035 0698 8354 0698 6283 0683 5615 2100 2522 0698 3378 0683 8205 0683 1125 0683 8215 0757 1001 0683 3015 0683 5125 0683 1215 0683 5135 0683 4715 0698 3378 0683 5125 0683 1125 0683 8205 0683 5105 0683 5615 0698 7080 0695 7080 0683 1125 0683 1125 0683 2025 0683 5105 0683 5105 0698 3378 0698 3111 0698 3378 0683 2025 0698 3378 0698 4131 0683 1215 0683 1815 0683 5105 0683 5105 0698 3378 0683 4715 0683 5125 0683 5125 0683 5135 0683 1215 0683 3315 0683 5615 0683 3015 0683 5125 0757 0965 0757 0959 0757 0924 0683 5105 0683 5105 0683 2215 0683 5105 0683 5105 0683 1815 0683 4705 0683 1025 0698 3378 0683 1025 0683 2005 0683 1025 0683 1025 0683 2005 0683 1025 1810 0080 CONTINUED Newer FO OFPBFPO m i o O 00 0 Q b BN WR o 1 0 0 QTY Oy N Q NN 11 DESCRIPTION RESISTOR 10K RESISTOR 120 RESISTOR 820 RESISTOR 10K RESISTOR 270 aaa Qn m RESISTOR 10 55 RESISTOR 560 55 25W TC 400 700 25 FC TC 400 600 25 FC TC 400 600 25 FC TC 400 700 125W CC TC 330 80
180. RESGS CONTLAUE 6 LOCAL LOCKUUL 751 er lt S135 38 10 u00 n4 7 PREJG 7 ort CLLAR ee DCL PRLES3 COd ibe 6 791 er lt S13G3k 10 0001 5122 72RLSS COGTIIGUE stp 721 ort SELECIZUL CLUAR isl board cora ae Tol er lt l 35038 La bobe erPRroS ZowiIaoU L stic wait 1000 7 Leeo w it 20090 7J1 tbeerswalt 1200 ort agen wrt eGQ00r EXECUTE TnhRiSScon SET PROSS COS1lauUf sto 701 rF G75125 791 A it ort 3sp ort rem dsp A 0 jtc 1 PULL SiATUS 2YTE A SERLAL pOLL PRESS CONTINUE sto 7 dgp IDUNITER 18 LCCAL PRESS CONTINUE str 50 TO LOCAL soc 2 121 POIN l 7 PRLSS CONTINUE sto if L l gto 17 hiu dsp Edu OF TEST prt end 17327 UNDO TES 5 Model 5328A Maintenance Check Point S SOONDOR om 5 42 Connect a functio oscilloscope as shown 5 36 FREQ A RATIO B A PERIOD A PER AVE A T I T I AVG A B FREQ RATIO C A SAMPLE RATE SINGLE MULTIPLE MEASMNT HP5328A Table 5 8A Program Description Observe on 5328A REMOTE CHECK RESOLUTION Front panel RMT annunciator should be on Counter should read 10 000 MHz The 9825A should print and counter display the 10 MHz check signal with resolutions from 0 1 Hz to 1 0 MHz Counter display shou
181. Reset storage registers U16 U15 U11 U10 by pulsing A11U10 14 with a logic pulser Using an oscilloscope check signals listed in line 1 of Table 5 15 j Pulse A11J1 14 and again using the oscilloscope check for signals in line 2 of Table 5 15 k Pulse A11J1 14 three more times stopping after each pulse to verify the next line in Table 5 15 with the oscilloscope Sets i through k have checked the A channel DAC signal path To check Channel B DAC follow steps i through k above pulsing A11J1 pin 13 instead of 14 Stop after each pulse to verify the locations in parentheses of m Refer to Table 5 16 match the symptom received with the probable cause of trouble 5 42 Model 5328A Maintenance Table 5 12 Program Interface Operation Code A10U7 Pins 1008 Pins A10U15 Pins A 1013 Pins A10U17 123456 45679 10 12 4567912 256789 10 11 12 13 14 8 DC 101000 1 A2B2 AC 001000 0 A5B5 gt 100000 1 1 4 4 000000 0 0 A7B7 X1 110000 1 A686 X10 010000 0 A1B1 X100 111000 1 1 A9B9 Inv 100100 1 A8B8 Sep Norm 000100 0 A 1B 1 DAC 111101 1 A B NORM 011110 0 NOTE If U7 is good and U8 is bad check for pulse one pins 9 and 10 of U16 for all commands and pins 6 and 7 for DAC command only Pulse will occur during execution of command Output Code A10U7 Pins A10U7 Pins 14 13 12 11 10 4 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
182. SCILLATOR INPUT INPUT A B e 50 2 50 2 TERMINATION Model 5328A Maintenance Table 5 4 Performance Test Continued e Set the 651B to 1 0 MHz and 500 mV rms e Set the 5328A Function switch to T I Freq Resolution N switch to 1 MHz 1 Level A and B to PRESET AC coupling on both channels X1 ATTEN on both channels COM A Set the Channel A SLOPE to and the Channel B SLOPE to Verify that the counter displays 0 5 us 0 25 us Mark results on performance test record Set 5328A Function switch to T I AVG and Freq Resolution N switch to 1 Hz 106 Verify that the counter displays 500 XXXX ns Mark results on performance test record e Change Channel A SLOPE to and Channel B SLOPE to Verify that the counter displays 500 XXXX ns Mark results on performance test record 7 GATE MARKER OUT AND SAMPLE RATE Setup GATE MARKER OUT FROM REAR PANEL HP 180 HP 5328A OSCILLOSCOPE e Set the 5328A to CHECK 1 kHz 103 Resolution e Observe the GATE MARKER OUT signal from the counter Vary the SAMPLE RATE control to full ccw The GATE MARKER OUT signal must be greater than 2 4 Vdc and the sample delay time during which GATE MARKER OUT is Low must be less than 2 msec Mark results on performance test record 5 10 Model 5328A Maintenance Table 5 4 Performance Test Continued 8 REMOTE PROGRAMMING TEST Setup HP 98034A HP 18 INTERFACE HP 9
183. SISTOR PNP SI PD 1W FT 50MHZ TRANSISTOR PNP 51 PD 1W FT 50MHZ TRANSISTOR NPN SI PD 350MW FT 250MHZ TRANSISTOR NPN SI PD 350MW FT 250MHZ TRANSISTOR NPN SI PD 350MW FT 250MHZ TRANSISTOR NPN SI PD 350MW FT 250MHZ TRANSISTOR NPN SI PD 350MW FT 250MHZ TRANSISTOR NPN SI PD 350MW FT 250MHZ TRANSISTOR NPN SI PD 350MW FT 250MHZ TRANSISTOR NPN SI PD 350MW FT 250MHZ TRANSISTOR NPN SI PD 350MW FT 250MHZ TRANSISTOR NPN SI PD 350MW FT 250MHZ TRANSISTOR NPN SI PD 350MW FT 250MHZ TRANSISTOR NPN SI PD 350MW FT 250MHZ RESISTOR 39 5 RESISTOR 39 5 RESISTOR 39 5 NETWORK RES 9 RESISTOR 10 5 5 25W TC 400 500 5 25W FC TC 400 500 5 25W FC TC 400 500 PIN SIP 15 PIN SPCG 5 25W FC TC 400 500 SEE INTRODUCTION TO THIS SECTION FOR ORDERING INFORMATION CODE 01295 28480 27014 01295 01295 07263 01295 27014 01295 01295 01295 07263 07263 27014 28480 00000 28480 28480 00000 28480 56289 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 01121 01121 01121 28480 01121 MFR PART NUMBER SN7404N 1818 2253 DM86L76N SN74L75N SN7400N 93L34PC SN7403N DM85L51N SN7400N SN7486N SN7474N 93L12PC 93L34PC DM85L51N 05328 60
184. STANCE IN is CAPACITANCE IN FARADSI q gt l1 INDUCTANCE IN a ASTERISK 9 DOICATES 200 SELECTED VALUES AVERAGE Y VALUES SHOWN Xr Sec SIONAL WNEMONICS ARE DEFINED IN TABLE Figure 8 7 Al Motherboard Schematic and Components Sheet 1 of 2 Model 35204 FUNCTION Schematic Diagrams BUS LINE SELFCTOR XA12 XAI3 NUMBER TO BUS XA4B XA6 XAT XABB XA9 X XA16 5 38 FD 058 Q M E s D8 ERRE E rJ 45 ADDRESS m x OSCILLATOR 055 A A T T 4 0 F DA el 4 0 1 z A E A 7 3 FROM DSA AAA ROM WEA m wa j p eue 8 35 2 TEUER D is Se miw p ep s 60 De cL La 5 De peri mm FROM A1UIS 6 xe per 41 LANN SRT 18 TBI pf pue rj agp To
185. The circuit draws approximately 16 mA out of pin 3 on each IC and adjusts the cur rent out of pin 6 between 28 and 56 mA until the voltage on pin 3 is approximately 600 to 900 mV on each IC 4 161 Resistors R1 R2 R4 and R82 and U9A comprise the offset voltage adjustment circuit This circuit also compensates for changes in input bias current into U1 to minimize drift in offset voltage 4 162 HP INTERFACE BUS THEORY 4 163 The HP Interface Bus transfers data and commands between the components of an instrumentation system on 16 signal lines The interface functions for each system component are performed within the component so only passive cabling is needed to connect the system The cables connect all instruments controllers and other components of the system in parallel to the signal lines 4 164 Eight of the lines 0101 0108 are reserved for the transfer of data and other messages in a byte serial bit parallel manner Data and message transfer is asynchronous coordinated by the three handshake lines DAV NRFD NDAC The other five lines are for control of bus activity 4 165 Devices connected to the bus may be talkers listeners or controllers The controller dictates the role of each of the other devices by setting the ATN attention line low and sending Model 5328A Theory of Operation talk or listen addresses on the data lines DIO1 DIO8 Addresses are set into each device at the time of system configuration eith
186. UCTOR FXD 300UH AT 5A DC INDUCTOR FXD 300UH AT 5A DC COIL 75UH 15 5DX 875LG NOM TRANSISTOR PNP SI PD 50W TRANSISTOR NPN SI PD 50W TRANSISTOR PNP SI PD 1W FT 50MHZ TRANSISTOR NPN SI PD 1W FT MHZ TRANSISTOR NPN SI PD 250MHZ TRANSISTOR PNP SI TO 92 PD 300MW TRANSISTOR PNP SI PD 50W TRANSISTOR NPN SI PF 50W TRANSISTOR NPN SI PD 350MW FT 250MHZ TRANSISTOR PNP SI TO 92 PD 300MW TRANSISTOR NPN SI PD 50W RESISTOR 220 RESISTOR 220 5 1W MO TC 0 200 5 RESISTOR 100 5 5 1W MO TC 0 200 25W FC TC 400 500 25W FC TC 400 500 25W FC TC 400 600 oe oe RESISTOR 100 RESISTOR 1 5 RESISTOR 1K 5 RESISTOR 680 5 RESISTOR 680 5 RESISTOR 100 5 RESISTOR 100 5 RESISTOR 820K 5 RESISTOR 1M 5 RESISTOR 4 7K 5 RESISTOR 1K 5 RESISTOR 1K 5 RESISTOR 31 6K 1 RESISTOR 1 62K 1 RESISTOR 33 2K 1 RESISTOR 4K 5 RESISTOR 1K 5 RESISTOR 1K 5 RESISTOR 1K 5 RESISTOR 2K 1 RESISTOR 2K 1 RESISTOR 1K 1 RESISTOR 1K 1 RESISTOR TRMR 10 RESISTOR 1K 1 RESISTOR 4 7K 5 RESISTOR 11K 5 RESISTOR 270 5 RESISTOR 75 5 NOT ASSIGNED 25W FC TC 400 600 25W FC TC 400 600 25W FC TC 400 600 2W MO 0 200 2W MO 0 200 25W FC TC 800 4900 25W FC TC 800 900 25W TC 400 700 25W FC TC 400 600 25W FC TC 400 600 125W F TC 0 100 125W F TC 0 100 125W F TC 0 100 25W FC TC 400 600 25W FC TC 400 600 25W FC TC 400 600 25W FC TC 400 600
187. UXR DATA SEL TTL L 8 TO 1 LINE 8 INP LCH TTL L COM CLEAR 8 BIT FF TTL L D TYPE COM CLEAR QUAD CABLE ASSEMBLY HP IB SINGLE A15 MISCELLANEOUS STANDOFF HEX 1 25 IN LG 6 32THD STANDOFF METRIC SHORT STUD MOUNT FOR SKT IC 14 PIN PC MTG RT AGL CONT CLEVIS 0 070 IN W SLT 0 45 IN PIN CTR DISPLAY ASSEMBLY SERIES 1636 CAPACITOR FXD 2000 75 10 6VDC AL DIODE SWITCHING 30V 50MA 2NS DO 35 DIODE SWITCHING 30V 50MA 2NS DO 35 DIODE SWITCHING 30V 50MA 2NS DO 35 DIODE GE 60V 60MA 1US DO 7 DIODE SWITCHING 30V 50MA 2NS DO 35 DISPLAY NUM SEG 1 43 H DISPLAY NUM SEG 1 43 H DISPLAY NUM SEG 1 CHAR 43 H DISPLAY NUM SEG 1 43 H DISPLAY NUM SEG 1 CHAR 43 H DISPLAY NUM SEG 1 CHAR 43 H DISPLAY NUM SEG 1 43 H DISPLAY NUM SEG 1 43 H DISPLAY NUM SEG 1 43 H LED VISIBLE LUM INT 300UCD IF 50MA MAX LED VISIBLE LUM INT 300UCD IF 50MA MAX LED VISIBLE LUM INT 300UCD IF 50MA MAX LED VISIBLE LUM INT 300UCD IF 50MA MAX LED VISIBLE LUM INT 300UCD IF 50MA MAX LED VISIBLE LUM INT 300UCD IF 50MA MAX LED VISIBLE LUM INT 300UCD IF 50MA MAX LED VISIBLE LUM INT 300UCD IF 50MA MAX LED VISIBLE LUM INT 300UCD IF 50MA MAX LED VISIBLE LUM INT 300UCD IF 50MA MAX TRANSISTOR PNP 51 PD 1W FT 50MHZ TRANSISTOR PNP 51 PD 1W FT 50MHZ TRAMSISTOR PNP SI PD 1W FT 50MHZ TRANSISTOR PNP 51 PD 1W FT 50MHZ TRANSISTOR PNP SI PD 1W FT 50MHZ TRANSISTOR PNP 51 PD 1W FT 50MHZ TRANSISTOR PNP 51 PD 1W FT 50MHZ TRAN
188. VDC CER ADDED IF NEEDED NOT ALL INSTRUMENTS CAPACITOR FXD 1UF 20 50VDC CER ADDED NEEDE NOT IN ALL INSTRUMENTS CAPACITOR FXD 91PF 5 300VDC MICA 0 70 FACTORY SELECTED PART CAPACITOR FXD 910PF 5 100VDC MICA FACTORY SELECTED PART CAPACITOR FXD 33UF 20 10VDC TA CAPACITOR FXD 01UF 20 100VDC CER CAPACITOR FXD 47UF 100 10 40VDC AL CAPACITOR FXD 47UF 100 10 40VDC AL CAPACITOR FXD 1000UF 100 10 12VDC AL USE EXACT REPLACEMENT PART CAPACITOR FXD 1000UF 100 10 12VDC AL USE EXACT REPLACEMENT PART CAPACITOR FXD 1UF 20 35VDC TA CAPACITOR FXD 1UF 20 35VDC TA CAPACITOR FXD 10 500VDC MICA ADDED NEEDED IN ALL INSTRUMENTS CAPACITOR FXD 5PF 10 500VDC MICA CAPACITOR FXD 47UF 100 10 25VDC AL CAPACITOR FXD 47UF 100 10 25VDC AL CAPACITOR FXD 1UF 20 50VDC CER CAPACITOR FXD 01UF 20 100VDC CER ADDED IF NEEDED NOT IN ALL INSTRUMENTS CAPACITOR FXD 2 2UF 20 50VDC CER CAPACITOR FXD 2 2UF 20 50VDC CER DIODE ZNR 12 1V 10 DO 15 PD 1W DIODE ZNR 12 1V 10 DO 15 PD 1W DIODE PWR RECT 50V 5A 200NS DIODE PWR RECT 50CT 50V05A 200NS NOT ASSIGNED NOT ASSIGNED DIODE ZNR 1N53408 6V 5 PD 5W IR 1UA DIODE ZNR 1N53408 6V 5 PD 5W IR 1UA DIODE SWITCHING 30V 50MA 2NS DO 35 DIODE SWITCHING 30V 50MA 2NS DO 35 DIODE ZNR 1N5354B 17V 5 PD 5W TC 75 DIODE ZNR 1N5354B 17V 5 PD 5W TC 75 DIODE FW BRDG 100V 4A SEE INTRODUCTION TO THIS SECTION FOR ORDERING INFORMATION CODE
189. VDC CER 28480 0160 3879 A11C13 0180 0428 8 CAPACITOR FXD 680 20 6VDC TA 28480 0180 0428 11 14 0180 0428 8 CAPACITOR FXD 68UF 20 6VDC TA 28480 0180 0428 11 15 0160 3879 7 CAPACITOR FXD 01UF 20 100VDC CER 28480 0160 3879 A11C16 0160 3879 7 CAPACITOR FXD 010 20 100VDC CER 28480 0160 3879 A11C17 0160 3879 7 CAPACITOR FXD 01UF 20 100VDC CER 28480 0160 3879 A11C18 0160 3879 7 CAPACITOR FXD 01UF 20 100VDC CER 28480 0160 3879 A11C19 0160 3879 7 CAPACITOR FXD 01UF 20 100VDC CER 28480 0160 3879 A11C20 0160 3879 7 CAPACITOR FXD 01UF 20 100VDC CER 28480 0160 3879 SEE INTRODUCTION TO THIS SECTION FOR ORDERING INFORMATION MODEL 5328A REPLACEABLE PARTS TABLE 6 1 REPLACEABLE PARTS REFERENCE DESIGNATION A11CR1 A11CR2 A11CR3 A11CR4 A11CR5 A11CR6 A11CR7 A11CR8 A11CR9 A11CR10 A11CR11 A11CR12 A11CR13 A11CR14 A11CR15 A11CR16 11 1 A11Q1 A11Q2 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 A11R1 A11R2 A11R3 A11R4 Al1R5 Al1R6 11 7 Al1RT7 11 7 11 7 11 7 A11R8 A11R9 A11R10 A11R11 A11R11 A11R11 A11R11 A11R11 A11R12 A11R13 A11R14 A11R15 A11R16 A11R17 A11R18 A11R19 A11R20 A11R21 A11R22 A11R23 A11R24 A11R25 A11R26 A11R27 A11R28 A11R28 A11R28 A11R28 A11R28 A11R29 A11R30 A11R31 A11R32 A11R33 A11R33 A11R33 A11R33 A11R33 NUMBER 1901 0179 1901 0179 1901 0179 1901 0179 1901 0179 1901 0179 1901 0
190. W FC TC 400 600 01121 5115 A12R18 0683 2215 1 RESISTOR 220 5 25W FC TC 400 600 01121 CB2215 A12R19 0683 2215 1 RESISTOR 220 5 25W FC TC 400 600 01121 CB2215 A12R20 0683 1005 5 3 RESISTOR 10 5 25W TC 400 500 01121 CB1005 A12R21 0683 1005 5 RESISTOR 10 5 25W TC 400 500 01121 CB1005 A12R22 0683 3315 4 RESISTOR 330 5 FC TC 400 600 01121 CB3315 A12R23 0683 1035 1 RESISTOR 10K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 01121 CB1035 A12R24 0683 3315 4 RESISTOR 330 5 25W FC T 400 600 01121 CB3315 A12R25 0683 1035 1 RESISTOR 10K 5 25W FC TC 400 700 01121 CB1035 A12R26 2100 2632 4 2 RESISTOR TRMR 100 10 C SIDE ADJ 1 TRN 30983 ET50X101 A12R27 0698 7229 8 2 RESISTOR 511 1 05W F CT 0 100 24546 C3 1 8 T0 511R G A12R28 2100 2632 4 RESISTOR TRMR 100 10 C SIDE ADJ 1 TRN 30983 ET50X101 A12R29 0698 5996 2 2 RESISTOR 560 5 125W CC TC 330 800 01121 BB5615 A12R30 0698 5996 2 RESISTOR 560 5 125W CC TC 330 800 01121 BB5615 A12R31 0698 7229 8 RESISTOR 511 1 05W F TC 0 100 24546 C3 1 8 T0 511R G A12R32 0698 7230 1 2 RESISTOR 562 15 05W F TC 0 100 24546 C3 1 8 T0 562R G A12R33 0683 5115 6 RESISTOR 510 5 25W FC TC 400 600 01121 CB5115 A12R34 0698 6283 2 RESISTOR 10 5 125W CC TC 120 400 01121 BB1005 A12R35 0698 7230 1 RESISTOR 562 1 05W F TC 0 100 24546 C3 1 8 T0 562R G A12R36 0698 6283 2 RESISTOR 10 5 125W CC TC 120 400 01121 BB1005 A12R37 0683 1055 5 RESISTOR 1M 55 25W FC TC 800 900 01121 CB1055 A12R38 0683 1055 5 RESISTOR
191. accepting remote commands the non DAC and DAC control modes 4 111 When the 5328A goes into remote front panel switch control is disabled At the same time the programming interface takes control of the input signal conditioning relays In the non DAC control mode the interface accepts and decode serial data bytes stores the infor mation in latches and control signal conditioning via the latched outputs A19 SWITCH CONTROL INPUT A A12 P O A10 AMPLIFIER SYNCHRONIZER FUNCTION SELECTOR INPUT 8 REMOTE CIRCUITRY T FROM P O A10 PROGRAMMING INTERFACE MDA MDD INTERFACE BOARD Figure 4 9 Remote Controllable Programmable Input Block Diagram Model 5328A Theory of Operation 4 112 When the interface receives a data byte for control of trigger levels it goes into the DAC control mode This 5 a result of the interface receiving a or on its input data lines Once in the DAC control mode the programming interface latches disregard the information at their input Simultaneously the information on the input data lines MDA MDD is accepted by the A11 DAC board 4 113 The A11 DAC board shifts the polarity indicator and three following numerical bytes of information into its shift registers Following the polarity indicator and the three numerical data bytes an asterisk appears on the MDA MDD lines se Table 4 7 for proper format The asterisk causes the programming interface to reve
192. ad microhenry micromho microsecond microvolt microvolt ac microvolt de microvolt peak microvolt peak to peak microvolt rms microwatt Connection normally closed neon negative nanotarad nickel plate normally open nominal normal negative positive negative negative positive zero zero temperature coelficient not recommended for field replacement not separately replaceable nanosecond nanowatt order by description outside diameter oval head operational amplifier option oscillator oxide ounce ohm peak used in parts list pulse amplitude modulation printed circuit pulse code moudulation pulse count modulation pulse duration modulation picotarad phosphor bronze Phillips PIN PLO PM PNP POLY PORC POS POSN POT p p PP PPM PREAMPL PRF PRR ps PT PTM PWM PWV RC RECT REF REG REPL RF RFI RH RLC RMO rms RAND ROM R amp P RWV S B SCR SE SECT SEMICON SHF 5 SIL st SNR SPOT SPG SR SPST 558 SST STL 50 SwR SYNC T TA TC TD positive intrinsic negative peak inverse voltage peak phase lock phase lock oscillator phase modulation positive negative positive part of potystyrene porcelain positive position s used in parts list position
193. ad through titanium tolerance trimmer transistor transistor transistor logic television television interference traveling wave tube micro 10 used in parts list microfarad used in parts list ultrahigh frequency unregulated volt voltampere volts ac variable voltage controlled oscillator volts dc volts dc working used in parts list volts filtered variable trequency oscillator very high frequency volts peak Volts peak to peak volts rms voltage standing wave ratio voltage tuned oscillator vacuum tube voltmeter volts switched watt with working inverse vollage wirewound without ytirmm iron garnet characteristic impedance NOTE the parts list will be in upper case MULTIPLIERS Abbreviation Prefix Multiple T tera 109 G giga 10 M mega 106 kilo 10 10 10 c centi 10 milli 107 u micro 10 n nano 10 p pico 10 2 f femto 107 8 atto 10 Model 5328A Replaceable Parts 6 5 HP PART NUMBER ORGANIZATION 6 6 Following is a general description of the HP part number system 6 7 Component Parts and Materials 6 8 Generally the prefix of HP part numbers identifies the type of device Eight digit part numbers are used where the four digit prefix identifies the type of component part or material and the four digit suffix indicates the specific type Following is a list of some of the more commonly used prefixes for component
194. ample trigger level uncertainty of 10 millivolt on a 100 millivolt nanosecond signal introduces an error in the time interval measurement of 0 1 nanosecond The trigger error for such a signal with 1 millivolt peak noise is less than 02 nanosecond a factor of five less Averaging reduces the trigger error still further but not the trigger level uncertainty error The error is reduced by for time interval averaging and by for period averaging Sa INPUT SIGNAL SLOPE TRIGGERING HYSTERESIS BANO NOISE VOLTAGE PEAK NOISE VOLTAGE P N SLOPE er TRIGGER ERROR NOISE VOLTAGE TIME ERROR SIGNAL SLEW RATE SIGNAL SLEW RATE Figure 4 7 Trigger Error 4 48 5328A PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION 4 49 The 5328A is organized into four main operating sections refer to Figure 4 8 e The main counter section Z The input section The power supply section The Hewlett Packard Interface Bus HP IB section 4 50 Each section operates relatively independently and communicates to the other through an internal bus system The two way bus consists of 90 lines 4 51 The power supply provides regulated dc voltage for the other operating sections of the instrument The main on off switch of the instrument operates only the central power supply regulator the main ac power line is never broken Unregulated dc is constantly fed to the oven oscillator eliminating the n
195. and which would produce more pulses out of the Schmitt trigger than input cycles to it no significant error is introduced in a frequency measurement 4 45 For period measurements however this uncertainty produces like error in the time the gate is open since it is this signal that controls the gate It can be shown that with essentially low frequency noise and a signal to noise ratio of 40 dB the resultant worst case trigger error is 32 of the period Thus the trigger error in the measurement of the period of a 1 kHz signal is 3 2x 10 x 10 3 2 microseconds worst case For 60 dB signal to noise ratio worst case error is 032 while for a 20 dB signal to noise ratio signal it is 3 2 4 46 For an arbitrary wave shape but constant slew rate through the hysteresis band the trigger error takes on a different expression In Figure 4 7 it is shown that for this case the trigger error is 2 peak noise voltage signal slew rate for a 40 dB S N this translates to 0025 us signal slew rate V s Model 5328A Theory of Operation 4 47 For time interval measurements trigger error is generally negligible when compared to the systematic error introduced by the uncertainty in the setting of trigger levels For an un certainty in trigger level of 10 millivolt and a peak noise voltage of one millivolt trigger error is a factor of five less than the error caused by trigger level uncertainty regardless of signal slew rate For ex
196. ase code from the front panel switches or the HP IB remote programming board The ROM generates 32 bits of output data which are transmitted throughout the instrument to set up each subsection for the particular measurement situation 4 57 Input Section 4 58 The input modules are the main interface between the instrument and the outside elec tronic environment They accept input signals and convert them into the proper form to be handled by the main counter circuits 4 59 The middle area of the input module section provides the 5328A with extended fre quency capability Channel 500 fuse protected 500 MHz amplifier and Schmitt trigger feed the 500 MHz decade Latches in this section strobe the ninth least significant digit from the module onto the data bus and into the display In functions not requiring an input from this module ROM lines deactivate the output strobing circuitry and the ninth digit on the display goes blank 4 60 Hewlett Packard Interface Bus HP US Section 4 61 The fourth section of the instrument the HP IB assembly provides for control of the counter by the HP IB Connected to the main instrument bus through a ribbon cable the internally mounted HP IB board controls function time base cycle rate arming and other controls in the instrument 4 62 A1 MOTHERBOARD 4 63 The A1 Motherboard consists of five sections as follows Display control State control Oscillator Decade Counting Assembly
197. ass instrument This instrument has been designed and tested according to IEC Publication 348 Safety Requirements for Electronic Measuring Apparatus OPERATION BEFORE APPLYING POWER verify that the power transformer primary is matched to the available line voltage and the correct fuse is installed see Section 1 Make sure that only fuses with the required rated current and of the specified type normal blow time delay etc are used for replacement The use of repaired fuses and the short circuiting of fuseholders must be avoided SERVICE Although this instrument has been designed in accordance with international safety standards this manual contains information cautions and warnings which must be followed to ensure safe operation and to retain the instrument in safe condition Service and adjustments should be performed only by qualified service personnel Any adjustment maintenance and repair of the opened instrument under voltage should be avoided as much as possible and when inevitable should be carried out only by a skilled person who is aware of the hazard involved Capacitors inside the instrument may still be charged even if the instrument has been discon nected from its source of supply Whenever it is likely that the protection has been impaired the instrument must be made in operative and be secured against any unintended operation Model 5328A Safety Considerations WARNING IF THIS INSTRUMENT IS TO
198. at if the 1 count error is truly random it can be reduced by averaging a number of measurements The words truly random are significant For time interval averaging to work the time interval must 1 be repetitive and 2 have a repetition frequency which is a synchronous to the instrument s clock Under these conditions the resolution of the measurement is 1 count Resolution where number of time intervals averaged 4 29 With averaging resolution of a time interval measurement is limited only by the noise inherent in the instrument Ten picosecond resolution can be obtained with the 5328A Most time interval averaging suffers one severe limitation the minimum measurable time interval is limited to the period of the clock This limitation is removed by circuits known as synchro nizers which are used in the 5328A to measure intervals as short as 100 picosecond 4 30 The 5328A synchronizers operate as shown in Figure 4 5 The top waveshape shows repetitive time interval which is asynchronous to the square wave clock When these signals are applied to the main gate an output similar to the third waveform results no synchronizers Note that much of this output results in transitions of shorter duration than the clock pulses DCA s designed to count at the clock frequency are unable to accept pulses of shorter duration than the clock The counts accumulated in the DCA s will therefore approximate those shown in the fourth
199. attern is stopped or nearly stopped NOTE When adjusting the 5328A oscillator adjust FREQ ADJ on the 10544A crystal oscillator unit and the fine tuning adjustment A3R14 PATTERN MOVEMENT UNKNOWN HIGH UNKNOWN LOW 100 1 MHz 5 MHz OR 10 TRIGGERED FREQ STO OUTPUT SWEEP OUTPUT O OSCILLOSCOPE 5345 REFERENCE FAEQUENCY PANEL STANDARO CALIBRATION SWEEP SPEED NOTES 1 5 O01 SEC CM CM SEC 1x 10 TIME 5 TRACE MOVEMENT WITH SELUND HAND EM 100 SEC 1x 10 8 OF WATCH OR CLOCK 1 CM 10 SEC x 07 Figure 5 1 10 MHz Oscillator Frequency Check 5 25 Sensitivity Adjustments 1 Adjust the channels A and B sensitivity as follows Remove top cover of 5328A to gain access to variable resistors R28 and R26 on the A12 Amplifier Assembly see location photo Section VIII b Set 5328A front panel controls as follows FUNCTION FREQ A RESOLUTION 105 10 Hz SLOPE A HORS ACIDO AI MERETUR DC AENA uay did does han I PRESET SEP COMA SEP SAMPLE RATE MIDRANGE Model 5328A Maintenance 2 3 5 20 Set 5328A rear panel control as follows d Connect HP 608E Signal Generator or equivalent to INPUT A Set signal gen erator to 35 MHz at 50 mV rms 140 mV e Slowly decrease the signal generators output l
200. ck LMS pulses to only U8 or 15 4 136 Clock multiplexer U16 decodes the MA and MB lines from the A15 board to determine whether the input data byte on MDA MDD is A or B channel information It then routes the clock pulse to U8 14 for A channel information or to U15 14 for B channel information The clock pulse latches the information into the intended latch 4 137 After reset the interface defaults to all of the underlined functiond in Table 3 5 Pro gram Code Set To change one of the signal conditioning controls it is necessary to program that function 4 138 As an example assume a Channel A function setting of X1 is desired This means that an A7 must be included in the data string sent by the system controller to the 5328A When the A is decoded by the A15 HP IB interface it causes the MA line to be high and the MB line to be low The MA and MB lines are decoded by U6 and it routes the following clock pulses to U8 4 139 When the 7 is sent 1110 appears at the input of ROM U7 on MDA MDD respectively As shown in Table 5 28 the 1110 at the input causes an output of 000011 on U7 pins 1 6 4 140 The clock pulse arrives at U8 14 and latches the high on U8 13 to U8 5 The high on U8 5 is buffered by U9 and appears at pin 13 of its output The high at U9 13 is inverted on the same function as Channel A 4 141 All non DAC information is latched in the same manner B channel information is latched into the
201. ck Diagram Model 5328A Schematic Dragrams 8 19 REAR SIDE FRAME S Dav 23DV BLK RED BLK GRM POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY 08328 60035 SERIES IHDB BLH REAR PANEL TO POWER SWITCH 5 416 DISPLAY BOARD THRU MOTHER HOARD NOTES 1 REFERENCE DESIOMATIONS WITHIN THIS ASSEMBLY ARE ABBREVIATED 400 ASSEMBLY HUMBER TO ABBREVIATION FOR COMPLETE DESCRIPTION 2 UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED RESISTANCE IN OHMSi CAPACITANCE IM FARADS TMDUCTAHCE IM HEHRIES 3 ASTERISK 1 INDICATES SELECTED COMPONENTS AVERAGE VALUE SHOWN 4 ADDED NEEOEDA NOT IM ALL INSTRUMENTS WARNING 1907 120 220 240 SUPPLY WIRES ARE EXPOSED WHEN EITHER TOP OR BOTTOM COVER 15 REMOVED USE EXTREME CAUTION DURING TROUBLE SHOOTING ADJUSTMENT REPAIR AVOID DAMAGE TO INSTRUMENT BY REMOVING POWER BEFORE REMOVING OR REPLACING COVERS ASSEMBLIES COMPONENTS GRI 12 1W fom REFERENCE SOURCE Y I er ERII A cit ITY 1 100 ERT tL cl 2 1 T D RED GRH 115 FAN SE CONTROL aa 2 8 is MODULE FAN azor 2000 Qo PART o ci 620 of Blt T
202. ctrical connector electron tube attenuator Sotalor part movable partion volage regulator termination fuse plug breakdown diode fan motor filter transistor SCR tnode cable transmission battery hardware thyristor path wire capacitor circulator resistor socket z Coupler electrical connecior thermistor crystal unit prezo diode diode thyristor stationary portion switch electric varactor Jack transformer tuned cavity tuned directional coupler K relay terminal board delay tine con inductor thermocouple annunciator signaling meter test point device audible or miscellaneous integrated Circuit wsusl lamp LEO mechanical part microcircoit ABBREVIATIONS ampere balance COEF coefficient degree Celsius alternating current binary coded decimal COM common centrigrade accessory board composition oF degree Fahrenheit adjustment beryilium copper COMPL complete K degree Kelvin analog to digital lt beat frequency CONN connector OEPC deposited carbon audio frequency oscillator cP cadmium plate z detector automatic frequency binder head CRT cathode ray tube diam diameter control breakdown CTL complementary tran DIA diameter used in automatic gain control bandpass sistor logic Parts list aluminum bandpass filter cw continuous wave DIFF automatic level control 2 brass clockwise AMPL differe
203. cy is variable in decade steps The operator can control this frequency with the FREQ RESOLUTION N switch The time t of equation 1 is deter mined by the period of this pulse train 4 12 MAIN GATE is the heart of the counter When this gate is opened pulses from the amplifier trigger are allowed to pass through The opening and closing of the main gate is con trolled by the decade divider output to the main gate flip flop 4 13 DECADE COUNTING ASSEMBLIES totalizes the output pulses from the main gate and displays this total after the gate is closed If for example the gate is open for precisely 1 second the decade counting assemblies DCA s display the frequency in Hertz of the input signal 4 14 Other basic measurements the counter can perform are described in the following paragraphs 4 15 Period 4 16 Period the inverse of frequency can be measured with the counter by reversing the inputs to the main gate Now the input signal controls the duration over which the main gate is open and the decade divider output is counted by the DCA s The duration of the count is of course one cycle or period of the input signal see Figure 4 2 4 17 Unused decades in the decade divider chain can be used to divide the amplifier trigger output so that the gate remains open for decade steps of the input period rather than a single period The is the basis for multiple period averaging Period and period averaging techniques are u
204. d is armed within 10 us after the event of the C arming input FREQ A PERIOD A PERIOD AVG A T I A to B AVG to B FREQ Table 3 1 Arming Status Armed by A input Armed by SAMPLE RATE Armed by SAMPLE RATE Armed by SAMPLE RATE Armed by SAMPLE RATE Armed by C input Armed by B input Armed by B input Armed by B input Armed by C input Armed by C input Armed by B input Model 5328A Operation RATIO B A RATIO C A Armed by SAMPLE RATE Armed by C input Armed by C input Armed by B input 3 37 Frequency Resolution N Switch 3 38 The FREQUENCY RESOLUTION N switch determines the amount of time that the counter s main gate is open for a particular measurement when the Main Gate FF refer to determines the gate time Depending on the measurement this time results in a certain measurement resolution e g frequency measurements a number of intervals aver aged e g T 1 AVG measurements or a scaling factor by which the time base is divided g period Table 8 2 shows the setting of the RESOLUTION switch and the corre sponding time the main gate is open Table 3 2 Frequency Resolution N Switch Settings and Gate Times GATE TIME 3 39 Table 3 3 summarizes the FUNCTIONS and the corresponding interpretation of the FREQUENCY RESOLUTION N switch setting Table 3 3 Functions and Resolution Switch Settings FUNCTION RESOLUTION N SWITCH FREQ
205. d the B channel ends the measurement NOTE A simple pulse width measurement is achieved with the use of the SLOPE setting for Channel A and the SLOPE setting for Channel B POSITIVE SLOPE NEGATIVE SLOPE PULSE WIDTH INTERVAL MEASURED Figure 3 9 Slope Switch Settings 3 48 LEVEL CONTROL The LEVEL control for each channel is adjustable over the range of 2 5V dc with the attenuator for that channel in the X1 position A typical use of the LEVEL con trols is shown in NOTE Simple measurement of a time interval the LEVEL control of the A and B input channels were used to set the trigger LEVEL of A and B 500 mv DC A INPUT 0 VDC 750 mV DC B INPUT 25 ns INTERVAL MEASURED 8 ZA y A MARKER OV B MARKER l oV Figure 3 10 Level Control Settings 3 11 Model 5328A Operation 3 49 Channel C Input 3 50 The CHANNEL C 500 MHz 500 input is useful for higher frequency signals out of the A and B input channel range 0 to 100 MHz CAUTION The C channel input signal should be limited to 5 volts maximum If this limit is exceeded the inline fuse may open blow 3 51 C Channel Overload Indicator 3 52 The OVERLOAD CHANNEL indicator will flash on and off if the voltage maximum is exceeded at the C channel input 3 53 Hysteresis Band of Trigger Levels 3 54 The width of the trigger level hysteresis band shown in Figure 3 77 lis determined by the
206. d to bus lines DIO1 DIO7 and DAV not output when goes true The DAO signal from U24 9 arms the DAC signal through U17B to ensure that DAC goes false within a few gate delays after goes true 1 n some cases the DAC response from the ROM may be too slow After ATN is true DAO is set to a 0 to allow normal operation of the DAC line 4 192 END OF MEASUREMENT When a measurement has been completed FF U11B is set This FF is clocked by the closing edge of the LMG signal Diode CR2 and transistor Q3 keep U11B from going to the state when LRES is low or HRD is high During these times the counter is being reset and noise appears on the LMG line which could trigger UIIB 4 193 QUALIFIER MULTIPLEXER Five 8 to 1 multiplexer are connected to allow 36 lines to be multiplexed into 1 line ASM ROM U22 controls multiplexer U3 U6 U8 and U32 to select individual line qualifiers and U12 to select one of these multiplexer In addition U12 checks the output of auxiliary State Counter U7 a 4 bit binary counter that allows the same sequence of states to be repeated up to 16 times In the output algorithm each state represents an output character Qualifier FF U11A eliminates erroneous results by ensuring that the State Counters U14 and U23 are not clocked when a qualifier is changing states This would cause a partial preset and partial increment of the State Counters 4 194 ADDRESSING Address Comparator U2 monitors the Data
207. e 5328A The front and rear views shows reference designators of the front and rear panel controls connectors and indi cators The top view shows asssembly locations Component locators for each printed circuit assembly are located next to the schematics 8 16 FACTORY SELECTED COMPONENTS 8 17 Factory sleeted parts are identified by an asterisk on the schematic and in the parts list The nominal value is shown on the schematics and is listed in the table of replaceable parts A table format summary on the schematic indexes factory selected parts by reference designator describes what they are selected for and the range of normal values Model 5328A Schematic Diagrams SYMBOLS n MAIN SIGNAL PATH FRONT PANEL Rem M FEEDBACK PATH REAR PANEL TEST POINT CC O INTERIOR AND PC BOARDS do GATE WIPER MOVES TOWARD WHEN Ael CONTROL 15 CLOCKWISE J gt OR GATE POWER LINE GROUND CIRCUIT COMMON GROUND T INVERTER FLOATING GROUND d NAND GATE th CHASSIS GROUND 2 gt NOR GATE O KNOB CONTROL x SCREWDRIVER ADJUST J gt xCLUSIVE NOR PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD IDENTIFICATION REVISION LETTER HP PART NO 05340 60037 MANUFACTURING DIVISION CODE PRODUCTION CODE SERIES NO May Stamped Elsewhere On The Board REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS WITHIN ASSEMBLIES ARE ABBREVI ATED ADD ASSEMBLY NUMBER TO ABBREVIATION FOR PLET
208. e are occasional situations where time interval averaging cannot be performed on a periodic signal This problem occurs when the input time interval repetition rate is synchro nous with the internal clock 4 34 SOURCES OF MEASUREMENT ERROR 4 35 The major sources of measurement error are the 1 count ambiguity the time base error and trigger error These are discussed in the following paragraphs 4 36 1 Count Ambiguity 4 37 Since the signal input to the main gate of the counter and the clock input are not coherent an inherent 1 count ambiguity exists in the count accumulated in the decade counting assem blies This is illustrated by Figure 4 6 CASE A CASE B SIGNAL INPUT TO MAIN GATE GATE OPENING SIGNAL COUNTED Figure 4 6 1 Count Ambiguity NOTE The main gate is open for the same time in both cases incoher ence between the clock and the input signal can result in two different counts which for this example is one for case A and two for case B 4 5 Model 5328A Theory of Operation 4 6 4 38 FREQUENCY MEASUREMENT ERROR The error caused by the ambiguity is in ab solute terms 1 of the accumulated count For a frequency measurement the signal counted is the input signal of frequency Thus the relative error is given by 1 count error relative frequency measurement error af 1 4 39 PERIOD MEASUREMENT ERROR For period measurement the si
209. e time interval from A to B The number of time intervals over which the average measurement is made 15 determined by N selected by the RESOLUTION switch T I Sets counter to make a time interval measurement Start signal is applied to Channel A and the stop signal is applied to Channel B CHECK Applies 10 MHz to decade counting assemblies Verifies operation of SAMPLE RATE control RESOLUTION switch and RESET RATIO C A Sets counter to measure the ratio of the signal frequency at Channel C to the signal frequency at Channel A RATIO B A Sets counter to measure the ratio of the frequency at Channel B to the fre quency at Channel A Top blank position has no function Figure 3 6 5328A Front Panel Operation Summary 3 5 Model 5328A Operation FREQ RESOLUTION N selection switch Selects resolution in frequency measurements and N for totalizing and averaging measurements Determines how long the main gate is open for frequency measurements N GATE TIME RESOLUTION Seconds Hz 1 1 10 6 1M 10 10 10 6 100 102 100 10 6 10 k 103 1 10 3 1k 104 01 100 105 1 10 106 1 1 107 10 control Varies time between measurements continuously from approxi mately 2 milliseconds to HOLD which holds display indefinitely 500 MHz 500 Channel input connector Input for FREQ chnnel Refer to specification Section OUTPUT MARKERS 00 Channel A and B Schmitt tr
210. eed for time base warmup The fan is dc powered 4 52 Main Counter Section 4 53 The main counter section on A1 Motherboard contains all of the functional subunits of a standard counter with the exception of input signal conditioning and special logic which are contained in the input section The decade counting assembly contains eight decades of BCD counting logic latches and output multiplexing logic The time base assembly contains eight Model 5328A Theory of Operation SAMPLE A1 MOTHER BOARD 10 MHz Reset Reset ROM Oscillator MER Inhibit Time Base Select Counting Out Assembly FUNCTION A4 Function First Selector Derade RESOLUTIONI 55 2 14 5 6 Interval Display Control and 2 Drivers 8 L9 Arming Flip Flop To Module gt sees FRONT PANEL L Function Time Base Programming Latches 500 MHz input Module State Machine Detector Decade and Latch A1 Motherboard Bus 90 Lines A Attenuator and Amplifier Synchro nizers Rectifiers J Filters Amplifier Regulators Figure 4 8 Block Diagram 4 8 Model 5328A Theory of Operation counting decades output multiplexing logic and synchronizers to generate precise timing signals for the main gate The oscillator section contains the input output logic to accept an external signal via the rear panel or an internal signal from the oven
211. el must be installed Section for rear panel features photograph When shipped the switch is set to 115 volt ac operation 2 8 Fuse Replacement and Installation 2 9 Two fuses are supplied with the instrument The instrument is shipped with a 2 0 ampere fuse installed for 115 volt operation To change the instrument for 230 volt operation discon nect the ac power cable set the line selector switch and install the 1 0 ampere fuse 2 10 Power Cables WARNING TO PROTECT OPERATING AND SERVICING PERSONNEL THIS INSTRUMENT IS EQUIPPED WITH A THREE PIN POWER RECEP TACLE THE CENTER PIN OF THE RECEPTACLE CONNECTS THE INSTRUMENT CHASSIS AND PANELS TO EARTH GROUND WHEN USED WITH A PROPERLY WIRED THREE CONDUCTOR OUTLET AND POWER CABLE IMPROPERLY GROUNDED EQUIPMENT CAN RESULT IN HAZARDOUS POTENTIALS BETWEEN EQUIPMENTS 2 1 Model 5328A Installation 2 2 2 11 To accommodate the different power receptacles used throughout the world this instru ment is supplied with one of the power cables shown in Figure 2 7 The cable supplied for use in the United States meets the specifications established by the International Electrotechnical Commission IEC The male connector of this cable is a NEMA type and the female connector is a C E E type 2 12 Connect the power cable to a power source receptacle that has a grounded third con ductor If the line power receptacle is a two pin type instead of three pin receptacle use a two to
212. ematic diagrams At the bottom off Figurel the system for reference designators assemblies and subassemblies are shown 8 5 Reference Designations 8 6 Assemblies such as printed circuit boards are assigned numbers in sequence 1 2 etc As shown in Figure 8 1 subassemblies within an assembly are given a subordinate A number For example rectifier subassembly A1 has the complete designator of A25A1 For individual components the complete designator is determined by adding the assembly number and sub assembly number if any For example CR1 on the rectifier assembly is designated A25A1CR1 8 7 SIGNAL MNEMONICS 8 8 Table 8 1 contains a list of the mnemonics used to identify signals on the schematic diagrams 8 9 IDENTIFICATION MARKINGS ON PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS 8 10 HP printed circuit boards seg Figure 8 1 have four identification numbers an assembly part number a series number a revision letter and a production code 8 11 The assembly part number has 10 digits such as 05328 60018 and is the primary identi fication All assemblies with the same part number are interchangeable When a production change is made on an assembly that makes it incompatible with previous assemblies a change in part number is required The series number such as 1704A is used to document minor elec trical changes As changes are made the series number is incremented When replacement boards are ordered you may receive a replacement with
213. enance functions b Maintenance Category The codes in this column indicate the maintenance category allocated the tool or test equipment c Nomenclature This column lists the noun name and nomenclature of the tools and test equipment required to perform the maintenance functions d National NATO Stock Number This column lists the National NATO stock number of the specific tool or test equipment e Tool Number This column lists the manufac turer s part number of the tool followed by the Federal Supply Code for manufacturers 5 digit in parentheses D 5 Remarks Sec IV a Reference Code This code refers to the ap propriate item in section TT column 6 b Remarks This column provides the required explanatory information necessary to clarify items appearing section TI 4 GROUP NUMBER 01 0101 0102 0103 010301 0104 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 0110 0111 02 03 SECTION AINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART ELECTRONIC COUNTER AN USM 459 2 COMPONENT ASSEMBL Y ELECTRONIC COUNTER AN USM 459 ELECTRONIC COUNTER TS 3662 U CIRCUIT CARD ASSEMBLY Al MOTHERBOARD CIRCUIT CARD ASSEMBLY A2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CARD ASSEMBLY A3 OSCILLATOR OSCILLATOR A3AL CIRCUIT CARD ASSEMBLY A4 FUNCTION SELECTOR CIRCUIT CARD ASSEMBLY AB C CHANNEL INPUT CIRCUIT CARD ASSEMBLY 10 SYNCHRONIZER CIRCUIT CARD ASSEMBLY All DIGITAL TO ANOLOC CONVERTER CIRCUIT CARD ASSEMBLY 12
214. enerator level below 25 mV rms and adjusting the A12R26 R28 for stable counter displays Set up the equipment n Figure 5 2 Set the rear panel address switches on the 5328A to 1100008 Set the 651B test oscillator to 20kHz at a level of 25 mV rms 70mV p p Set the 180A oscil loscope A channel for ac coupling and 50 mV per division Verify that the 20 kHz signal into the counter is 70 mV p p A5 A1 Disconnect the dc supply for a 0 0 volt dc offset on the input signal Execute from the key board of the 9825A the following wrt 781 PF4G5S1S3A379 000 B37 000 R Monitoring the 5328A Marker A output on the oscilloscope adjust A11R21 for a 50 duty cycle in the Marker A signal as shown Connect the 5328A B Marker output to the B channel of the oscilloscope Adjust A11R20 for a 50 duty cycle in the Marker B output signal The counter has been programmed for Connect power supply as in the figure and adjust for a dc level of 2 00 volts 2 mV as read on the DVM Execute the following from the keyboard of the 9825A wrt 701 PF4G5S1S3A379 200 B37 200 R press RECALL on 9825A and simply change DAC voltages as required Adjust A11R18 for a 50 duty cycle on the 5328A B Marker output signal Connect the 5328A marker output signal to channel B of the oscilloscope Adjust A11R24 for a 50 duty cycle on the A Marker output signal Reconfigure dc power supply for negative voltages and set the vo
215. er a calculator or other controller is used within the system TALK ONLY mode is used when the counter will be controlled manually but will output results to another device on the bus such as a printer or D A converter Model 5328A Operation 3 73 The five right hand switches AS through A1 set the talk and listen addresses to the 5328A when it is used in the ADDRESSABLE mode Table 3 4 shows the possible address settings and the corresponding ASCII codes for talk and listen addresses Table 3 4 Addresssing ADDRESSABLE 0005000 AS A4 2 TALK a ADDRESS SWITCHES ONLY ASCH ADDRESS CODES ASCH ASCII LISTEN TALK ADDRESS ADDRESS gt un gt gt gt b wI2 Uo 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 l l l 1 1 1 1 O O O OO OO O 000000000 coc eo 00 O 0 0 D0 OK TOK OO O O O O 0O exe Q Q 0000 _ 0000 0000 3 14 Model 5320A Operation 74 Table 3 5 gives the program code set for the 5328AF 096 H42 All Function Frequency Resolution N and Channel A B Signal Conditioning are analogous to the corresponding front panel operations described previously Table 3 5 Program Code Set
216. er by switches built into the device or by jumpers on a PC board While the ATN line is low all devices must listen to the data lines When the ATN line is high only devices that have been addressed will actively send or receive data All others ignore the data lines 4 166 Several listeners can be active simultaneously but only one talker can be active at a time Whenever a talk address is put on the data lines while ATN is low all other talkers will be automatically unaddressed 4 167 Information is transmitted on the data lines under sequential control of the three hand shake lines No step in the sequence can be initiated until the previous step is completed Information transfer can proceed as fast as devices can respond but no faster than allowed by the slowest device presently addressed as active This permits several devices to receive the same message byte concurrently 4 168 The ATN line is one of the five control lines When ATN is low addresses and universal 5 are transmitted on seven of the data lines using the ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange code When ATN is high any code of 8 bits or less under stood by both talker and listener s may be used 4 169 The other control lines are IFC REN SRQ EOI IFC interface clear places the inter face system in a known quiescent state REN remote enable is used with other coded mes sages to select either local or remote control of each de
217. eshooting 5 26 5 35 Function Signals 5 26 Troubleshooting Input Channels 5 41 Local Mode Troubleshooting 5 44 Removal and Replacement Instructions 5 45 Instrument Cover Removal 5 45 Time Interval Module Assemblies A10 and A19 Removal 5 45 A16 Display Assembly Removal and Replacement 5 45 REPLACEABLE PARTS cuicos d dae ia weed d uu ss ues RP ced dee a Ordering Information HP Part Number Organization Component Parts and General Usage Parts ists t Re Specific Instrument Parts Factory Selected Part Number to NSN Cross Reference Index Vil MANUAL CHANGES Introduction A A ate dare Manual Changes SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS IntrodUction Schematic Diagrams Symbols and Reference Designators Reference Designators 8 1 Signal Mnemonics 8 1 18 9 Identi
218. eshooting A1 Motherboard 5 27 5 6 5328A Functional Signals ERE rr renr rrn Program Listing 5 33 Program 5 9 5328A A15 Qualifiers and Signal Mnemonics A12 Relay Relay Control Logic 5 41 Program interface Operation 5 43 ROM 1007 Input Output Mode 5 14 11 DAC Logic Levels E Ati DAC Sign ls eee p ER et eb i ER a Eds A11 DAC Troubleshooting Replaceable Parts Manufacturers Code 6 24 Part Number NSN Cross Reference Index 6 25 LIST OF FIGURES Figure Page Model 5328A 500 MHz Universal Frequency Counter 1 0 Measuring Tone Burst 3 2 Deadtime Multiple STOP Pulses Monitoring Marker 5328A Front Panel Operation Summary
219. evel to 15 mV rms 42 mV p p while adjusting variable resistor R26 to obtain a stable correct display on the counter f set Channel B sensitivity change 5328A front panel controls as follows FUNCTION RATIO B A RESOLUTION 103 10 kHz ES PRESET g With HP 651B Test Oscillator set to 10 MHz at 100 mV rms connected to IN PUT A connect a second signal generator set to 40 MHz at 50 mV rms to iN PUT B h Repeat step e adjusting variable resistor R28 instead of R26 Channel C Sensitivity adjustments a Remove the top cover from the 5328A b Set signal to 100 MHz and reduce level until no stable reading in counter dis play Adjust A8R82 for stable reading c Repeat step b until best sensitivity is obtained d Repeat step b to ensure that the counter still meets the requirement High Frequency Offset adjustments a Remove top cover b Set signal generator to 500 MHz and reduce signal level until display reading is no longer stable Adjust A8R85 until display is stable c Repeat step b until best balance is obtained D to A Converter Adjustment procedure The following adjustment procedure adjusts the All D to A Converter outputs for accurate programmed trigger levels Measuring the DAC outputs with a DVM is NOT an equivalent procedure Since the gain through the 5328A input ampli
220. f operation SEP or COM A 3 44 A and B Channel Signal Conditioning 3 45 AC DC SWITCH The AC DC switch controls the coupling of the external signal to the attenuator amplifier by switching a capacitor in series in the AC position or by direct coupling in the DC position The advantage of AC coupling is to provide a DC block for signals with a DC component DC has the disadvantage of being unable to pass low frequency signals A distinct advantage of having DC coupling cover the full bandwidth DC 100 MHz is that extremely accurate time interval or pulse measurements can be achieved even though pulse widths or repetition rates vary since the trigger point is independent of the duty cycle of the input signal 3 46 ATTENUATOR The attenuator ATTEN connects the input signal directly to the amplifier in X1 or through a 10 1 attenuator X10 or a 100 1 attenuator X100 to increase the voltage range by 10 or 100 times to allow measurement of high level signals that would other wise be impossible without external attenuation Model 5328A Operation 3 47 SLOPE SWITCH The SLOPE switch provided for each channel determines which slope of the input signal will trigger the counter As a simple example Figure 3 9 if the pulse width of a positive pulse is to be measured the A channel slope switch would be set to and the B chan would be set to for time interval measurements the A channel always begins the mea surement an
221. fication Markings o Printed Circuit Boards 8 1 Assembly Locations and Component Locators Factor Selected Components REFERENCES 1 COMPONENTS OF ENDITEMLIST C ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST not applicable MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION E EXPENDABLE SUPPLIES AND MATERIALS LIST not applicable v Model 5328A List of Tables LIST OF TABLES Table Page Equipment Supplied Accessories Available 5328A Counter Specifications 123 Arming Status PPP TET TETTE DTE DOTT TT TDI Frequency Resolution N Switch Settings and Gate Times Functions and Resolution Switch Settings Addressing 3 14 3 5 Program Code Set 3 15 American Standard Code for Information interchange ASCII 5328A input Circuit Program Code Set 4 15 5328A Assembly Recommended Test Equipment 5 3 Preventive Performance Test 54 5 5 Troubl
222. ficiency Report Instructions for preparing EIR s are provided in TM 38 750 The Army Mainte nance Management System EIR s should be mailed direct to Commander US Army Communications and Electronics Materiel Readiness Command ATTN DRSEL ME MQ Fort Monmouth NJ 07703 A reply will be furnished direct to you 0 5 ADMINISTRATIVE STORAGE Administrative storage of equipment issued to and used by Army activities shall be in accordance with 0 6 DESTRUCTION OF ARMY ELECTRONICS MATERIEL Destruction of Army electronics materiel to prevent enemy use shall be in accordance with TM 750 244 2 Model 5320A General Information SECTION 1 GENERAL INFORMATION 1 1 SCOPE OF MANUAL 1 2 This manual provides operating and service information for the Hewlett Packard Model 5328A H42 500 MHz Universal Frequency Counter In this manual its name will be abbreviated to 5328A or counter A separate operators booklet contains condensed operator instructions 1 3 This manual is divided into eight sections as listed and described below GENERAL INFORMATION Describes the counter lists specifications lists items supplied lists items required but not supplied describes applications and lists recommended maintenance and test equipment ection INSTALLATION Provides instructions for unpacking inspection prepar ation for use preparation for reshipment and preparation for storage Section OPERATION Provides opera
223. fiers is not exactly equal to 1 00 the signal arriving at the A12U4 comparator is not identical to the signal at the counter s input As an example assume the input amplifier gain is 0 95 Further assume an input signal which goes from 0 volts to 1 0 volt and it is desired to trigger at the 1 0 volt level Since the signal arriving at A12U4 goes from 0 volts to 0 95 volts due to the gain of 0 95 the trigger level specified by the DAC to A12U4 must be 0 95 volts Triggering at 0 95 volts on the A12U4 input signal is the same as triggering at the 1 0 volt level on the original signal The procedure described in the following takes into account the fact that the input amplifier gain is less than 1 0 The procedure offsets an input signal to the 5328A by 0 2 and 2 volts and programs the A and B channel trigger levels for 0 2 and 2 volts respectively For each offset adjustments are made by observing the A and B channel marker outputs and adjusting for a 50 duty cycle A 50 duty cycle indicates that the programmed trigger level which is the center of the hysteresis band is exactly equal to the dc offset at the signal input to the A12U4 comparator Model 5328A Maintenance is very important that the DAC adjustments be performed after the A and B channels sensitivity adjustment In this adjustment follow the procedure outlined on page 12 of the Option 041 Manual but adjust for optimum sensitivity by continuing to decrease the signal g
224. for an external frequency standard An ARM switch on the rear panel allows arming by the signal being measured switch OFF or by another input signal switch ON 1 6 INSTRUMENT IDENTIFICATION 1 7 Hewlett Packard instruments have 2 section 10 character serial number 0000A00000 which is located on the rear panel The 4 digit serial prefix identifies instrument changes If the serial prefix of your instrument differs from that listed on the title page of this manual there are differences between this manual and your instrument Instruments having higher serial prefixes are covered with a Manual Changes sheet included with this manual 1 1 Model 5328A General Information 1 8 APPLICATIONS 1 9 Specific applications information is provided Section Ill this manual The general application features of the 5328A are described in the following paragraphs 1 10 The high sensitivity frequency range and signal conditioning controls see Table 7 3 make the 5328A suited for a wide range of applications 1 11 The rear panel controlled ARM feature of the 5328A is useful in applications such as burst frequency measurements and pulse ampltiude measurements 1 12 The 5328A single shot resolution of 100 ns meets the requirements for applications such as mechanical and electromechanical device relays timing time of flight measurements ballistics sonar ranging radio ranging and navigation 1 13 Using time
225. gger ASCII BS Starts a measurement This command provides the quickest method to start a measurement cycle Table 3 6 American Standard Code for Information Interchange ASCII USA STANDARD CODE FOR INFORMATION INTERCHANGE UNIVERSAL UNLISTEN f UNTALK ADDRESS COMMAND COMMAND COMMANDS LISTEN TALK ADDRESSES ADDRESSES Zaa DATA WHEN ATN 15 HIGH ADDRESSES WHEN ATN IS LOW 3 17 Model 5328A Operation 3 79 PROGRAM EXANPLES 3 80 The following examples illustrate the programming capability of the 5328AF 096 H42 using the HP9825A Desktop Computer as a computing controller 3 81 Example 1 3 82 This program sets the 5328AFA 096 H42 into its CHECK mode with 1 Hz resolution The program takes a measurement trg 701 and reads it into the A register of the HP9825A After waiting 500 ms the program loops back to line 1 for the next trigger B wet FFG BR tra As ert 2 wajit ata 1 3 end x74 16660506 18858 1888 18858 BB BH 1 3 18 3 83 Example 2 Model 5328A Operation 3 84 This program sets the 5328AF 096 H42 into its Frequency mode with 1Hz resolution The program takes a frequency measurement reads it into the register of the HP9825A and pri
226. gger lights are off Mark results on performance test record Model 5328A Maintenance Table 5 4 Performance Test Continued 9 REMOTE TRIGGER LEVEL TEST Setup INTERFACE 9825A HP 5328A COMPUTING A MARKER INPUT MARKER CONTROLLER QUT A OUT HP 180 OSCILLOSCOPE SYSTEM A CHANNEL HP 6518 TEST OSCILLATOR 50 2 OUTPUT Model 5328A Maintenance 5 16 Table 5 4 Performance Test Continued Set channels A and B of the 5328A to DC coupling COM A X1 ATTEN and FREQ A Set the 6516 Test Oscillator for an output of 100 Hz at 6 volts peak to peak Center the signal on the oscilloscope B channel display Execute the following from the 9825A keyboard wrt 701 PF4G6S13A379 000 B37 000 R e Adjust the display of the A channel marker output on channel A of the oscillo scope such that the top of marker waveform just barely intersects the positive slope and negative slope of the 100 Hz sine wave Verify that this occurs at 0 volts on the CHANNEL B 100 Hz sine wave 1V DIV NM A w e OG s eA oA w E 2 msec DIV T gt lt gt e Connect the counters B Marker Output to the A channel of the oscilloscope Verify that the top of the marker intersects the 100 Hz sinewave at 0 volts Execute the following from the 9825A keyboard wrt 701 PF4G6S13A379 200 B37 200 R e Adjust the display of
227. gnal counted is the internal time base clock of period t Hence the relative error becomes 1 count error relative period measurement error AT T Tin 3 4 40 MAIN GATE REQUIREMENTS The 1 count error described above assumes the main gate itself does not contribute any error As with any gate however the main gate does exhibit propagation delays and takes finite times to both switch on and off Any differential between the times taken for the main gate to switch on and off show up as uncertainties in the length of time the gate is open This uncertainty in turn translates into a measurement error that increase the 1 count However the uncertainty in the main gate of the 5328A is substantially less than the period of the highest frequency counted so this error is not appreciable 4 41 Time Base Error 4 42 Any error in the time base oscillator directly translates itself into a measurement error Thus if the total of all the oscillator errors amount to 1 x 10 the total error contributed by the time base in the measurement of a 10 MHz signal is 1 x 10 x 10 10 Hz Similarly for the measurement of a 100 millisecond period the error would be 1 x 10 x 10 1 10 or 100 nanoseconds 4 43 Trigger Error 4 44 Noise on the input signal will cause uncertainties in the point at whit the Schmitt trig ger switches Provided the noise is not large enough to cause false triggering i e cross both limits of the hysteresis b
228. gramming Examples 3 18 Model 5328A Table of Contents Section TABLE OF CONTENTS Continued Page THEORY OF OPERATION 4 1 4 1 2222222222 2 2 Overall Description 4 1 F5 Basic Counter Operation Frequency tie 4 1 zi BS rac Gain a E pa au Time Interval ace cte eate d aaa 4 3 Time interval Resolution and Averaging Techniques Resolution 4 4 Time Interval 4 4 4 34 Sources of Measurement 1 Count Ambiguity Time Base 4 6 Trigger EIE teet a a lq ua ata 5328A Principles of Operation Main Counter Section Input Section Hewlett Packard Interface Bus HP IB Section 4 9 4 62 AlMotherboard 4 9 Display Control State Control Oscillator
229. gure 5 5 s intended for overall local operation troubleshooting 5 10 Relay Operation shows required levels control lines and the relay involved for any func tion Table 5 11 Relay Control Logic shows the output line and level required for proper relay operation in a function These tables 5 10 and 5 11 are to be used with the Local Mode Trouble shooting Flowchart Figure 5 5 5 48 The programming interface section of the A10 Synchronizer board is used only when the 5328A is in remote The interface is used in conjunction with the All board to control A and B channel signal conditioning When the 5328A is in remote addressable latches U8 and U15 con trol all of the signal conditioning relays The A11 DAC board is also used in remote to allow pro gramming of the A and B channel trigger levels Table 5 10 A12 Relay Operation Hic w Channel Slope Channel B Slope Channel B Atten K6 K11 K10 Channel B Coupling K9 SEP COM K4 K5 Channel A Atten K2 K3 K8 Channel A Coupling K7 NOTE Nongrounded pins on J 1 should float to TTL high Table 5 11 Relay Control Logic Function _ Channel_A Channel B Slope A10J3 Pin 2 Low A10J3 Pin 5 Low p A10 J3 Pin 2 High A10J3 Pin 5 High x1 A10J3 Pin 12 High 103 Pin 6 High Attn X10 10 3 Pin 12 Low A10J3 Pin 6 Low X100 A10J3 Pin 13 High A10J3 Pin 8 High Couplin AC A10J3 Pin 14 Low A10J3 Pin 7 Low PINS pc A10J3 Pin 14 High A10J3 Pin 7 High SEP COMA SEP
230. h stability oscillator to operate continuously Therfore the input to main power transformer T1 plus the unregulated dc voltage to the oscillator oven is always energized whenever power is connected even with the line switch in STBY 3 31 Reset 3 32 The RESET pushbutton resets the display and internal count to zero and also initiates single measurements when the SAMPLE RATE control is in the HOLD mode The HP IB interface provides remote control capability pushing the RESET button restores the counter to local con trol when not remotely locked out by the HP IB Local Lockout universal command Refer to programming in this section 3 33 Sample Rate Control 3 34 The SAMPLE RATE control sets the minimum time between samples The time is tinuously variable from less than 2 milliseconds between measurements to HOLD which holds the display indefinitely NOTE The counter will internally self arm via the SAMPLE RATE control only when ARMing is OFF and the FUNCTION selected is at other than FREQ A FREQ C and RATIO C A 3 35 Arming 3 36 The counter may be armed internally i e made ready to start a measurement by the SAMPLE RATE control or externally by the input signal itself arming off or by a signal not directly involved in the measurement arming on Table 3 7 is an arming status table A rear panel switch turns ARMing either ON or OFF The counter is armed within 1 us after the event at the B arming input an
231. he 15V and 15V sections so only the positive voltage sections will be described 4 85 5V Supply 4 86 The 5V supply is a switching regulator that has greater efficiency than a linear regu lator of the same output When the output voltage is below its nominal level comparator U1 sees its input being above its input and hence its output goes positive turning on transistor Q5 which in turn turns on Q3 and Q1 The voltage at the collector of Q1 now goes high greater than 17V and current starts to build up through L1 charging the output capacitor and increasing the output voltage At the same time positive feedback is provided via resistor R11 to maintain the situation until the output goes slightly above 5V When the voltage reaches this point the comparator output voltage starts to fall turning off transistors Q5 Q3 and Q1 causing the volt age at the collector of Q1 to fall This provides positive feedback via resistor R11 to reinforce the charge As a result transistors Q5 Q3 and Q1 are turned off hard and the voltage at the collector of Q1 goes negative except for diode CR3 which clamps the voltage to ground During this part of the cylce current flows through diode CR3 and coil L1 allowing the energy which has been stored in the field of L1 to go into the load This goes on until the output voltage again goes low enough to overcome the offset at the input of comparator U1 and turn transistor Q1 on again Model 5328A Theory of
232. igger outputs indicate when a channel is triggered 0 to 300 mV levels into 500 with less than 20 ns delay Coupling switch Selects or dc coupling for input signal When input amplifier control switch is in COM A Channel B coupling is determined by setting of Channel A coupling switch ATTEN switches Selects attenuation of input signal Signal amplitude is reduced by 10 in X10 and by 100 in X100 When input amplifier control switch fPis in COM A Channel attenuation is determined by setting of Channel A attenuation swi Channel Input channels and Table 1 2 lists the type of cable used with these inputs COM A SEP input amplifier control switch Selects independent operation of Channels A and B in SEP separate position In COM A Common A position the signal at A is also applied to Channel B The B input is disconnected from the input circuitry Channel B coupling and attenuation are determined by the Channel A settings Trigger light 20 Light blinks when its channel is triggering Light is OFF when input signal is below the trigger level Light is ON when input signal is above trigger level LEVEL controls Used in conjunction with ATTEN switch to select voltage at which triggering occurs With X1 attenuator level is variable 2 5 volts In X10 25 volts In X100 250 volts SLOPE switches 0 Select triggering on either positive or negative slope of
233. ignal that occurs in a time period t the average frequency f of that signal over the time period t is given by f gt 1 4 7 4 8 counter measures the frequency f by accumulating the number of cycles of the input signal that occurs over the time period t The basic counter elements necessary to per form this measurement are shown in Figure 4 1 INPUT INPUT AMP SIGNAL amp TRIGGER DECADE COUNTING ASSEMBLIES MAIN GATE FLIP FLOP DISPLAY TIME BASE DECADE OSCILLATOR DIVIDERS Figure 4 1 Basic Elements of the Frequency Counter 4 1 Model 5328A Theory of Operation 4 2 4 9 INPUT AMPLIFIER AND TRIGGER essentially conditions the input signal to a form that is compatible with the internal circuitry of the counter As Figure 4 7 ndicates the output of the amplifier trigger is a pulse train where each pulse corresponds to one cycle or event of the input signal 4 10 TIME BASE OSCILLATOR is that element of the counter from which the time t of equation 1 is derived From equation 1 it may be seen that the accuracy with which t is determined has a significant effect on the measurement accuracy of the frequency f The 5328A employs a 10 MHz temperature controlled oven regulated precision crystal oscillator as the time base element 4 11 DECADE DIVIDERS take the time base oscillator signal as the input and provide as an output a pulse train whose frequen
234. imum The signal at the node between resistors R30 and R32 follows closely the signal at the gate of Q3A A poten tiometer is used to adjust any initial offset voltage 4 125 SEP COM A relays K4 and K5 connect the input of the B channel attenuator to either the A or B channel inputs The signal then passes through U4 a dual Schmitt trigger Trigger U4B compares the signal at pin 9 to a dc reference between 2 5 volts on pin 10 This dc reference is selected by K1 and is supplied by either the A11 DAC board or by the A19Switch Control board The output of U4 changes state whenever the input crosses the reference voltage on U4 11 The output is ECL 0 8 to 1 6V and drives both the A trigger LED circuit on the A19 board Model 5328A Theory of Operation and the exclusive OR gate U2 Schmitt trigger U4 has approximately 15 mV peak to peak hysteresis at its input Exclusive OR gate U2 is used to select the desired slope of the input waveform When pin 7 of U2 is held to an ECL high level SLOPE switch in position U2 acts as an inverter When pin 7 goes low SLOPE switch in the position U2 does not invert the signal passing through it 4 126 Input signal conditioning control is accomplished by inverters U1 and U3 and relays K1 K12 This control is supplied from either the A10Synchronizer board or the A19Switch Con trol board When the 5328A is in remote relay control is received through J1 from the A10 board In the local mode relay co
235. input signal OVERLOAD annunciator indicates flashes on off if more than 5 volts is applied to Chan nel C input connector OVFL overflow annunciator Indicates that one or more of the most significant digits digits left most from the decimal point are not displayed RMT remote annunciator For counters with HP IB only Lights when 5328A is in remote operation GATE annunciator o Indicates when the counter s main gate is open and a measurement is in progress K S M u n and Hz annunciators Indicates the units multiplier of the measurement Nine digit LED display B shows all measurements Figure 3 6 5328A Front Panel Operation Summary Continued 3 6 Model 5328A Operation VOLTAGE SELECTOR switch Selects 115 or 230 volt operation LINE FUSE Requires a 2 0 amp fuse for 115 volt operation or a 1 0 amp fuse for 230 volt operation AC Line connector IEC type with offset pin connected to chassis ARM switch With switch in OFF counter is armed by the same signal which is involved in the measurement e g FREQ A measurements are armed by the signal at Channel With arm ing ON the measurement is armed by an input other than the input involved in the measure ment The following are armed by an event at B FREQ A PERIOD A PERIOD AVG A FREQ C C A the following are armed by an event at AVG RATIO B A EXT OSC INput connector allows separate outside signal to be used for time
236. inverting the result to obtain frequency 3 5 To make a frequency measurement on CW signal in the range of 30 to 500 MHz select FREQ C function and apply the signal to the Channel C input Make sure that the amplitude does not exceed 5V rms The trigger level for the Channel C is fixed at 0V dc If pulse wave forms are being measured they must cross through 0 volts dc by at least 25 mV Pulse widths down to 1 ns can be counted CAUTION DO NOT exceed 5 volts rms at C channel input Circuits in this channel may be damaged by higher voltages 3 6 The A B and C input modules are direct count modules Direct count allows greater reso lution per second of measurement time than prescaling techniques and is important in making frequency measurements on pulse bursts since the allowable measurement time is fixed it must be less than the width of the burst 3 7 When the 5328A is in FREQ A or FREQ C function and the rear panel ARM switch is OFF a measurement cycle is initiated i e arms the counter upon the first trigger level crossing at the A or C input This means that pulsed signals are measured as easily as CW if the measure ment time determined by the RESOLUTION switch is less than the width of the pulse 3 8 With the ARM switch FREQ A and FREQ C are armed by trigger event at the B in put This mode is useful whenever it is desired to have real time control over when a measure ment is to begin Useful applicati
237. is also contained along with a carriage return CR linefeed LF termination ot make it compatible with the standard HP IB serial data format 4 177 In addition to being a talker and listener the HP IB Interface follows a set of HP 1 B commands This includes complete service request capability The ASCII codes used for ad dressing and for data are shown in Table 3 7 Address switch information is shown in Table 3 4 The program code set is shown in Table 3 5 Model 5328A Theory of Operation 4 22 4 178 Overall Operation 4 179 The heart of the HP IB Interface is a 256 state algorithmic state machine ASM con trolled by a 256x16 ROM U22 as shown in the block diagram This state machine has two dif ferent format states determined by the format F bit from U22 One state F 0 is an output mode state where the machine will proceed sequentially to the next state address after storing or outputting information The other state F 1 is a mode where the machine can either pro ceed to the next line or perform a conditional jump to a different line in the program The de cision as to which state is chosen is made on the basis of where the qualifier bit from U11A is low or high Preset counters 14 and U23 provide presetting to a jump state when F 1 and the qualifier is low These counters increment their count in all other cases Altogether there are 52 different bits that may be selected as the qualifier for a particular state 4 180
238. it is transferred or turned in The illustrations will help you identify these items b Section Issue Items These are the minimum essential items required to place the in operation to operate it and to perform emergency repairs Although shipped separately packed they must accompany the during operation and whenever it is transferred between accountable officers The illustrations will assist you with hard to identify items This manual is your authority to requisition replacement Bll based on TOE MTOE authorization of the end item B 3 Explanation of Columns a Illustration This column is divided as follows 1 Figure number Indicates the figure number of the illustration on which the item is shown 2 Item number The number used to identify item called out in the illustration b National Stock Number Indicates the National stock number assigned to the item and which will be used for requisitioning c Description Indicates the Federal item name and if required a minimum description to identify the item The part number indicates the primary number used by the manufacturer which controls the design and characteristics of the item by means of its engineering drawings specifications stan dards and inspection requirements to identify an item or range of items Following the part number the Federal Supply Code for Manufacturers FSCM is shown in parentheses d Location The physical location of
239. ith above kits Service Kit Function Selector and ROM Kit 05328 82004 1 18 SPECIFICATIONS 1 19 Table 1 3 lists detailed specifications for the 5328AF 096 Model 5328A General Information Table 1 3 5328A Counter Specifications GENERAL Power Requirements 115 or 230 volts 60 or 400 Hz ac Display Nine digit LED Sample Rate Variable from less than 2 milli seconds to HOLD Arming Rear panel ARM ON OFF switch Refer to operation for details Blanking Unwanted zeros to left of most significant digit are suppressed Hold HOLDS count between samples Trigger L Light Indicates input is above trigger evel PROGRAMMABLE OPERATION CHANNELS A AND B Includes independent selection of coupling trigger slope trigger level and attenuator for each channel Separate Common A switch is programmable Also an invert feature switches Channels A and B useful in all functions except Ratio B A Trigger level is programmable in 10 mV steps in X1 100 mV in X10 IV in X100 Trigger level accuracy under remote control 35 mV X10 350 mV 2 of trigger level X100 3 5V 2 of trigger level Input Characteristics ensitivity 15 mV rms 0 35 MHz decoupled 20 Hz 35 MHz ac coupled 50 mV rms 35 MHz 100 MHz Minimum pulse width 5 ns 140 mV p p Coupling ac or dc switch selectable Impedance 1 0 II 70 pF Trigger Level Variable over 2 5 volts times attenuator setting with 0 volt ud position Trigge
240. l measurements Channel A opens the main gate and Channel B closes the main gate While the main gate is open 10 MHz is divided by the setting of the RESOLUTION switch and totalized by the counter For optimum resolution select N 1 Other N values may be chosen to prevent display overflow e g long time intervals or to get rid of unstable digits In time interval average measurements the main gate is open for the number of time intervals selected by the RESOLUTION switch The 5328A 10 MHz clock is totalized only during the individual time intervals The resolution of the measurement is improved by the VN 3 16 In order to allow the synchronizers time to reset during time interval averaging there must be at least 40 ns deadtime and the additional constraint that the repetition rate be less than 10 MHz Deadtime is the time between the preceding time interval stop event and the current time interval start event as shown in Figure 3 3 START STOP START I I T I MEASURED DEADTIME A SLOPE B SLOPE gt 40 ns PLUS A REP RATE LESS THAN 10 MHz Figure 3 3 Deadtime 3 17 During a time interval average there must be only one stop pulse for each start pulse Extraneous stop pulses which occur before the next start pulse are accumulated and give erro neous readings For example the case illustrated ith Figure 3 4 would result in a reading equal to one half of the desired time interval START PULSES
241. ld read 0 0000 KHz Counter display should read 0 0000000 Counter display should read 0 s Counter display should read 0 00000 ns Counter display should read 0 s Counter display should read 0 00000 ns Counter display should read 0 0000 KHz Counter display should read 0 0000000 When calculator displays MANUAL verify that front panel SAMPLE RATE control can be manually adjusted as seen from GATE LIGHT flashing rate When calculator displays GATE LIGHT verify that Gate Light is truly off n generator to the 5328 input channels and monitor the signal with an Channel Channel HP 3312A Function Generator HP 180 Series Oscilloscope Figure 5 8 Hookup for tests described Table 5 8B amp Model 5328A Maintenance Table 5 88 Program Description Check Point Step Test Counter Display Readout ATTENUATOR SEPARATE COMMON NORMAL INVERTED COUPLING SLOPE TRIGGER LEVEL Channel B SLOPE Channel B SLOPE Channel A SLOPE Channel A SLOPE Set the function generator to an output of 1 kHz 100 mV sinewave centered at as seen on the oscilloscope Connect the function generator s output to Channel A of the counter Set the counter s LEVEL A and B to PRESET HP5328AF 096 H42 trigger lights should be blinking When the 9825A CONTINUE key is pressed verify that the counter trigger lights stop blinking With function generator connected to Channel A of counter
242. ltage for 2 00 volts 2 mv Execute the following from the keyboard of the 9825A wrt 781 PF4C5S1S3A379 200 B37 200 R Adjust All R26 for a 50 duty cycle on the A Marker output signal Connect the 5328A B Marker output to the B channel of the oscilloscope Adjust A11R17 for a 50 duty cycle on the B Marker output signal 5 21 Model 5328A Maintenance 98034A HP IB INTERFACE SET TO ADDRESS 7 HP IB CABLE HP 98254 HP 6518 1 uF NON POLAR TEST OSCILLATOR DC VOLTAGE DVM SUPPLY HP 6213A HP 3490A 9825A should have either the 98213A General O Extended I O ROM or the 98214A Plotter General 1 O Extended 1 0 ROM Figure 5 2 DAC Adjustment Equipment Connections 5 22 Model 5328A Maintenance MARKER OUTPUT A or B A INPUT AC COUPLING 11 DAC BOARD ADJUSTMENT LOCATIONS R26 A channel adjustment R24 A channel adjustment TOP OF R21 A channel O adjustment INSTRUMENT R20 B channel 0 adjustment R18 B channel adjustment R17 B channel adjustment FRONT OF INSTRUMENT Figure 5 3 DAC Adjustment oscilloscope readout and adjustment locations Model 5328A Maintenance 5 26 Adjustment of A3 Oscillator Support 1 Connect 5328A HP 8640 and HP 180 as shown in Figure 5 4 EXTENDER BOARD Figure 5 4 Hookup For A3 Oscillator Support Adjustment 2 Place A3 on an extender board 3 Apply 1 MHz signal at a level greater than 1V rms
243. m the module Remove the nuts that attach the SAMPLE RATE and RESET switches and separate the front panel from the display assembly NOTE If the FUNCTION or FREQ RESOLUTION switch control knob is removed or if the associated printed circuit board switch is disas sembled the knob and switch must be aligned during replacement as described in the following paragraph To realign the display switches with the proper knob positions set the rear ceramic wafers with the slots down Set the knob of the FUNCTION switch to FREQ A and set the knob of the FREQ RESOLUTION switch to 10 10 kHz 1 kHz position and tighten the two set screws on each knob with a suitable allen wrench Model 5328A Maintenance 4 5 47 Figure 5 10 Assembly Flowchart Sheet 1 of 3 Model 5328A Mamtenance 5 49 FROM 1 152 SH 12 ra or 1 FROM 277 THIS SH 240 I D b b 2 2 A tal a 4 N ta on 237 e TO 222 TO 217 THIS SH THIS SH ALF
244. measurement is present and has not been outputted The information to be put on the bus is latched into latches U15 and U24 These drive the high cur rent buffers U5 U10 and U16 Counter U7 is used as a pointer for the ASM to recognize which character in the serial output string the interface is to output 4 187 A15 Circuit Operation 4 188 The following paragraphs describe the circuit operation of the HP IB Interface 4 189 STATE COUNTERS The state of the ASM ROM current state and next state is deter mined by State Counters U14 and U23 These counters from an 8 bit presettable binary counter When pin 1 of U25 is low the counters will always increment When pin 1 of U25 is high the counters will preset jump to another state in the program if the output of U30C is high The preset address is supplied to the State Counters input from the ROM The program is shown in the operational flowchart 5 5 and 5 6 The output of U30C is determined by the not bit from the ROM through U21E and the output of the Qualifier FF U11A The pre programmed state of the not bit determines whether a high or low output of the qualifier FF will result in a jump in the program This is shown in the ASM Operational Flowchart by Model 5328A Theory of Operation the use of the letter N in a decision diamond symbol The preset jump is synchronous and only occurs when pin 9 of U14 and U23 is low and when there is a rising edge at pin 2 of U14
245. ment has dimension of time U32 1 H Serial Pole Active U6 3 L Service Request U8 6 H Switch to Local U6 2 L Talk Always U26 5 H Address to Talk 5 39 Model 5328A Maintenance Table 5 9 5328A A15 Qualifiers and Signal Mnemonics Continued OUTPUTS Sue LLIS Unlisten HLIS Listen LTLK Untalk HTLK Talk LSP Serial Poll Disable HSP Serial Poll Enable LMA Enable Function Code Latch Input Module Select Code Also used in putting out Exponent HMA Opposite of LMA LS Measurement does not have dimension of time Output POS EXP HS Opposite of LS HLTCH Latch Data into U28 U33 or U34 LRMT Go to Local HRMT Go to Remote LD Decimal Point has not been outputted HD Decimal Point has been outputted LMB Enable Time Base Code Latch input Module Select Code Also use in putting out Exponent HMB Opposite of LMB LMS Enable Function and Time Base Code Latches Disable Module Strobe Line HMS Opposite of LMS LDAV 5328A says Data Not Valid HDAV 5328A says Data Valid LRFD 5328A says Not Ready for Data HRFD 5328A says Ready for Data LDAC 5328A says Data not Accepted HDAC 5328A says Data Accepted LLO Local Lockout Off HLLO Local Lockout On LEOM Reset End of Measurement F F U11B Initialize 16 State Counter HDSA Strobe Mainframe Display and 16 State Counter LRPR Turn OFF Master Remote Programming Reset HRPR Turn ON Master Remote Programming Reset LDDIS Low Disable Display TTL active l
246. mum or desired per formance f Calibrate To determine and cause corrections to be made or to be adjusted on instruments or test measuring and diagnostic equipments used in precision measurement Consists of comparisons of two instruments one of which is a certified standard of known accuracy to detect and adjust any discrepancy in the accuracy of the instrument being compared 9 Install The act of emplacing seating or fixing into position an item part module component or assembly in a manner to allow the proper func tioning of the equipment or system h Replace The act of substituting a serviceable like type part subassembly or module component or assembly for an unserviceable counterpart i Repair The application of maintenance services inspect test service adjust align calibrate replace or other maintenance actions welding grinding riveting straightening facing remachining or resurfacing to restore ser viceability to an item by correcting specific damage INTRODUCTION fault malfunction or failure in a part subassembly module component or assembly end item or system j Overhaul That maintenance effort ser vice action necessary to restore an item to a com pletely serviceable operational condition as prescribed by maintenance standards i e DMWR in appropriate technical publications Overhaul is normally the highest degree of maintenance per formed by the Army Overhaul does not
247. nction Selector to give display reading ECL level Function code from function switch TTL levels FS Function Selector GOSC Gated oscillator ECL levels GOSC HDS TTL level high disables synchronizers HDSA Used by Option 011 HP IB Interface to strobe bus data in remote listener HLS TTL level line used to strobe latches RL HOPN Latched ROM line which locks open Function Selector main gate HPL Same as LDP High resets decades TTL active high High strobes 4K ROM TTL active high High resets time base TTL active high Also resets Function Selector Non latched ROM bit which enables the TTL level Channel A signal from the Function Selector to be counted by the Time Base 8 4 Model 5328A Schematic Diagrams Table 8 1 Signal Mnemonics Continued MNEMONIC DESCRIPTION Latched ROM bit which enables the TTL level Channel B signal from the Function Selector to be counted by the Time Base Non latched ROM bit which enables the time base to count the oscillator output TTL level latched ROM bits that drive High Speed Multiplexer select lines on Function Selector Low annunciators TTL active low turns RHS annunciators on Must be timed with digit address code to display selected annunciators Low disable Decade Counting Assembly DCA TTL active low disables DCA so that all DCA outputs are high Low disable indicators TTL active low blanks RHS annunciators and all decimal points Low disable
248. nnel trigger lights should be lighted but NOT blinking Mark results on performance test record SEP COM A TEST e Press RESET on 5328A e Execute the following from the 9825A keyboard wrt 701 PF8G1S13A79 000 B7 000 R e Counter should display 0 us and the GATE light should be flashing Both A and B channel trigger lights should be blinking Mark results on per formance test record INVERT TEST Execute the following from the 9825A keyboard e Counter should display 80 us 40 us e Execute wrt 701 e Counter should display 20 us 10 us Mark results on performance test record Model 5328A Maintenance Tab e 5 4 Performance Test Continued ATTEN X1 X10 X100 TEST Setup INTERFACE 6518 5328A 9825A TEST OSCILLATOR COMPUTING CHANNEL A CONTROLLER 502 OUTPUT 500 TERMINATION Set the 651B to 1 kHz at an output level of 25 mV rms 1 ATTEN X1 TEST Execute the following from the 9825A keyboard wrt 701 PF4G5S13A379 000 B37 000 R Observe that both channel A and B trigger lights are blinking 2 ATTEN X10 TEST Execute the following from the 9825A keyboard wrt 701 PF4G5S13A3 000 B3 000 R Observe that both channel A and B trigger lights are off Mark results on performance test record 3 ATTEN X100 TEST Execute the following from the 9825A keyboard wrt 701 PF4G5S13A319 000 B31 000 R Observe that both channel A and B tri
249. ntial amplitier amplitude modulation Dackward wave digital to analog div division oscillator dB decibel DPDT double pole doubie automatic phase calibrate dBm decibel reterred to throw control counterclockwise 1 mw DR drive assembly ceramic de direct current 058 double sideband channel deg degree temperature diode transistor logic average centimeter interval of difference DVM digital voltmeter american wire gauge degree plane angie ECL emitter coupled logic 6 1 Model 5328A Replaceable Parts EMF EDP ELECT ENCAP EXT FET F F FH FOL H FM FP FREQ GE GHz GL GND HET HEX HD HDW HF HG HI HP HPF HR HV Hz Ic ID F MPG in INCO INCL INP INS INT kg kHz kV lo LC LED LF LG LH LIM LIN lin LK WASH LOG log Lv m mA MAX MEG MET FLM MET OX MF MFR mg MHz 6 2 electromotive force electronic data processing electrolytic encapsulated external farad field ettect transistor flip flop flat head z fillister head frequency modulation front panel frequency fixed gram germanium gigahertz glass ground ed henry hour heterodyne hexagonal head hardware high frequency mercury high Hewlett Packard high pass filter hour used in parts list high voltage
250. ntrol arrives via P2 from the A19 board Since all of the relay control lines contain inverters relay activation is caused by a high at the input 4 127 A10 Synchronizer Board 4 128 The differential A channel outputs from A12U2 feedthrough connector P2 pins 7 and 8 respectively to U1 Circuit U4 is a one shot that only triggers on a negative edge and therefore passes only trigger events that occur on the slope selected by A12U2 The output of U4 pin 15 is an ECL pulse of approximately 5 10 nanoseconds width In the FREQ A check mode the oscillator signal from U1 2 either 10 MHz or 100 MHz as selected by 51 is injected U5B to 10 13 The normal A input entering 10 12 is disabled at A12U4 by LCHK being low The oscillator signal at U10 13 is passed through U10C and U10D to U11 a dual 4 to 1 multiplexer In a noninverting mode multiplexer U11 always routes the A channel signal to the start syn chronizer U6A In a period function U11 routes the A channel signal to the stop synchronizer U6B For time interval measurements the B channel signal is supplied to stop synchronizer U6B ROM line R6 controls the stop synchronizer input switching In remote from U11 7 allows the A and B channel outputs of U11 to be inverted The outputs of U11A feed U12A which drives the A and A outputs to the A4 Function Selector 4 129 In TI TI AVG PER and PER AVG functions U5 U6 U12 and U13 are used to gener ate synchronized time inter
251. nts the results The calculator computes the period from the frequency measurement and prints the calculated period The program then sets the 5328AF 096 H42 into its PERIOD mode with 10 us resolution period measurement is made read into the C register of the HP9825A and printed After waiting 2 sec the program loops back to line 0 for the next trigger T tm a D Xi m 1 C2 p r 74 a m C MEASURED FREU 3 73e B5 FERTOO B822 88 zer MEASURED PERIOU 1 MEASURED FREG 3 732 CALE PERTOO MERSURED FERIGU Model 5328A Theory of Operation SECTION IV THEORY OF OPERATION 4 1 INTRODUCTION 4 2 This section contains a description of the operating principles of the counter in reference to an overall block diagram in this section and to individual block and schematic diagrams in Section 4 3 OVERALL DESCRIPTION 4 4 The 5328A is a 500 MHz universal frequency counter with the following capabilities Frequency 100 and 500 MHz direct count Period 100 ns resolution Period Average 10 MHz clock Time Interval 100 ns single shot resolution Time Interval Average Ratio 100 MHz 10 MHz Check 4 5 BASIC COUNTER OPERATION 4 6 The operation of the frequency counter is best understood by describing how the counter performs a frequency measurement If n is the number of cycles of a s
252. o a constant 17 characters 3 77 BUS COMMANDS 3 78 The 5328AF 096 H42 obeys the following HP 1 B Universal Commands and Addressed Commands ASCII codes shown in parenthesis and ir Table 3 6 a Universal Commands LLO Local Lockout ASCII DC1 Disables all programmable front panel controls including reset Go To Local GTL must be programmed to return to manual control DCL Device Clear ASCII DC4 Resets the programmed state of the counter to the codes shown in bold face in the program code set Has the same effect as the program code P SPE Serial Poll Enable ASCII CAN Sets the counter to the serial poll mode When addressed to talk during the serial poll mode the 5328A produces a status byte to indicate its condition If the counter has completed a measurement and it requesting service the status byte contains a 1 in bit 7 decimal value 64 If the counter has not requested service the status byte will be 0 in all bits When addressed to talk in the serial poll mode the counter will immediately stop requesting service SPD Serial Poll Disable ASCII EM Terminates the serial poll mode The 5328A can resume its normal data output mode 3 16 Model 5328A Operation b Addressed Commands GTL Go To Local ASCII SOH Returns the 5328A to local manual control from remote control SDC Selected Device Clear ASCII EOT Responds as with Device Clear or program code P GET Group Execute Tri
253. oe 99 oe NOT ASSIGNED NOT ASSIGNED SWITCH SL DPDT NS SUBMIN 5A 125VAC PC IC CNTR TTL DECD SYNCHRO POS EDGE TRIG IC SCHMITT TRIG TTL NAND QUAD 2 INP IC INV TTL HEX 1 INP IC MISC FACTORY SELECTED PART IC GATE TTL AND QUAD 2 INP IC GATE TTL EXCL OR QUAD 2 INP IC GATE TTL AND QUAD 2 INP IC INV TTL HEX 1 INP IC GATE TTL OR QUAD 2 INP IC CNTR TTL DECD SYNCHRO IC LCH TTL D TYPE 4 BIT IC CNTR MOD DECD IC GATE TTL NAND QUAD 2 INP IC GATE TTL AND QUAD 2 INP IC SCHMITT TRIG TTL NAND DUAL 4 INP IC GATE TTL NAND TPL 3 INP IC INV TTL HEX 1 INP IC FF TTL D TYPE POS EDGE TRIG CLEAR IC CNTR DECD SYNCHRO POS EDGE TRIG IC MISC IC GATE TTL NAND QUAD 2 INP IC GATE TTL NOR QUAD 2 INP IC GATE TTL EXCL OR QUAD 2 INP IC LCH TTL D TYPE 4 BIT SEE INTRODUCTION TO THIS SECTION FOR ORDERING INFORMATION CODE 28480 01121 01121 28480 01121 24546 28480 24546 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 28480 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 24546 24546 24546 24546 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 28480 01295 01295 01295 28480 01295 01295 01295 01295 01295 27014 01295 28480 01295 01295 01295 01295 01295 01295 01295 28480 01295 01295 01295 01295 PART NUMBER 1810 0041 CB1025 CB1035 1810 0055 CB2015 4 1 8 0
254. ol modes These modes refer to the operation of the interface with respect to incoming data When the incoming data is for control of signal conditioning not trigger level the interface will be in the non DAC mode The interface will be in the DAC control mode when incoming data is for DAC trigger level control 4 17 Model 5328A Theory of Operation 4 18 4 133 When the 5328A goes into remote LEXT goes low The low on LEXT causes the output of A1 Motherboard switch control circuit to go from 0 7 volts to 5 volts This change disables front panel switch control on the A16 and the A19 boards When LEXT is low U17 4 connected to tri state buffers U2 pin 1 and U9 pines 1 and 15 is also low This low returns the outputs of tri state buffers U2 and U9 to their active state With the outputs of U2 and 9 enabled the outputs of addressable latches U8 and U15 control the A12 signal conditioning relays 4 134 The interface is reset by a high on the HRPR line This high is generated by the A15 HP IB Interface Board when it receives an ASCII P 4 135 When the interface is reset it defaults to the non DAC control mode The reset causes the latched outputs of U8 and U15 to go low This sets U17 pins 9 and 10 low giving a low at U17 8 The low at U17 8 is connected to U7 14 where it causes the interface to be in the non DAC mode The low at 17 8 is also connected to clock multiplexer U16 1 where it causes 16 to route clo
255. ons include measuring frequency variations along a frequency burst and linearity testing of sweep generators Figure 3 7 illustrates the setup for measuring the linearity of a sweep generator The Channel B Trigger level is adjusted to trigger and there by arm the counter at various points along the sweep out waveform By plotting the B trigger levels and the corresponding frequency measurements made at those levels the linearity of the generator may be determined Model 5328A Operation ARM SWITCH ON SWEEP GENERATOR Figure 3 1 Measuring Linearity 3 9 PERIOD MEASUREMENTS 3 10 The PERIOD and PERIOD AVG functions allow single period measurement or multiple period averages to be made on input signals into Channel A for frequencies up to 10 MHz These modes are useful for making low frequency measurements where maximum resolution is desired 3 11 To make a PERIOD or PERIOD AVG measurement select the desired function select appropriate input signal conditioning and apply the signal to the A input For single period measurements the RESOLUTION switch scales the time base frequency which determines the resolution of the measurement For optimum resolution select N 1 Other N values may be desirable to prevent display overflow or to get rid of unstable digits For PERIOD AVG measure ments the RESOLUTION switch selects the number of periods over which the period average measurement is made the time base is 10 MHz for this case
256. ormation Figure 1 1 Model 5328A 500 MHz Universal Frequency Counter TM 11 6625 2941 14 amp P SECTION O INTRODUCTION 0 1 SCOPE This manual describes Counter Electronic Digital Readout AN USM 459 and provides instructions for operation and maintenance Throughout this manual the AN USM 459 is referred to as Hewlett Packard Model 5328A Counter 0 2 INDEXES OF PUBLICATIONS a DA Pam 310 4 Refer to the latest issue of DA Pam 310 4 to determine whether there are new editions changes or additional publications pertain ing to the equipment b DA Pam 310 7 Refer to DA Pam 310 7 to determine whether there are modification work orders MWO s pertaining to the equipment 0 3 FORMS AND RECORDS a Reports of Maintenance and Unsatisfactory Equipment Maintenance forms records and reports which are to be used by maintenance personnel at all maintenance levels are listed in and prescribed by TM 38 750 b Report of Packaging and Handling Deficiencies Fill out and forward DD Form 6 Packaging Improvement Report as prescribed in AR 700 58 NAVSUPINST 4030 29 AFR 71 13 MCO P4030 29A and DLAR 4145 8 c Discrepancy in Shipment Report DISREP SF 361 Fill out and for ward Discrepancy in Shipment Report DISREP SF 361 as prescribed in AR 55 38 NAVSUPINST 4610 33B AFR 75 18 MCO P4610 19C and DLAR 4500 15 0 4 REPORTING EQUIPMENT IMPROVEMENT RECOMMENDATIONS EIR EIR s will be prepared using Standard Form 368 Quality De
257. ors are mounted on the front panel These outputs represent the Channel A and Channel B Schmitt triggers The outputs provide 0 to 300 mV levels into 500 delayed by less than 20 ns These outputs are useful for oscilloscope monitoring Time interval measurement setups are simplified if the time interval of interest and the marker out puts can be simultaneously displayed on oscilloscope traces Frequency measurements on noisy signals can be made with more confidence since the markers can indicate the presence of noise triggering These outputs are protected from inadvertently applied voltage to 5V dc 3 61 Gate Maker Out 3 62 the GATE MARKER OUT rear panel connector supplies a TTL level which is high when the counter s main gate is open and low when it is closed Monitoring the GATE OUT on an oscilloscope can provide this information for applications where the markers do not give the desired information 3 63 1 MHz and 10 MHz Frequency Standard Outputs 3 64 The 1 MHz OUT and 10 MHz OUT connectors are on the rear panel When terminated in 50 ohms the output is a square wave of approximately l volt amplitude 3 65 Trigger Lights 3 66 A trigger light is provided for each A and B input channel to enable the user to know not only if the channel is triggering but also in which direction the trigger level must be ad justed to cause triggering The light is ON when input is above the trigger level OFF when in put is below the trigger level
258. oubleshooting 5 34 To troubleshoot the IC s on the A1 Motherboard proceed as follows Set the FUNCTION switch to CHECK a b Set the FREQ RESOLUTION N switch to 1 MHz 1 Remove top cover and remove A4 Function Selector Assembly Apply power and check for the logic states as shown in Table 5 5 using an HP Model 10528A Logic Clip or a Model 10525T Logic Probe A dark pattern indicates a logic high 5 35 Function Signals 5 361 Table 5 6 lists the functional signals at pertinent points for each position of the FUNC TION switch This information can be used to isolate problems that may occur in any of the various modes of operation 5 26 Table 5 5 IC Troubleshooting A1 Motherboard 5328A Display EH See preceding initial conditions NOTE When checking a 14 pin IC with the 16 pin logic clip ignore the patterns for pins 8 and 9 of the Logic Clip as shown by the dotted line on the pattern 1 8 BONBOROB a omi DE BO mo oa Indicates dimly lit 3 gt o au un s i Model 5328A Maintenance Table 5 5 IC Troubleshooting Motherboard Continued Model 5328A Maintenance EET IEEE ja FUNCTION OUTPUTS INPUTS OUTPUTS H t H L H L H 2 3 6 7 15 16 9 10 15 16 15 16 U27 INPUTS OUTPUTS di OUTPLTS
259. ove the screw at the rear edge that secures cover to instrument Slide cover toward rear of instrument and lift off To replace cover reverse procedure WARNING 115 OR 230 VAC SUPPLY WIRES ARE EXPOSED WHEN EITHER TOP OR BOTTOM COVER IS REMOVED USE EXTREME CAUTION DURING TROUBLESHOOTING ADJUSTMENT REPAIR AVOID DAMAGE TO INSTRUMENT BY REMOVING POWER BEFORE REMOVING OR REPLACING COVERS ASSEMBLIES OR COMPONENTS 5 58 Time Interval Module Assemblies A10 and A19 Removal Replacement 5 59 To remove and replace the time interval module proceed as follows b C j k 5 60 Disconnect the power cable from the 5328A Safety Precaution Remove rear feet and the top cover from the 5328A Using a suitable flat blade screwdriver as a prying tool gently remove the plastic filler strip from the top of the cast front panel frame Remove the two machine screws that secure the top of the module front panel to the top of the cast front panel frame Turn the 5328A on its side and remove the two machine screws that secure the bottom of the module front panel to the bottom of the cast front panel frame Slightly loosen all remaining machine screws along the top of the cast front panel frame This releases the compressive force on the module front panel Remove front panel nuts from A and B channel input connectors Remove the A19 Switch Board with front panel attached by gently pushing the assembly from the rear Note
260. ow turns blanks display except LHS Annunciators HDDIS Opposite of HDDIS LINH Inhibit Counter from Arming LRST Turn OFF Counter Mainframe Reset HRST Turn ON Counter Mainframe Reset LSRQ Output on U15 U24 Binary 0 on ASCII Bus HSRQ Output on U15 U24 Binary 64 on ASCII Bus ASP Output on U15 U24 ASCII space LDAO Output on U15 U24 all HIGHS on Bus and Disarm DAC Line HDAO Output U15 U24 all HIGHS on Bus and Arm DAC Line All succeeding bits put out on U15 U24 to be put on HP IB as ASCII Characters ADIG ASCII Digit from Display ALF ASCII Line Feed AQ ASCII ACR ASCII Carriage Return AE ASCII E ADP ASCII Decimal Point A3 ASCII 3 A6 ASCII 6 A9 ASCII 9 A ASCII A ASCII AOVF ASCII Letter O 5 40 Model 5328A Maintenance 5 43 TROUBLESHOOTING INPUT CHANNELS 5 44 The main function of the input channels is to perform input signal conditioning via either local or remote control Therefore effective problem diagnosis is divided into two sections local and remote It is most efficient to assure proper local operation before remote section trouble shooting is performed Use of the Performance Table 5 4 will aid in determining which troubleshooting section to use 5 45 Local Mode Troubleshooting 5 46 Local Mode Troubleshooting consists of the troubleshooting flowchart in Figure 5 5 These flowcharts are intended to help isolate local operation problems 5 47 The flowchart in Fi
261. parts used in several instru ments e g side frames feet top and bottom covers etc These are eight digit part numbers with the four digit prefix identifying the type of parts as shown below Type of Part Prefix Sheet Metal 5000 to 5019 Machined 5020 to 5039 Molded 5040 to 5059 Assemblies 5060 to 5079 Components 5080 to 5099 6 12 Specific Instrument Parts 6 13 These are HP manufactured parts for use in individual instruments or series of instru ments For these parts the prefix indicates the instrument and the suffix indicates the type of parts For example 05328 60001 is an assembly used in the 5328 Following 15 a list of suffixes commonly used Type of Part P N Suffix Sheet Metal 00000 to 00499 Machined 20000 to 20499 Molded 40000 to 40499 Assemblies 60000 to 60499 Components 80000 to 80299 Documentation 90000 to 90249 6 14 FACTORY SELECTED PARTS 6 15 Some of the values in the parts lists are selected during manufacture to meet circuit re quirements These parts are marked with an asterisk in the parts list and schematic diagrams with average values shown 6 16 PART NUMBER TO NATIONAL STOCK NUMBER CROSS REFERENCE INDEX 6 17 Refer to Table 6 3 to cross reference part numbers to National Stock Numbers MODEL 5328A REPLACEABLE PARTS TABLE 6 1 REPLACEABLE PARTS REFERENCE DESIGNATION Al A1C1 A1C2 A1C3 A1C4 A1C5 A1C6 A1C7 A1C8 A1C10 A1C29 A1C30 A1C31 A1C32
262. potentiometer peak to peak peak to peak used in parts iist pulse position modulation preamplifier pulse repetition trequency pulse repetition rate picosecond point pulse time modulation pulse width modulation peak working voltage resistance capacitance rectifier reference regulated replaceable radio frequency radio frequency interference round head right hand resistance inductance capacitance rack mount only root mean square round read only memory rack and panel reverse working voltage scattering parameter second time second plane angle slow blow fuse used in parts list silicon controlled rectifier screw selenium sections semiconductor superhigh frequency silicon silver slide signal to noise ratio single pole double throw spring split ring single pole single throw single sideband stainiess steel steel square standing wave ratio synchronize timed stow blow fuse tantalum temperature compensating time delay n TERM TFT TGL THD THRU TOL TRIM TSTR TTL Tv TVI UF UHF UNREG VA Vac VAR VDCW VFO VHF Vpk Vp p Vrms VSWR VTVM w WIV ww YIG zo abbreviations ow n won on on on terminal thin film transistor toggie thre
263. quency is normally applied to the A input although there is no restriction that this be the case i e ratios less than 1 may be measured If B A is greater than 1 the measurement reso lution is better than switching the inputs for a ratio lt 1 provided the value of N remains the same 3 23 OPERATING CONTROLS 3 24 All of the front and rear panel operating controls are shown and described in Figures 3 6 and 3 7 Model 5328A Operation LINE switch O In STBY position with light on supplies power to oven of the high stability time base to maintain a constant temperature for the crystal In position supplies normal operating power to the instrument RESET button PY Resets display and internal count to zero When continuously depressed lights all segments of the LED and annunciator LED s for LED test Returns 5328A to LOCAL CONTROL when HP IB Interface is in use FUNCTION selector f Selects mode of operation FREQ A Sets counter to measure frequency at Channel A b C Sets counter to measure the frequency of the signal at the Channel C input Sets counter to measure period Channel d PER AVG A Sets counter to make a period average measurement of the signal at Chan nel A The number of periods over which the average measurement is made is deter mined by N selected by the RESOLUTION switch AVG Sets counter to make a time interval average measurement of th
264. r 5 Slope Independent selection of or S Attenuators X1 X10 X100 Dynamic Range 25 mV to 1V rms times attenuator setting 0 35 MHz 50 mV rms times attenuator setting 35 MHz to 100 MHz Maximum Input dc coupled X1 250V rms dc SO kHz 1 25 x 10 V rms freq 50 kHz 2 5 MHz 5V rms 2 5 MHz 100 MHz dc coupled X10 and X100 250V rms dc 5 MHz 1 25 x 109V rms freq 5 100 MHz ac coupled 200V peak dc 0 20 Hz same as dc coupled above 20 Hz Channel Input Separate or Common A Marker Outputs and B channel Schmidt trigger outputs available on front panel 0 to 300 mV levels into 500 20 ns delay Frequency Measurements Frequency Range 0 100 MHz direct count Resolution 1 MHz to 0 1 Hz in decade steps Bes 1 count time base error Display Hz kHz MHz Period Measurements Period A Range 0 10 MHz Resolution 10 ns to 0 1s in decade steps Accuracy 1 count time base error trigger error Display ns us ms Period Average A Range 0 10 MHz Resolution 100 ns 01 ps in decade steps Accuracy 1 count displayed time base SHON trigger error 7 no of periods averaged Display us ns Time Interval Measurements Time Interval A to B Range 100 ns to 10 seconds Resolution 100 ns to 1 second in decade steps Accuracy 1 count time base error trigger error Display us ms S Time Interval Average A to B Range 0 1 ns to 10 seconds Resolution 100 5
265. r U1 Feedback capacitors C8 and C9 stretch the 5 nanosecond ECL pulse to approximately a 25 millisecond TTL output pulse This 25 millisecond pulse is of long enough duration to be seen and is used to drive the trigger LEDs Since this pulse stretcher is decoupled to the Schmitt trigger it functions like a logic probe with adjustable threshold voltage When Channel A input is higher than the trigger level setting the trigger LED is ON When the input is lower the LED is OFF and when ever it passes through the trigger threshold the LED flashes on or off depending on the polarity of the input signal 4 121 The 5 nanosecond inverted A and B outputs are also applied to pins 2 and 6 respectively of U1 The signals are translated from ECL to TTL levels and connected to the marker outputs 4 122 A12 Amplifier Board 4 123 Since both A and B channel circuitry are identical only the A channel will be discussed 4 124 Input signal A enters A12 through J2 and depending on relay K7 is either ac coupled through capacitor c30 or dc coupled across relay K7 The signal then enters the three position attenuator X1 X10 X100 and is passed from the selected attenuation node through either K2 to the input of the FET impedance converter stage Diodes CR5 and CR6 resistors R39 R37 and R34 and capacitors C23 and C24 form an overvoltage protection network to limit the signal sent to FET transistor Q3 and successive circuits to 2 61 volts max
266. r for capacitor connected to U4A pin 4 in A3 schematic diagram from C22 to C14 Change reference designator for diode located below J2 and R16 in A3 component locator from CR4 to MANUAL CHANGES MODEL 5328A H42 Page 2 gt CHANGE 1 1828A Pages 6 7 and 6 8 Table 6 1 A2 05328 60035 Replaceable Parts Change A2 series number from 1808 to 1828 Change A2R34 and R35 from 0811 1340 12 to 0812 0021 RESISTOR 0 479 5 3W WW TC 0 90 91637 CW2B1 3 T2 47 100 J 2 05328 60035 schematic Diagram II 1808 at top of diagram to SERIES 1828 Change A2R34 and R35 from 1 0 to 0 47 ohms gt Page 6 24 Table 2 Manufacturers Code List Add 91637 DALE ELECTRONICS INC COLUMBUS NE 68601 Pages 6 16 and 6 17 Table 6 1 12 05328 60031 Replaceable Parts Change A12 series number from 1636 to 1828 a A12CR7 and CR9 from 1902 0126 2 61V to 1902 3048 DIODE ZNR 3 48V 5 DO 7 058 28480 1902 3048 Page 8 33 Figure 8 0 A12 05328 60031 Schematic Diagram series number 1636 to 1828 Change voltage adjacent to A12CR7 9 from 2 61 to 3 48 7 3 Model 5328A Schematic Diagrams SECTION VIII SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS 8 1 INTRODUCTION 8 2 This section contains schematic diagrams and part locators The part locators shown the location by reference designator 8 3 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM SYMBOLS AND REFERENCE DESIGNATORS 8 4 Figure 8 1 shows the symbols used on the sch
267. regulated crystal oscillator 4 54 The sample rate circuit controls the instrument display cycle inhibit reset main gate transfer and sample rate signals are generated in this circuit as is the BCD digit address code for the strobed display Generation of decimal point and annunciators and decoding of BCD data are accomplished by the display control circuits Data out of the decade counting assembly or the input modules is decoded and displayed on the nine digit LED display 4 55 The A4 Function Selector serves as the main signal switch of the instrument lt routes input signals through multiplexer to the decade counting assembly and or the time base At the same time it interacts with the display control circuits to determine the beginning and end of the display cycle The precision main gate signal is created on the function selector through interaction with the time base assembly The function selector also has extensive interaction with the input modules It is the main receiver of the high speed data from the modules and the originator and receiver of module arming pulses 4 56 The flexibility of the 5328A comes from the ability of all these operating subsections to accept diverse data from input modules This is accomplished through the use of a 4000 bit read only memory ROM as the master control of the instrument Located in the main counter section of the instrument the ROM accepts the four bit function code and the three bit time b
268. requency range The counter must display the correct frequency Setup HP 8840A HP 5328A SIGNAL GENERATOR CHANNEL C Set the 5328A to FREQ C 1 kHz 103 Resolution SAMPLE RATE midrange Set the signal generator for an output of 15 mV rms 24 dBm for 500 Vary the frequency from 30 MHz to 500 MHz and verify that the counter displays the proper frequency 5 7 Model 5328A Maintenance Table 5 4 Performance Test Continued 4 PERIOD AND PERIOD AVERAGE Specification PER A counter will measure periods of signals to 10 MHz with resolutions from 10 ns to 0 1s in decade steps PER AVG A counter will measure periods of signals to 10 MHz with resolutions from 100 ns to 0 01 ps in decade steps The number of periods over which the period average measurement is made can be selected by the FREQ RESOLUTION N switch Description The 1 MHz time base output from the rear panel of the 5328A drives the A channel input of the counter HP 5328A INPUT A Set 5328A Function switch to PER A Freq Resolution N switch to 1 MHz 1 Level A to PRESET AC coupling X10 ATTEN SEP Verify that the counter displays 1 0 Mark results on performance test record Set the 5328A Function switch to PER AVG A and the Freq Resolution N switch to 1 Hz 106 Verify that the counter displays approximately 999 9XXXX nsec with 0 1 psec reso lution Mark results on performance test record 5 RATIO B A or C A Specification
269. rol panel with cardboard e Seal the shipping container securely 2 26 STORAGE 2 27 If the counter is to be stored for an extended period of time it should be enclosed in a clean dry sealed container See specifications ih Section for storage environmental limitations 2 3 Model 5328A Operation SECTION Ill OPERATION OPERATORS INSTRUCTIONS 3 1 INTRODUCTION 3 2 This section contains information necessary to understand how to control and use the counter Specific details and examples are provided for making measurements of frequency period period average time interval and time interval average and ratio How to use the ex ternal frequency standard input is described Programming information for use with the HP IB Interface and the Programmable Input Module is provided Front and rear panel controls con nectors and indicators are described 3 3 FREQUENCY MEASUREMENTS 3 4 To make a frequency measurement on a CW signal below 100 MHz select FREQ A func tion select the appropriate input signal conditioning and apply the signal to A input The RESOLUTION switch determines the resolution of the measurement Since the 5328A is a con ventional counter 1 Hz resolution is obtained in 1 second of measurement time e g 1Hz 10 seconds The 1 Hz best case frequency resolution limits the low frequency measurement accuracy In practice low frequencies are measured by making a period or period average measurement and
270. rt back to the non DAC control mode In this mode the All board stops accepting data and the programming interface latches again accept the input data Table 4 1 5328A Input Circuit Program Code Set Programming is accomplished as detailed im Section with the additions below Codes shown underlined are start up conditions These conditions are set by the code P Remote Programm Initialize or by the bus commands Device Clear or Selected Device Clear Commands to A channel are preceded by A Commands to B channel are preceded by B Trigger levels are programmed using the following format X Y Z Where X is volts Y is 100 s of mV Zis 10 x of mV js used to terminate inputs to the DAC s Control Function Coupling AC DC Slope Atten X100 X10 x1 Separate Corn Separate Common A NOTE Underlined codes are default conditions Invert Normal B8 A amp B Inverted 9 The check function overrides all other programming commands for A amp B channels EXAMPLES The instruction CMD 209 PF G5S137A3579 1 25 B37 1 65 R Input circuits related programming information Will program a 5328A with listen address of 9 to Function Channel A Channel B Time Interval Avg A to B DC Coupled DC Coupled Multiplier 105 Slope X1 Atten Multiple measurement X1 Atten Trig Level 1 65V Continuous Cycle Common A Slope Manual sample rate control Trigger Level 1 25V 4 15 Model 5328A Theory of Operation 4 16 4
271. rument 2 19 PACKAGING FOR RESHIPMENT 2 20 Original Packaging 2 21 The same containers and materials used in factory packaging can be obtained through the Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Offices listed at the rear of this manual 2 22 If the counter is being returned to Hewlett Packard for service attach a tag indicating the type of service required return address model number and full serial number Mark the container FRAGILE to assure careful handling 2 23 In any correspondence refer to the counter by model number and full serial number Model 5328A Installation 2 24 Other Packaging Methods 2 25 If factory packaging is not available good commercial packing should be used Contract packaging companies in many cities can provide dependable custom packaging on short notice The following general instructions should be followed when repackaging with commercially available materials shipping to a Hewlett Packard Service Office or Service Center attach tag indi cating the type of service required return address model number and full serial number b Wrap the counter in heavy paper or plastic c Use a strong shipping container A double wall carton made of 350 pound test material is normally adequate for shipments inside the U S d Use enough shock absorbing material 3 to 4 inch layer around all sides of the counter to provide a firm cushion and prevent movement inside the container Protect the con t
272. s within the listed maintenance function vary at different maintenance categories appropriate work time figures will be shown for each category The number of task hours specified by the work time figure represents the average time required to restore an item assembly subassembly component module end item or system to a serviceable condition under typical field operating conditions This time includes preparation time troubleshooting time and quality assurance quality control time in addition to the D 1 time required to perform the specific tasks iden tified for the maintenance functions authorized in the maintenance allocation chart Subcolumns of column 4 are as follows C Operator Crew O Organizational F Direct Support H General Support D Depot e Column 5 Tools and Equipment Column 5 specifies by code those common tool sets not in dividual tools and special tools test and support equipment required to perform the designated func tion f Column 6 Remarks Column 6 contains an alphabetic code which leads to the remark in Section Remarks which is pertinent to the item oposite the particular code D 4 Tool and Test Equipment Requirements Sec a Tool or Test Equipment Reference Code The numbers in this column coincide with the numbers D 2 used in the tools and equipment column of the MAC The numbers indicate the applicable tool or test equipment for the maint
273. sec 10msect4msec 10msect4msec 13 VDC 0 02 0 05 VDC period pulses period pulses period pulses 2 Pulses J1 Pin 14113 Imsect0 4msec Imsect0 4msec Imsec 0 4msec 13 VDC 0 22 0 07 VDC period pulses period pulses period pulses 3 Pulses J1 Pin 14 13 100usect40usec 100usect40usec 100usect40 usec 13 VDC 2 22 0 07 VDC period pulses period pulses period pulses 4 Pulses 1 Pin 14113 100usec 40usec 100usec 40usec 13 VDC 100usect40usec 2 22 0 07 VDC period pulses period pulses period pulses NOTE Pulse period is approximate 40 variation may be normal since pulse spacing is not constant out of rate multiplier Fainter pulses between brighter pulses may be seen This is normal Table 5 16 A11 DAC Troubleshooting Symptom Probable Cause Pulses wrong at TP4 U12 U13 U14 Pulses wrong at TP3 U8 U9 or U10 Pulses wrong at U2 output U2 Pulses wrong at drain of Q2 Q2 2 CR4 U1 or U3 Pulses wrong at drain of Q1 Q1 CR1 CR3 U1 or U3 Pulses wrong at drain of Q4 Q4 CR8 CR10 U4 or U3 Pulses wrong at drain of Q3 Q3 CR5 CR6 U4 or U3 If pulses at all points good U4 for Channel A U1 for Channel B 5 44 Model 5328A Maintenance 5 54 REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT INSTRUCTIONS 5 55 Removal and replacement instructions are provided for the instrument cover the time interval module assemblies A10 and A19 and A16 Display Assembly 5 56 Instrument Cover Removal 5 57 To remove top or bottom cover rem
274. sed to increase measurement accuracy on low frequency measurements INPUT AMP TRIGGER DECADE COUNTING ASSEMBLIES TIME BASE DECADE OSCILLATOR DIVIDERS Figure 4 2 Measuring Period NOTE The roles of the amplifer trigger and decade divider outputs are re versed in measuring the period This same configuration also serves for ratio measurements with the second input replacing the time base oscillator Model 5328A Theory of Operation 4 18 Ratio 4 19 By replacing the time base with a second input of frequency f the same configuration as ir Figure 4 P can be used to measure the ratio f f For higher resolution the signal at fre quency f can be divided in decade steps in a manner identical to multiple period averaging 4 20 Time Interval 4 21 Figure 4 3 shows the configuration for the measurement of time between two events or time interval The main gate is now opened by the START input and closed by the STOP The decade divider output is again counted and the display shows the elapsed time between START and STOP signals The measurement of time interval is considered in more detail in para graph 4 22 4 22 TIME INTERVAL RESOLUTION AND AVERAGING TECHNIQUES 4 23 Time interval the measurement of the time between two events is shown in the block diagram shown in Figure 4 3 The main gate is now controlled by two independent inputs the START input opening the gate and the STOP input closing it Clock pulses are acc
275. ssociated circuitry should be made to verify proper operation Mechanical parts should be inspected for excessive wear looseness misalignment corrosion and other signs of deterioration 5 13 Cleaning 5 14 The instrument should be kept free of dust moisture grease and foreign matter to ensure trouble free operation A dry clean cloth a soft bristled brush or a cloth saturated with cleaning compound may be used WARNING 100 120 220 240 SUPPLY WIRES ARE EXPOSED WHEN EITHER TOP OR BOTTOM COVER IS REMOVED USE EXTREME CAUTION DURING TROUBLESHOOTING ADJUSTMENT OR REPAIR AVOID DAMAGE TO INSTRUMENT BY REMOVING POWER BEFORE REMOVING OR REPLACING COVERS ASSEM BLIES OR COMPONENTS 5 15 Performance Test 5 16 GENERAL The performance test Table 5 4 and test card sheets that follow the test can be used to verify and record proper operation of all circuits of the counter and may also be used Aspart of an incoming inspection check of instrument specifications b Periodically for instruments used in systems where maximum reliability is important As part of a procedure to locate defective circuits d After any repairs or adjustments and before returning instrument to regular service e As a permanent record of instrument maintenance performed because the test record pages may be removed 5 17 REPAIR 5 18 Printed Circuit Component Replacement 5 19 Component lead holes in the circuit boards have plated through
276. t Sheet 1 of 2 Model 5328A Maintenance 5 53 OPTION 030 FREQUERCY C TROUBLESHOOTING FLOWCHAART I veros 0 BIAS GN OR U2 IS VALUES OF INCORRECT ES Ri 18 20 21 28 SUSPECT PNJ DV M0 5 PING 2 REPLACE COMPARE CHANGE Ui BOC CURRENT CURRENT THRU RIZ 8 R28 vi DR ua FOR SOURCE TO JAD BAD SOURCE DME LSOLATE CURRENT THRU RZD B H5 BETWEEN 28m4 AMD Soma PROBLEM SUSPECT R32 15 15 1 SYMP TI PUT SINEMAVE Is AVERAGE DOESA T COUNT AT ALL IN co INTO INPUT SIGNAL DC AT FREQ t BUT OK IN CHECK ay ui FIN 5 UI PIN TL 14 SUSPECT LIMITER ong 3 45 SUSPECT SYMPTOM OFFSET WON T ADJUST 50 BESI SENSITIVITY IS AWAY FADN THE EMO GF THE AJUST 82 15 Ll PIN BETWEEN Q AND 6 BETWEEN rxiv OFFSET POT 15 ADAUSTED SUSPECT 4 4 GR NOT REPLACE K1 2 3 4 MATCHED USE I GHZ SAWPLIMG PLUG 1H WAVE SENSITIVITY PUT 520MHZ APPROX T SENSITIVITY TOO HIGH Ow Y gt OK BELOW INTO 80 DUTY CYCLE wee x AT FREQUEHCIES ABOVE INPUT AT US PIN 3 CHECK VALUES OF ROE AND R39 SEE ON SCHEMATIC
277. terminates the sequence The same sequence must be used even to set 0 volts Examples 000 7 0 volts 123 1 23 volts 15 Channel Signal Conditioning a Coupling 2 AC B3 DC b Slope B4 B5 slope Attenuator B1 X100 B6 X10 B7 X1 16 Trigger Level B Btd d d See Group 15 Trigger Level A for details 17 Channel Invert B8 Normal B9 Invert A and inputs 18 Reset Trigger Also se Bus Command GET R Reset no trigger T Reset and trigger 3 15 Model 5328A Operation 3 75 MEASUREMENT OUTPUT FORMAT 3 76 The 5328AF 096 H42 transmits the following string of characters to output a measurement 2 3 thru 12 13 14 15 16 17 9 digits and Position 4 Character d CR LF SP decimal point O in the first position indicates measurement overflow Leading 8 s in positions 3 to 12 are output as 5 space if they occur to the left of the decimal point except for the g next to the decimal point The decimal point may appear at positions 4 to 12 The output string is always 17 characters long Typical character output strings are 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 7 SP 5 9 3 2 1 SP SP SP SP 5 4 3 0 8 5 3 1 8 9 10 1 12 13 14 15 16 17 7 6 9 8 6 CR LF 2 1 E 3 CR LF 5 4 2 9 6 CR LF The 5328AF 096 H42 inserts a 0 in position 12 of the output string for all measurements that don t use the ninth digit of the display This extra 0 fills the output string t
278. the B channel marker output such that the top of the marker just barely intersects both positive and negative slopes of the 100 Hz waveform Verify that this occurs at 2 volts on the 100 Hz waveform as shown Model 5328A Maintenance Table 5 4 Performance Test Continued CHANNEL B 1V DIV W a s 2 msec DIV Connect the 5328A A MARKER output to the A channel of the oscilloscope Adjust the position of the A MARKER as described above and verify that it intersects the 100 Hz sinewave at 2 volts Execute the following from the 9825A keyboard wrt 701 PF4G6S13A379 200 B37 200 R e Adjust the display of the A channel marker output such that the top of the wave form just barely intersects both positive and negative slopes of the 100 Hz waveform Verify that this occurs at 2 volts on the 100 Hz waveform B 1V DIV LM A 2 0 5V DIV 5 2 msec DIV Connect the 5328 marker output to the channel of the oscilloscope Adjust the position of the B marker as described and verify that it intersects the 100 Hz wave form at 2 volts e Mark results on performance test record Model 5328A Maintenance PERFORMANCE CHECK TEST CARD 5328A LLL Date DESCRIPTION FAIL s Sensitivity Channel A 1 10 Hz 10 MHz dc 2 20 Hz 10 MHz ac Sensitivity Channel A 1 10 MHz 100 MHz dc 2 10 MHz 100 MHz ac Sensitivity Channel A 1 10 Hz 10 MHz 2 20
279. three pin adapter HP Part No 1251 0048 for USA applications and connect the green lead on the adapter to earth ground See warning above If counter is to be operated with 230V ac line power an Underwriters Laboratories listed connector should be used to connect power 2 13 Operating Environment 2 14 Maximum and minimum allowable operating temperatures are listed in Table 1 3 If these limits are exceeded at the installation site auxiliary cooling or heating should be used to keep the environment within limits A l inch space above the counter should be clear to allow cooling air circulation The cooling fan exhaust port at rear is to be kept clear 2 15 Bench Operation 2 16 The instrument cabinet has plastic feet and the large tilt carrying handle will fold under for convenient bench operation The tilt handle permits inclining the instrument for ease in using front panel controls and indicators NOTE The tilt carrying handle may be secured in any position by tightening the knurled side screws 2 17 Rack Mounting 2 18 The counter is ready for bench operation as shipped from the factory To mount the counter in a rack it is necessary to order and install the rack flange kit listed in Table 7 2 CAUTION Ambient temperature in rack during operation should not exceed 112 F 50 C Be sure instrument position in rack permits adequate air circu lation and that nearby equipment does not discharge hot air directly on the inst
280. to the 5328A rear panel EXT OSC IN 4 With scope probe monitor A3U2 6 non component side of A3 circuit board 5 Adjust A3C15 and A3C12 to minimize side jitter in trace as shown in Figure 5 5 6 Put the scope in X10 and fine tune the adjustments for minimum jitter 5 27 TROUBLESHOOTING 5 28 Trouble isolation can best be accomplished by obtaining all possible information from the controls connectors and indicators on the 5328A This information should then be analyzed by conducting the Performance Test Table 5 4 to aid in determining symptoms of the trouble Troubleshooting aids are described in the following paragraphs 5 29 TROUBLESHOOTING AIDS 5 30 Troubleshooting flowcharts for each assembly of the 5328A are provided at the back of this section Extender boards and test cards are available as service kits This section contains a table for analysis of functional signals and a table for IC troubleshooting 5 31 Extender Board 05328 62016 5 32 Two of these extender boards are supplied with the 5328A to extend the A4 Function Selector Assembly or the A8 Frequency C Assembly One of these extender boards 5 required to extend the A10 assembly for the standard 5328 Model 5328A Maintenance A3 Out of Adjustment 2V 15 12 Adjusted for Minimum Jitter PARA ARR RAR Figure 5 5 A3 Jittler Adjustment Model 5328A Maintenance 5 33 IC Tr
281. tor Frequency Check 5 19 DAC Adjustment Equipment Connectors 5 22 DAC Adjustment Oscilloscope Readout and Adjustment Locations 5 23 Hookup for A3 Oscillator Support Adjustment 5 24 Jitter Adjustment 5 25 System Configuration Sample Printout 1 III 5 32 Hookup for Hookup for Test Described in Table 5 8 5 36 Triangular Pulse Observed in Steps 5 and 7 Table 5 8B 5 38 Assembly Flowchart Sheet 1 3 5 47 Assembly Flowchart Sheet 2 of 3 5 49 Assembly Flowchart Sheet 3 3 5 51 Local Troubleshooting Flowchart Sheet 1 2 5 52 Local Troubleshooting Flowchart Sheet 2 2 5 53 Address Switch Troubleshooting 5 54 Schematic Diagram 5328A Front sssawawakakakkhkkhuna te ete Rt c n 5328A Rear View 8 7 5328 Top eub eR E 5328A Bottom View A1 Motherboard 8 1
282. tor instructions including frequency measure ment of input signal time period time period average time interval time interval average and ratio between frequencies of two input signals THEORY OF OPERATION Covers a description of the general operating principles of the counter with reference to block and schematic diagrams of each assembly ection V MAINTENANCE Contains maintenance and service information including a list of assemblies recommended test equipment performance checks and adjustment Troubleshooting procedures and flowcharts are included in this section Section V REPLACEABLE PARTS Provides a complete list of replaceable parts and parts ordering information Section V MANUAL CHANGES Contains information on manual changes CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS Contains schematic diagrams and component lo cating illustrations 1 4 DESCRIPTION 1 5 The 5328A counter can be used to measure frequency period period average time interval time interval average and ratio The 5328A provides a 9 digit LED display display storage and leading zero blanking Decimal point and unit readouts are displayed automatically Two independent selectable input channels are provided for time interval measurements Each input channel has an attenuator trigger slope selector level control ac or dc coupling and an oscilloscope marker output Rear panel connectors provide a gate output one and 10 mega hertz output and an input
283. ts Time Interval Measurements Ratio Measurements Operating Controls 3 26 Function of Controls Indicators Inputs and Outputs Display L Power bihe cuca Va wawa bean wanes 3 31 Ue 333 Sample Rate Control Arming 3 8 Frequency Resoluton N Switch Input Channel Section 3 10 3 44 A and B Channel Signal Conditioning 3 10 Channel A er danse we 3 12 C Channel Overload Indicator 3 12 Hysteresis Band of Trigger Levels 3 12 External Frequency Standard Input 3 12 8 59 Marker 3 13 Gate Marker Out 3 13 ERN 1 MHz and 10 MHz Frequency Standard Outputs 3 13 Trigger Lights iis ias t eR e Rem 3 13 3 68 Programming Operation 3 13 3 71 Setting Add dress Switches 3 13 Measurement Output Format 3 16 BUS Commands vaciando Pols PU 3 16 3 79 Pro
284. umulated for START and STOP This is shown AMP TRIGGER DECADE COUNTING ASSEMBLIES AMP DISPLAY TRIGGER TIME BASE DECADE OSCILLATOR DIVIDERS Figure 4 3 Basic Elements of a Time Interval Counter ACCUMULATED COUNT Figure 4 4 Clock Pulses NOTE In a time interval measurement clock pulses are accumulated for the duration the main gate is open The gate is opened by one event START and closed by the other STOP 4 3 Model 5328A Theory of Operation 4 24 Resolution 4 25 The resolution of the measurement is determined by the frequency of the counted clock e g a 10 MHz clock provides 100 ns resolution The elements within the time interval counter input amplifier main gate DCA s must operate at speeds consistent with the clock frequency otherwise the instrument s resolution would be meaningless The 5328A counts a 10 MHz clock 4 26 Clock frequencies of 1 10 100 MHz and other 10 frequencies are preferred since the accumulated count with the appropriate placement of decimal point gives a direct readout of time interval This explains why the conventional time interval counter is at present limited to 10 nanoseconds a clock frequency of 100 MHz 1 GHz is beyond reach and a clock frequency of 200 MHz would require some arithmetic processing of the accumulated count in the DCA s to enable time to be displayed directly 4 27 Time Interval Averaging 4 28 This technique is based on the fact th
285. us 3 41 LDP T0 A1U18 9 PA Sl AAA RIA es m 3 J A A 40 2 RL LTOT Po 1 B 2801 pue amc dtc il xi ip J 40 toca E ACE et ms NN M 1605 ig 52 Jj E 02509 E Al j TRES 2 ust Frou uso mt 5 aL Tbe F L ee P 18 19 U26 16 PU E ESO APRETAR at 3 4 it X16 61 Ban TO FROM 37 B IA 18 eT A gt ee 2 ie oe x 8 8 cone RE cce XAISIT q De DISPLAY 1 36 0 FROM U36 6 16 EIA Cell COCO is ARES 36 ASSEMBLY R HTBA 35 A FROM U41 3 2 AO REE Tie s 2 RL T88 Eee AE ED 5 03306 var 16 AN A ed 35 cod ELIT ir MS E ss Em 5 M uras SAH AAA P u i PEEL J S s Varta Gu eS aT 2610 EP ee e s o ASY 028415 Cop eal s ns wan 2 16 RL HOPN Q
286. used to select the device to be strobed and pin 2 is an enable which determines the width of the strobe pulse The output of U25C disables 13 when the ASM is in the decision state mode In the decision state mode the format bit U22 17 goes high which disables U13 4 198 REMOTE PROGRAM STORAGE Storage circuits U28 U33 and U34 are used to program instrument functions U28 stores Time Base codes in 3 bit bytes and U34 stores Function codes in 4 bit bytes U33 stores 8 bits of information one bit at a time The Sample Rate Arming Storage Off and Decade Reset can be programmed by U33 In addition U33 4 5 and 6 control the manner in which measurements are made and output to the bus The inputs to the remote program storage circuits are the Module Data A B C and D lines from DIO lines 1 2 3 and 4 respectively NEXT STATE OF ASM U18 6 STROBE STORAGE LATCHES 18 3 RESET BINARY COUNTERS U14 23 U30 3 Figure 4 10 ASM Oscillator Timing Diagram Model 5328A Maintenance SECTION V MAINTENANCE 5 1 INTRODUCTION 5 2 This section gives maintenance and service information Included is a table of assemblies recommended test equipment a performance test which may be used to verify proper counter operations and adjustments 5 3 ASSEMBLY DESIGNATIONS 5 4 Table 5 1 lists the designations name and Hewlett Packard part number of assemblies used in this instrument 5 5 TEST EQUIPM
287. val and gated oscillator pulses for the mainframe After a reset pulse arrives on the HDS line the RS FFs US and U12 and D FFs U6A and U6B are reset At the same time the GOSC outputs are at ECL high When a start event enters U5D pin 12 it sets the U5A output to U6A pin 7 high The next clock pulse to U6 6 will cause U6A pin 3 to go low This pulls the coutput low signaling to the function selector that the time interval has started When TI goes low GOSC U13B starts to output oscillator pulses When a stop event occurs at U5 10 the output of U12C goes high This synchronous to the next clock pulse sets U16 15 high When U16 15 goes high the Tl and GOSC outputs go high stopping the time interval measurement The Q output of U6B through U13C U14B and resets all FFs and thus prepares them for the next measurement 4 130 ROM line RL6 HC connected to U14 11 by R6 is used in period measurements This line is set low in period and holds the stop FF U5C and U12C off until the start synchronizer U6A clocks a high to its Q output 4 131 In a PER AVG function where time base scaling takes place ROM line RL5 T10 is driven high This TTL high is converted to an ECL high by resistors R18 and R21 and applied through U14D to U12 1 This causes the stop synchronizer flip flop U5C and U12C to remain in a reset condition 4 132 The programming interface has two operational modes the non DAC and DAC contr
288. vements using DA Form 2028 2 located in the back of the manual simply tear out the self addressed form fill it out as shown on the sample fold it where shown and drop it in the mail If there are no blank DA Forms 2028 2 in the back of your manual use the standard DA Form 2028 Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms and forward to the Commander US Army Communications and Electronics Materiel Readiness Command ATTN DRSEL ME MQ Fort Monmouth New Jersey 07703 In either case a reply will be furnished direct to you This manual is an authentication of the manufacturer commercial literature which through usage has been found to cover the data required to operate and maintain this equipment The manual was not prepared in accordance with military specifications therefore the format has not been structured to consider categories of maintenance TABLE OF CONTENTS Section Page 0 INTRODUCTION PE dad wauu oe ass mans ar A aby sas 0 1 0 2 Indexes of Publications ee 0 1 0 3 Forms and Records L 0 1 0 4 Reporting Equipment Improvement Recommendations EIR 0 1 0 5 Administrative Storage 0 1 0 6 Destruction of Army Electronics 0 1 i ii blank Model 5328A Table of Contents TABLE OF CONTENTS Section Page GENERAL INFORMATION
289. vice 4 170 Any active device can set the SRQ service request line low This indicates to the con troller that some device on the bus wants attention say a counter that has just completed a time interval measurement and wants to transmit the reading to a printer 4 171 EOI end or identify is used by a device to indicate the end of a multiple byte transfer sequence When controller sets both the ATN and lines low each device capable of a parallel poll indicates its current status on the DIO line assigned to it 4 172 For a more detailed description of bus operation refer to the manual entitled Con densed Description of the Hewlett Packard Interface Bus HP Part No 59401 90030 4 173 HP IB A15 INTERFACE OPERATION 4 174 The 5328A HP IB Interface is used to remotely program the 5328A and deliver the mea surement results to the bus Thus the board operates both as listener and as talker 4175 As a listener the interface is capable of programming most of the controls in the mainframe and all programmable modules that may be installed The HP IB board contains storage circuits to control the mainframe remotely and 15 set up to program the storage circuits in any programmable module 4 176 As a talker the interface is capable of outputting the measurement data in exponential format with a mantissa of nine digits leading zeros are output as spaces and an exponent of one digit Overflow and signal information
290. y from 10 Hz to 10 MHz and verify that the 5328A displays the proper frequency Adjust the 5328 LEVEL A control as necessary to achieve a stable display Mark results on perform ance test record at the end of these procedures 2 AC coupled 20 Hz to 10MHz Set the 5328 to AC coupling Set the 651B for 15 mV rms Vary the 561B s frequency from 20 Hz to 10 MHz and verify that the counter displays the proper frequency Adjust the 5328 LEVEL A control as necessary to achieve a stable display Mark results on per formance test record at the end of these procedures Model 5328A Maintenance Table 5 4 Performance Test Continued 10 MHz to 100 MHz Setup HP 8601A HP 5328A HP 3406A BROADBAND GENERATOR INPUT A SAMPLING SWEEPER VOLTMETER 1 DC coupled 10 MHz to 100 MHz e Set the 5328A to DC COUPLING e Set the 8601A for an output level of 15 mV rms as measured on the 3436A RF voltmeter Vary the 6601A s frequency from 10 MHz to 35 MHz and verify that the counter displays correct frequency readings Increase the 8601A output level to 50 mV rms and vary the frequency from 35 MHz to 100 MHz Verify that the counter displays correct frequency readings Adjust 5328A LEVEL A control as necessary to obtain stable display Mark results on performance test record 2 AC coupled 10 MHz to 100 MHz e Set the 5328A to AC coupling Set the 8601A for an output level of 15 mV rms and repeat part 2 of step 1 above 2

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Sommaire/In This Issue    Adronic Components GmbH    Ammonium Sulfate with Coated Urea Ammonium Sulfate with  Home Audio Docking System  第11号（平成20年度） - 仙台高等専門学校 広瀬キャンパス  Monday, August 08, 2005 - The Quasar Group Digital Orthotics  HANDKREISSÄGE CIRCULAR SAW  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file